Home

Setting Up the System Guide - Command Alkon User Gateway

1. 8 9 05 243 2 00 0 20 0 25 2 45 ton 2 45 ton x 10 tons 24 50 e Distance Based ranges are not summed TOTAL MILES BASE MILES x DISTANCE RATE NEW RATE BASE RATE NEW RATE RATE PER UOM RATE PER UOM x UNITS HAULED TOTAL CARTAGE Example 24 10 x 0 20 2 80 2 00 2 80 4 80 ton 4 80 ton x 10 tons 48 00 Distance Based ranges are summed BASE BASE RATE OF MILES IN RANGI F OF MILES IN RANGI RANGE 2 RATE OF MILES IN RANGI RANGE 3 RATE This pattern continues until the total miles from the schedule file is reached Example 2 00 10 x 0 25 4 x 0 20 2 00 2 50 0 80 5 30 ton 5 30 ton x 10 tons 53 00 RANGE 1 RAT wN H XKX E E H To enter a new quantity distance cartage rate 1 Go to the Cartage Rate Code screen 2 Enter a Cartage Rate Table to identify the new cartage rate 3 Enter a Description and Short description for the cartage rate 4 Select Quantity Distance as the Rate Type Quantity Distance options EDTCTRT1 Main Range Rate UDM gt 60003 tons Cartage Type Charge x j Item Code gt fitz Cartage Minimum Charge Option Minimum Quantity B j Min
2. syu unsn pv 00 S 3 amp 3 pold 1U El AJOUSAUT JasJjO JUsWYSN py AsOJUSAUT BY p4o2 1 OL sjelajey ISO psepue js je AyQuenb Juswysn pe 00 SZ 3 amp 3 pold 1U El Mey AJOIUSAUT y 104 AJOJUSAU 0 se J12 p y pio2 1 OL unowy unowy yunoo35o5e A4 1u o Au d L uonmo5zesue L 1Ip 4D9 1iq d qns 1soo 3815 nuno55v OS Z SO9 puepue s isyiun oq Aiolu Au o1 JUdLUASN pY jdurex sju unsnfipy yonpoid 0 UOISJ AUOD BY 104 DOURLIE BDI SOD puepuejs y pue JSOD WO4J UOISJAAUOD 00 SS 3 amp 3 poid JUL jel4a e WP AJOJUSAUT J2 0 SY Ul PDUSIAJJIPD BY p109 1 OL Sjee wW ISO psepuejs e 00 00I 1873 poid 1U El Mey AJOJUSAUT JONPOIJd 104 AJOJUSAU 0 BSCSIDU BY P4ODI4 OL Joge UOISIaAUO 00 0 163 pold 1U El AJOUSAUT 4Oqe UOISJ8AUOZ y p410o2 1 OL Sjee wW ISO psepuejys 18 Z 00 0S 173 poid 1U El Mey AJOJUSAUT JONPOI 104 AJOJUSAU 0 Se 19 p y P4Oda4 OL Sjee wW ISO puepue s je T 00 S 1673 pold 1U El Mey AJOUSAUT JONPOI 104 AJOJUSAU 0 Se 1 p y pio2 1 OL yunouuyv unowy yunoo5o5e A4 1u o Au d L uonmo5esue L 1Ip 4O9 1iq d qns 1soo 3815 nuno55v 00 1 3SOD paepueys spun o0I 3onpoid 0 H AUOD oo sz 1oqe1 00 S 3509 psepueys sun OT Z 39npoid Oe 3SOD paepueys sun OT T 39npoid ZOU JIQAUOD ajdurex suoissaauoz 366 8 9 05 sjuswysn p
3. ENNEN ENKEN EEN ENNEN ENN 73 Signaling Unit Outgoing MESSAGES r 74 Signaling Unit Statuses rrssssssssssssssssasssrssraa 75 Au t Ticketing Interface EE 75 EICH TEE 75 Dispatch En EE 76 Gross Ticketing Lane Aegsagg eueegen ege gege eege NEE EE ENEE 76 Combo Lane Gross amp Tare 26 R ANERER ENEE 76 Supported ReaderS seet eege Eege 76 Scale Configuration testen 77 A ult Ticketirg Er 77 Auto Ticketing Units Setup EEN 77 Auto Ticketing Units Communication 78 Auto Ticketing Units Communication SmartPass 79 Auto Ticketing Units Lane Configuration NEEN 79 Auto Ticketing Units Libra Asphalt Interface Setup 80 Stop LightS t D BEE 80 Pre Ticketing SetU EEN 81 Scale Types tegen 81 Next Imb rS E 83 Bieielfut7 id Let 85 Document Tag SECUD EE 86 DOCUMENT Sale uf CEET 89 Tickets plant copy and dispatch copy 89 Data Out and Data In iavansiinrctietucridasessanmewsasiaiiaameniieaherendueeadaaneenades 89 Invoices Statements Quotes r 90 E t eri o getrennte EE ges EE 90 Adjusting Formats Using the Display Screen 91 Adjusting Formats Using the Document Fields Screen
4. Manufacturers Printers Epson FX 185 Epson FX 286e Epson Fx 800 Epson FX 850 Epson Fx 870 F ngan FX RAN gt Have Disk lt Back Cancel 5 Complete the Add Printer Wizard screens To configure a printer to emulate a generic print model 1 Press Mode and Print at the same time to print out the details of that printer s current configuration 2 Under the General Control group set the Emulation Mode item to Epson FXE 8 9 05 57 3 To save the new setting turn the printer off and back on Print Models The Print Models screen allows access to print model records that define the printing characteristics used by COMMANDseries applications for reports or listings The print model does NOT define the printer just the characteristics The specific printer is chosen after the Print Models Selection window is displayed using the Windows Print function Print models can simply specifiy basic layout information allowing the user to select a printer through Windows or they can specify layout information as well as direct print jobs to a specific printer Before entering print model information determine where you want output listings reports orders tickets invoices statements etc directed Also you need to know what brand and model printers will be connected to the system and what size paper will be used in each After the print models have been entered print a short re
5. m Driver Overtime Bei sl Driver Overtime Code 2 Description Saint Paul union overtime Short SPOT Week Begins CM fT CW Th CF e e Calculate Rolling Days Alert Hours Overtime Hours M Daily Dh o 2 00 M Weekly 2 00 4 00 M Rolling a 5 00 6 00 2 Enter a Driver Overtime Code of up to four characters Enter a Description of the table 3 4 Enter a Short description of the table This short description will print on reports in areas that are too small for the full description 5 Select the day of the week on which your scheduling Week Begins This information is used to calculate if current hours approach the limit for weekly overtime 6 Select Daily if you want the table to flag daily hours There are two fields associated with daily overtime Alert Hours represents the number of hours at which you want to be warned that a driver is approaching the limit for daily overtime The warning allows you to get the driver off the road and out of service before overtime kicks in Overtime Hours indicates the point at which the driver is actually accruing overtime 7 Select Weekly if you want to flag weekly overtime limits Enter the appropriate Alert Hours and Overtime Hours 8 Select Rolling if you want to track rolling overtime based on DOT regulations Enter in the Rolling Days field the number of days back you wish to track hours for If you enter 7 in this field then hours toward Rolling Overtime at any g
6. i Pouring Methods afer Fa Pouring Unload Rate per Method Description Short Hour LA WALL WALL 5 00 cy ER SLAB SLAB SLAB 5 00 cy d CURB CURB CURB n50 e d WHEE WHEEL WHEEL moo e d STD Standard Pouring Rate STD gt 5 00 cy d 2 Enter a Pouring Method code to identify the entry The code can be alphanumeric up to four characters in length 3 Enter a Description of the method 4 Enter a Short description of the method 5 Enter an Unload Rate per Hour Detail on this field to select a rate UOM the default will be cubic yards 6 Press Add Occurrence to add another pouring method or accept the screen Job Cost Phases amp Jobs You may have a construction job of you own whether it is building a new plant or expanding a current one In such cases it can be useful to track your material expenditures on the project COMMANDseries allows you to do this through establishing Job Cost tracking information This feature operates through two components Job Cost Phases identifies different stages in the job cycle bed flatwork foundation walls etc Job Cost Jobs identifies a specific job project Once these records are created they can be used whenever you ship material to an internal job By selecting the order type Job Transfer you indicate material to be used for internal work The job Cost Phase fields then appear on the order screen This feature provides two benefits Better tracking
7. 8 9 05 Form Name Screen Name Configuration EDTADJH2 Invoice and Tax Adjustments N A EDTADJH3 Open Adjustments N A EDTADJQ Quantity Adjustments N A EDTAJCD Adjustment Codes EDTARPD A R Accounting Period EDTARTB Customer Invoice N A EDTASNH Assignment Batch Information N A EDTASNH1 Assignment Transactions Detail N A EDTATKD Dispatch Truck N A EDTATKF Full Scale Ticketing EDTATKFB Truck amp Trailer Information EDTATKO Overhead Load Out N A EDTATKO1 Other Information N A EDTATKS Aggregate Ticketing EDTATKS1 Other Information N A EDTAUDT Audit Records EDTAUPR Audit Profile EDTAUTK Auto Ticketing Units EDTBEGI Beginning Inventory EDTBKCD Bank Codes EDTBWDH Balance Forward Batch Information N A EDTBWDH1 Balance Forward Transactions Detail N A EDTCCEA Enter Cartage Values N A EDTCNFX Configuration EDTCNFXA System Configuration EDTCNFXB Defaults Configuration EDTCNFXC Customer Defaults Configuration N A EDTCNFXD Distribution Configuration EDTCNFXE Dispatch Configuration EDTCNFXF Aggregate Configuration EDTCNFXG Invoicing Configuration EDTCNFXH Inventory Configuration EDTCNFXI Receivables Configuration EDTCNFXJ Aging Configuration EDTCNFXK Statements Configuration EDTCNFXL Financials Configuration EDTCNFXM Project Quotes Configuration EDTCNFXN
8. Enter the beginning ticket code in the range of valid ticket codes for this particular Ticket Sequence Enter the beginning invoice code in the range of valid invoice codes for this particular Invoice DM amp CM Sequence For the Quote Sequence enter a number for the beginning quote in the sequence 6 In the Ticket Sequence s Next field enter the next ticket code to use for plants using this next number sequence code This number must be equal to or greater than the number in the Sequence Begin At field and equal to or less than the number in the End At field This field indicates that the assignment of ticket codes can start over with the value in the Begin At field when the value in the End At field has been reached 84 8 9 05 7 Inthe Ticket Sequence s End At field enter the ending ticket code in the range of valid codes for this particular next number sequence code 8 Mark the Perpetual checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox causes the ticket number to roll back to the number specified in the Begin At field if it reaches and passes the number in the End At field 9 If desired you can create a Project numbering sequence The sequence will be used to number projects created through COMMANDquote and projects that do not have a code manually entered 10 This field allows the user to begin A R batches with a number other than one If the field is blank the A R sequence begins with 1 This f
9. Plant Description V 1 Birmingham Plant aj Jv 2 Hoover Plant Jv 3 Bessemer Plant Alabaster Plant J 1 Libra Test Plant Setup Select the plant s to which the user is assigned by selecting the box next to the plant name This field can be used to tie a plant record to the user and possibly to restrict the user s access to records at that plant Accept this screen to save the information Cost Centers Cost centers are business units that incur costs or expenses but do not directly generate revenue It is here that specific cost centers for budgeting purposes are made available to the user Caution At this point in the configuration process you have not yet created yor cost centers If you wish to link users to a cost center you will need to return to the user records after G L account information has been entered To assign cost centers 1 Select the Cost Centers tab on the Users screen Files gt System Information gt Users gt Cost Centers Users Cost Centers Tab EDTUSNM4 Preferences Licenses Privileges Order Printers Options Plants Cost Centers Cost Center Description x 000 Besch Mix Corp Office lt gt fo Ready Mix Plant 1 RI gt fioo2 Ready Mix Plant 2 SI Select the Cost Centers that will be available to the user from the Choices Cost Centers File screen To access the screen press the down arrow button or press lt Enter gt while in the Cost Centers fie
10. 5 Minutes cu yds Minimum Allowance Per Load Q Minutes Calculation Method JOrder D Round Delivered Quantity JActual z Writeoff Per Charge Minutes Unloading Charge Increment 5 Minutes Round Unloading Charge JActual E j Item Code elle Encess Unloading Create Unloading Charge On Last Ticket B Price 10 00 each Enter a Unloading Charge Table code to identify the new unloading charge table Enter information in the Description and Short description fields to describe the unloading charge table From the Beginning Tracking Statuses and Ending Tracking Statuses fields lists select the points between which the unloading times should be calculated In the Allowance Per Load field specify the amount of time to be allowed on a per load basis In the Allowance Per Unit field specify the amount of time to be allowed on a per unit basis if necessary This field s detail button allows you to change the unit upon which the allowance is based Note If values are placed in both of the previous two fields the allowance will 10 be accumulated For example 20 minutes per load with an additional 5 minutes per yard In the Minimum Allowance Per Load field specify the minimum amount of time to be allowed for any ticket using this charge table From the Calculation Method field s list select whether the charges should be based on the ticket order or project Determine how the delivered quantity in units shou
11. Combine on Data Out combines the extended material price and the sundry charge on the data out they are separated on the ticket and invoice Select the Target Unit of Measure when a charge type of Per Unit is selected Select Scheduled Load Time or Ticket Typed Time from the list in the Time to Use field Enter the Start Time and End Time These fields automatically display the default times of 00 00 to 23 59 for all sundry charges Based upon the selection for Time to Use sundry charges are applied for each ticket if that ticket s Scheduled Load Time and Ticket Typed Time are within these ranges 8 9 05 10 Check the Days to Apply Charge Depending upon the days of the week the sundry charge is to apply check the day when these charges are to be applied to the tickets If the checkbox for All is flagged the checkboxes for all days are marked 11 Enter the Current Amount Percent Minimum Ticket This is the dollar amount of the sundry charge if the charge type is either Per Unit or Flat Amount If the sundry charge type is Percent of Ticket enter the percentage rate i e 10 percent 12 5 percent If the charge type is Minimum Ticket enter the total minimum ticket dollar amount Do not enter a percent rate for a Per Unit Flat Amount or Minimum Ticket Charge Type 12 Enter the Effective Date for the amount percent or minimum ticket values entered above to take effect on current day orders and tickets 13 The Previous
12. When setting up a receipt consider the type of printer the size of the type style font and the length of the form on which the statement will be printed to ensure that all desired information will fit in the space allowed on the statement The information shown in the various elements of the receipt is dependent upon the user defined setup of these documents in the Document Formats screen The Document Format Group Type field on the Document Format Group Codes screen should display Receipt To set up receipt format codes 1 Select the Formats button on the Document Format Group Codes screen Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Format Groups gt Formats The Receipt Quote Format Codes screen displays Receipt Format Codes EDTDOCG4 m Receipt Format Codes RECEIPT Command Data Receipt 17 pitch Header CDIRCHDI CDI Receipt Header F Display Detail Line CDIRCDTI CDI Receipt Detail F Footer gt CDIRCFT1 CDI Receipt Footer Plain 1 pitch Number of lines in body of form 25 2 Enter the document format codes for each desired field The table below shows the available codes and suggestions for their content Header The Header of a receipt is generally printed at the beginning of each page and typically consists of information such as the customer name and address and date Detail Line The Detail Line of a receipt is generally printed in between the Header and Footer for each
13. 51 00 per ton rate 15 e 51 00 S765 total cartage for the load Accept this screen to save the cartage rate and related information Cartage Surcharge Codes The Cartage Surcharge Codes represent additional payments applied to a cartage transaction Such charges called surcharges are common in 8 9 05 situations where environmental charges fuel labor or truck expenses are required for a certain load To enter a cartage surcharge code 1 Go to the Surcharge Code screen Files gt Cartage Information gt Cartage Surcharge Codes 2 Enter a Surcharge Code to identify the new cartage rate Cartage Surcharge Codes EDTCTSG F Cartage Surcharge Codes lel x Surcharge Code ENV Description Environmental Surcharge Short JENVIRON Cartage Type Payment D j Item Code gt 97 Surcharge Rate Type Per quantity D Hate 0 40 Rate Unit of Measure gt 8000 each Rate is a Percent First load only JV Print charge separately Use scheduled load as minimum Auto assign 3 Enter a Description and Short description explaining the cartage surcharge 4 Set the Cartage Type as Payment if the cartage fee is directly paid to the hauler Charge if the cartage fee is to be charged to the customer Both if the cartage fee is sometimes paid and sometimes charged 5 Select a surcharge Product Code This code will appear on the customer ticket and or invoice it is used to define the taxability of th
14. 91 Mask Nee EE 94 Document Format dE arresrnoirerrenretrite nienti taoin INEEN EE EEEE E EENE 95 Document Format Group Setup 96 Invoice Forrmat Codes S8t pD WEE 97 Statement Format Codes Setup r 98 Project Quote Format Codes Setup 100 Receipt Format Codes Setup Eder 101 Invoice Out Format Codes Satu EE 102 Ticket Overflow Format Codes Setup e NEEN ENEE EE 102 File Import Export Format Codes Setup 103 Document Formatting WEE 104 Message I eXU gedd eege deg RER ed EE SEN REES SEN a deeds akaqa 106 Initial Accounting Information 108 Inventory Accounting Periods siiicciisccvssedscddeccnrset SES ERKENNEN EK EEKN ENEE EEN ENER 108 A R Accounting EE 109 G L Accounting P ri ds E 110 Bank Codes seed deed uge 111 AdJ stment Codes ett eege en ege E Eege 112 Tax Ef e et 113 Tax A thority LOCatI nS EEN 114 Ce EE 117 Credit ge ege EE ee Eed 117 Terms CodeS carreira aea E EE kayywianai apana ha sby ma ayway saq 120 Entering Terms Codes Basic Definitions 120 Entering Terms Codes Examples 121 ACCOUNTING EC ee 124 Sales Analysis COMES Ee dE NEEN NEEN NEEN dunn Eu EAEE e RE nde dE 125 Conf
15. The G L booking file assigns a specific account code and cost center to each type of transaction supported within COMMANDreceivables The General Ledger Booking Codes screen lists a series of detail levels for each type of G L entry These detail levels get more specific from top to bottom left to right across the screen You can assign account codes and cost centers among these levels of detail in the manner that best suits your general ledger system Each selected radio button displays a detail screen that allows for the entry of account codes and or cost centers When you make a G L entry the system searches for account codes and cost centers up through the various detail levels from most specific to least specific As soon as it finds both an account code and cost center for an entry it terminates the search Note See the appendix for sample GL Booking Codes To set up G L booking codes 1 Select Files gt GL Information gt GL Booking Codes 2 Enter a code in the Type of Entry field 3 Choose a radio button from the list that appears below the Type of Entry field to specify the detail level of account code and cost center assignment The detail levels get more specific from top to bottom left to right across the screen Note Remember that you can assign an account code for one type of entry to a certain detail level and the cost center for the same type of entry to another detail level For example for Charge Sales you
16. 10 11 12 13 Select RAW from the Default Datatype field Mark the Always spool RAW Datatype checkbox and click OK Select the Scheduling tab and slide the Priority slider to the center Select Start printing after last page is spooled and click OK To connect to the above printer with an NT client 1 2 3 Double click the Add Printer icon Select Network Printer and click Next Select the proper printer To connect to the above printer with a Windows 95 98 client SE L SS a bu n m Double click the Add Printer icon Select Network Printer and click Next Select the proper printer and click Next Enter the name of the printer and click Finish Right mouse click on the printer s icon and select Properties Select the Details tab Click the Spool Settings button Mark the Start printing after last page is spooled checkbox From the Spool Data Format pull down menu select RAW and click all OK buttons to complete the procedure To set up a networked printer on Windows NT DYU Ps ZS Double click the Add Printer icon Mark the Network Printer Server checkbox and click the Next button Enter the printer and click Next Click Finish Right click on the new printer icon and select Properties Click the Print Processors button and select RAW from the Default Datatype field s pull down menu Mark the Always Spool RAW Datatype and click OK Select the Scheduling tab and move the Priority slider
17. 3 Double click on the UOM code to close the UOM screen and apply the UOM setting UOM Related Fields When creating Items and Item Categories there is more than just a single UOM to be entered The screen below shows the UOM settings for a typical aggregate constituent Item editor EDTIMST2 Main HOM Conversions Sales Tax Override Locations Costs Prices Inventory Batching Batch Codes Ordered Quantity Ordered Quantity Extension Code 60003 Tons Per Unit z Delivered Quantity Ticket Quantity Extension Code 60003 Tons Delivered Quantity zl J Accumulate Price Quantity Price Quantity Extension Code 60003 Tons Delivered Quantity D Batch Inventory Cost Purchase Reporting 60002 pounds 60003 Tons 60003 Tons 60003 Tons There are seven different UOM settings In addition there are three Quantity Extension Codes which determine how various totals are represented Topics in this section Ordered Quantity Delivered Quantity Price Quantity Batch Quantity Inventory Cost Quantity Purchase Quantity Reporting Quantity Ordered Quantity The Ordered Quantity defines how the item is measured at Order Entry When an order taker enters 3 for the amount of pea gravel ordered by the customer the Ordered Quantity UOM determines if that 3 designates three pounds three tons three cubic yards three metric tons etc The Ordered Quantity value is extended to th
18. Licenses Privileges Order Printers Options Plants Cost Centers JV Allow Suspending of Orders Tickets Products for Invoicing Allow Release of Credit and Debit Memos Allow Release of Orders Tickets Products for Invoicing Allowed to Create Original Invoices and Re print In j Invoice Print Option Allow Access to Order Level Mix Design Allow Override of Unapproved Mix Designs in Tickets Allow Project Updates from Orders Tickets Allow Overhead Loading Allow Access to Quotes for Orders Restrict customer lookup to company Suppress Minimum Load Charge Messages in Tickets Suppress Seasonal Charge Messages in Tickets Suppress Display of Pricing Information Messages Auto Display Shipping Address in Orders Tickets Auto Display Instructions in Orders Tickets Auto Display Possible Projects in Orders Tickets Auto Display Possible Products in Orders Tickets Mark the checkbox of the necessary options The options are listed below left to right top to bottom 2 Allow Suspending of Orders Tickets Products for Invoicing gives the user the privilege to suspend orders tickets or products so that the particular transaction will not be invoiced 3 Allow Release of Credit and Debit Memos gives the user privilege to edit an AR creditor debit memo in a released status for posting 4 Allow Release of Orders Tickets Products for Invoices gives the user the privilege to release un suspend an order
19. Price gt Price Extension z Effective Previous Price sl Price Extension D Enter the customer specific charge rates and accept the screen to return to the Customer Charges tab 9 Proceed to the next tab or accept the screen to save the customer information 8 9 05 265 Customer Accounting Setup The Accounting tab allows you to enter accounting information for the customer To enter customer accounting information 1 From the Customers screen select the Accounting tab Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers gt Accounting Customers Accounting Tab EDTCUSTG Main Addresses Sales Taxing Pricing Charges Accounting H Invoicing Distribution Products Statement Cycle Monthy zl Credit Card Name E Accounting Category a n Tag Credit Card Number DI Responsible Name af E bh Apply Finance Charges Expiration Date kL _ Print Statements Company Credit Code Change Date Credit Limit High Balance Credit Person H an Aart 13 Mar 2002 f 100 000 00 40000 S po E Required in Order Enty Pre Lien Date Calculation Number of days After Pre Lien Compare Date Hf Purchase Order Lien Required NotRequred Customer Job IT Extemal Liens Suspend Order Reason Code gt 2 Enter a Statement Cycle This is the cycle code for the printing of customer statements Statement cycle codes can be Weekly Bi weekly Semi monthly or Monthly 3 Enter an
20. Setting Up the System Guide Baseline Version 5 57 9 8 9 05 Command Alkon Solutions To Build On 2005 Command Alkon Incorporated All rights reserved Command Alkon Incorporated believes the statements contained herein are accurate as of the date of publication of this document HOWEVER COMMAND ALKON INCORPORATED HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANT OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE In no event will Command Alkon Incorporated be liable for any damages including any lost profits lost savings or other incidental or consequential damage arising out of the use of or inability to use any information provided through this publication even if Command Alkon Incorporated has been advised of the possibility of such damages or for any claim by any other party Some states do not allow the limitation or exclusion of liability or consequential damages so the above limitation may not apply This information is not intended to be an assertion of future action The contents of this document are for informational purposes only and are subject to change without notice Command Alkon Incorporated expressly reserves the right to change or withdraw current products that may or may not have the same characteristics listed in this publication Should Command Alkon Incorporated modify its products in a way that may affect the information contained in this p
21. The Plant Communication Setup screen displays Enter a Manager Number and a Port Name 1 4 The Prompt field changes to a Port button Click the Port button on the Plant Communications Setup screen The Communication Port Setup screen displays Communication Port Setup EDTPLNTD m Communcation Port Setup 00005 EN Baud Rate I m d Data Bits Eo d Parity None E Stop Bits i i Flow Control Xon Xoff El In the Baud Rate field select the number that represents the bits of data that the port can transfer per second In the Data Bits field enter the number of bits that comprise a unit byte of data In the Parity field select the type of parity that is used to check for errors during transmission The options are Even Odd None Mark or Space In the Stop Bits field select the number of bits that indicate a byte has been transmitted In the Flow Control field select the process used to control the flow of information The options are as follows None no flow control method is used XON XOFF the receiving port sends an XOFF signal when the buffer a temporary storage area is full the port stops sending data the receiving port sends an XON signal when it is ready to receive more data Hardware flow control is determined by the hardware 11 Accept the screen to return to the Plant Communications Setup screen Plant Batching Setup To set up plant batching information 1 From the Plants scr
22. Tickets with Cost SELPLTL Plant Loading Report SELPLTP Plant Production Scales Bin Product SELPORG Purchase Order Register SELPSLS Product Sales Usage Report SELQTPR Quote Print SELQUOT Quote Listing SELRCAP Order Recap Report SELRCTC Receipts Cost Updates SELRECP Receipts Print SELROST Truck Roster Report SELSLBK Quote Sales Backlog Report SELSLSS Sales Analysis Summary Report SELSLSS1 Summary by Data Range SELSTMT Statements SELSTXD Sales Tax Distribution SELTICK Ticket Report SELTIMA Time Analysis Report SELTIME Time Analysis Report Executive 8 9 05 Form Name Screen Name SELTOUT Ticket Data Out SELTRCP Transactions Recap Report SELTRKG Truck Demand Graph SELTRNI Inventory Transaction Registers SELTRNR Receivables Transactions Registers SELTROR Transfer Orders Register SELTRPT Transactions Reports SELUCHG Calculating Unloading Charges SELUSEX Item Usage Exception Report SELVERS Database Updates SELVOUT Inventory Data Out System Forms SYS Form Name Screen Name Configuration SYSFORM Run Form N A SYSMSGS Message Display N A SYSPREF Preferences N A SYSPREF1 General Tab SYSPREF2 User Tab SYSPREF3 Sounds Tab SYSPREF4 Colors Tab SYSPREF5 Tracking Tab SYSPREF6_ Fonts Tab SYSPREF7 Keys Tab SYSPREF8 Toolbar Tab SYSPREF9 Forms Tab SYSPREFA Confirm N A SYSPRNT Print
23. the default UOM is tons that can be changed by detailing on the field Let s say that you entered 1000 When a truck drives onto the scales COMMANDseries gets the weight and compares it to the tare weight in the truck record If the scale weight is greater than the truck tare weight 1000 the system concludes that the truck is loaded and tickets it using the weight as a gross weight Otherwise the truck is tared at the new weight 15 Accept this tab to save the Aggregate Configuration settings or select another tab to configure more information 8 9 05 145 Signaling Configuration The Signaling tab allows to establish system level settings for the Mobile and Auto Signaling systems _ Configuration Signaling Tab EDTCNFXQ System Defaults Distribution Dispatch Aggregate Signaling Invoicing Inventory Default GPS Radius 50 GPS Indication Symbol E Map Interface Type MapPoint x Truck Poll Type Poll First Truck Y Update Coordinates for Trucks in Progress Default Update Project Map Coordinates Default Update Order Map Coordinates 1 Default GPS Radius establishes the standard radius used by Auto Signaling to determine if a truck has reached a given destination Note The UOM for this field is meters that UOM cannot be changed 2 The Tracking screen uses the GPS Indication Symbol to designate addresses with valid GPS coordinates The symbol is displayed at the beginning of the Delivery Addr
24. A 2 00 000Z g AueduuoS2 g Auedwos s uno22y uv Sg Aueduuoo ul uopnpa y p4oda4 OL jqen Y 00 0008 v Auedwios v Auedwosy s uNODDV iv SV Auedwos u uononp 1 y p4oda4 OL v Auedwoy 00 0000I yueg v Aueduioo PaeAladoy useo Ag peysodap use2 Jo 1di 2 1 y pio5 1i OL ozioAu g Aueduuoo e 104 v Aueduioo q p ysod p pue p AI 2 1 s 1u uu ed e JI qe A 2 J qe8A 52 sjuno525v 00 00I ueduioo ueduuoo s uno22y uo JUNODSIG y JO Daag y p109 1 OL 00 001I ueduioo Auedwop ua ye siunoosid Udye JUNODSIP e p109 41 OL qP A 2 J qeA 2 00 00SS Auedwo7 Auedwo7 s uno22y syuno255v 0 uononp 1 y p109 1 OL yueq 00 00SS yueg Auedwo7 peAladoy useo e 0 p y sod p ysed jo daa y P4odo4 OL yunouiwy unowy yuno535o5e A4 1u o Anuga d L uonmo5esue L P 19 1iq d qns 1soo 3815 nyunoo5o5v 361 s u ur uq S2 q AI3221GNVWWOD 8 9 05 a GeAlIaday 00 00I ueduioo Auedwo7 s uno22y q8AI 5 w S JUNODDY UO Daag y p102 41 OL 00 O0T Auedwio7 Auedwoy sabseys asoueul4 aBseyd sdueuls e P4oda4 OL JUNOWY unowy yuno5o5e A4 1u o Anuga d L uonmoesue L 1Ip 49 1iq dqd qns 1soo 3815 n3uno55v S IPYJ 2uburr qP A 2 J g OD o1 5oug eq 00 00I g Aueduuo5S g Aueduuoo sjuno29vV anep u v 0D e Jo 1u uuu DBisse y pio2
25. EDTORDRS Associated Products Information N A EDTORDRU Round Trip Trucks EDTORDRV Clear Round Trip Trucks EDTORDRX Order Payment Information N A EDTPCHG Sundry Charges EDTPHSE Job Cost Phases N A EDTPLNT Plants EDTPLNT1 Main Tab EDTPLNT2 Communication Tab EDTPLNT3 Batching Tab EDTPLNT4 Scheduling Tab EDTPLNT5 Costing Tab EDTPLNT6 Scales Tab EDTPLNT7 Batching Bins Tab EDTPLNT8 Constituent Order Tab EDTPLNT9 User Defined Fields Tab EDTPLNTA Plant Communication Setup EDTPLNTB Check Plant License N A EDTPLNTC Scale Communication Information EDTPLNTD Communication Port Setup Form Name Screen Name Configuration EDTPLNTE Plant Scale Bins EDTPLNTF Plant Flags Tab EDTPLTV Plant Unavailability EDTPMET Pouring Methods EDTPMTH Payment Method Batch Information N A EDTPMTH1 Payment Transactions Detail N A EDTPMTH2 Invoice Details N A EDTPMTH3 Open Payments N A EDTPMTH4 Find Duplicate Check Information N A EDTPMTH5 Find Duplicate Invoice Information N A EDTPMTH6 Invoice and Tax N A EDTPMTH7 Miscellaneous Payments N A EDTPMTH8 Payment Discount Information N A EDTPMTH9 Filter Options N A EDTPMTHA Possible Tickets N A EDTPMTHB Check Credit Card Information N A EDTPOHD Purchase Order Information EDTPORC Purchase Order Receipts EDTPRCC
26. Files gt General Information gt Auto Ticketing Units 8 9 05 77 Auto Ticketing Units EDTAUTK1 m uto Ticketing Units 2 Enter the Auto Ticketing Unit code 3 Enter the long Description of the auto ticketing unit 4 Enter a Short description to be used in a number of fields to conserve screen space 5 Enter a Unit Type Current auto ticketing options are XCI LC20K Bar Code SmartPass SmartPass Buffer Control Toledo 9360 The other two options in the drop down menu Libra Asphalt and Astec WM2000 are asphalt interfaces and will be discussed elsewhere Auto Ticketing Units Communication The available fields on the Communication tab are determined by the Unit Type All fields will be discussed below To set up communication 1 Select the Communication tab from the Auto Ticketing Units screen Files gt General Information gt Auto Ticketing Units gt Communications This image shows all communications fields 8 9 05 2 Enter a Manager Number This specifies the COMMANDcomm manager number to be used when auto ticketing 3 If you have selected a Unit Type other than SmartPass the Port Name field displays Enter an LPT or COM Port Name When a COM port is entered a Port button appears Click on the button to set up the printer or modem that COMMANDcomm will use to print orders See the Communications Port Setup section of this manual Note The Communication Port Setu
27. General Information gt Employees Employees Salesmen and Credit Persons To establish the employees that function as salesmen and credit persons to be assigned to customers Files gt General Information gt Employees Reason Codes Non tax To establish reasons that non taxable sales are generated Files gt General Information gt Reason Codes Reason Codes Canceled Items To establish the reason codes to be assigned to canceled orders and tickets Files gt General Information gt Reason Codes Reason Codes Suspended Items To establish the reason codes to be assigned to suspended orders and tickets Files gt General Information gt Reason Codes T2 System C C I I AE CIQIL Information C A Y G IR X T U N Purpose Reason J To establish the reason codes to Codes be assigned to lost quotes in the Lost Quote system Files gt General Quotes Information gt Reason Codes Modem JY JS S To set up modem codes and Codes characteristics to be used by the system for any dial up plants Files gt General Information gt Modem Codes Signaling JY J To set up signaling units and Units characteristics for interfaces Files gt General Information gt Signaling Units Scale Types S To set up scale types and characteristics for interfaces Files gt General Infor
28. SELDPTR Deposit Register SELDRVC Driver Call Out Report SELDSPS Dispatch Sheet Report SELEXCP Exception Reports Selection SELFNCH Finance Charge Trial Balance SELFOUT Master File Data Out SELGLDS G L Distribution Report SELGRSM Gross Margin Report SELHREV Hauler Revenue Report SELHSET Hauler Settlement Sheet SELIGLD Inventory G L Distribution SELINVC Invoice Print SELINVF Final Invoice Register SELINVP Preliminary Invoice Register SELIOUT Invoice Data Out SELIVBL Inventory Balance Report SELIVCF Update COMMANDfinancials SELIVPS Post Inventory Transactions Form Name Screen Name SELIVPT Purge Inventory Transactions SELIVTR Inventory Analysis Report SELJOBS Jobs Listing SELLNCM Certified Mail Report Selection SELLNEV Lien Event SELLNEV1 Lien Event Handler SELLNRP Lien Report SELMATR Raw Material Requirements Report SELMFIN Master File Data In SELMIST Missing Time Report SELONTM On Time Delivery Report SELOOUT Order Data Out SELORDR Concrete Order Report SELOSCH Order Schedule Report SELOSNP Order Snapshot Report SELOTIN Order and Ticket Data In SELOVTM Overtime Report SELPCHG Calculate Price Change Sundry Charges SELPCHG1 for Specific Products SELPCHG2 for Specific Product Categories SELPCHG3 for Specific Product Types SELPCOS Percentage Outstanding Report SELPCUP Update Orders
29. Truck s Minimum Load Size times Pay Rate Truck s Schedule Load Size times Pay Rate If the Minimum Pay Option is set to Minimum Amount the Minimum Charge Pay field displays This field is the minimum pay allowable with this table If the Minimum Pay Option is set to Minimum Quantity the Minimum Quanitity and Maximum Quantity fields display The Minimum Quantity indicates the smallest cartage chage that will be calculated If desired you can also enter a Maximum Quantity to set a cap on cartage changes for the table If desired go to the Range tab The Range tab is configured just like a standard range based cartage table The various rates listed on the range tab can be incorporated into the equation Select the Equation tab to enter a user defined equation for determining the cartage rate Equation Tab preggsenesncescenzencenees Equation 2 lt distance gt lt def rate gt Field List B j Insert To enter equations type in any numbers and mathematical symbols that you need To enter field information into the equation select the field from the Field List drop down list then select Insert In the table above 0 85 is the Default Rate the Rate UOM is US tons meaning that the rate is per ton and the equation is 2 lt distance gt lt def rate gt If a load of 15 tons was hauled to a site 30 miles from the plant the cartage would be calculated as follows 2 x 30 60 miles round trip distance 60 x 0 85
30. Using Explorer locate the CMDSERIE ASN file in the CMDSERIE CLIENTS directory Note This directory path may be different if COMMANDseries was installed somewhere other than the default directory 2 Double click the file to open it for editing 3 It may be necessary to associate the file with an application before editing it If so the Open With program selection dialog box automatically appears Select Notepad to view the CMDSERIE ASN file 4 Enter dot and the path for Microsoft Word templates COMMANDseries will automatically create a Doc folder in the COMMANDseries root directory and will create a number of sample quote templates there Example dot x cmdserie doc 5 Enter exe and the path for the CADocPrint executable application Example exe x cmdserie bin WARNING As is the case for all ASN file entries be certain that all spelling is correct Note These settings can also be entered through the Assignment File Wizard which can be invoked from the COMMANDseries Program menu 6 Save and close the assignment file Creating Document Templates The Word Quote templates are standard Microsoft Word templates that contain special formatting to control the placement of database fields and tables The SAMPLEQUOTEALL DOT file contains all the fields and tables available for placement in a word quote template You can copy and paste from this template to
31. allows the user to assign a reason for the adjustment Debit Credit Memo Order allows the user to assign a reason for a debit or credit memo order Truck Unavailability provides a means of classifying periods during which a truck in unavailable scheduled maintenance repairs etc Plant Unavailability provides a means of classifying periods when a plant is unavailable Non taxable reason codes are used in the Customers Projects Order Entry Items Edit Orders and Tickets Prep and Configuration Defaults screens to explain a customer is set to a non taxable status Before entering reason codes information gather information about each type of reason code you want to enter Each reason code type should have at least two reason codes entered if you want to track the reason code type To enter a reason code 1 Go to the Reason Codes screen Files gt General Information gt Reason Codes Reason Codes EDTRSNC A Reason Codes Le Op x Reason Usage Short Removed Item z j Jn Customer cancelled order Cust Can Removed Item z Removed Item z Suspended ltem H j Suspended ltem X j Code Description CT 1G Si ai lb LLL gt a fa at Ticket generated for wrong truck No tuck EE Ticket generated for wrong order No order EE Customer disputes price Dispute Non taxable Item ES Non taxable Item xj 32 Delivery Exempt Delv Exm Non taxable Item zj 33 Reseller Reseller d g
32. defaults information Customer Accounting Defaults Setup The information on this tab serves as default information for the corresponding customer file fields To enter customer accounting defaults 1 From the Customer Defaults tab select the Accounting button Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Customers gt Accounting Customer Accounting Defaults EDTCNFX7 m Customer Accounting Defaults Receivables Information Statement Cycle Monthly M Accounting Category gt E Trade Customers Z Apply Finance Charges IV Print Statements Credit Information Credit Code sl AA Okay to sell Credit Limit 5 000 00 Required in Order Entry Purchase Order Customer Job Suspend Order Reason Code ll Enter the default Statement Cycle and Accounting Category Mark the Apply Finance Charges checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox causes the automatic application of finance charges Mark the Print Statements checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox causes statements to print automatically Select a Credit Code and a Credit Limit to default for all customers Mark the Purchase Order and Job Number checkboxes if necessary When marked these checkboxes cause a purchase order and or job number respectively to be required in Order Entry 136 7 Select a Suspend Order Reason Code This code is helpful if billing preparation begins at the plant and is completed at a billing office
33. document formats that make up the statement document being defined Each of the elements must already be defined using the Document Formats screen Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Format Groups gt Formats When setting up a statement consider the type of printer the size of the type style font and the length of the form on which the statement will be printed to ensure that all desired information will fit in the space allowed on the statement The information shown in the various elements of the statement is dependent upon the user defined setup of these documents in the Document Formats screen The Document Format Group Type field on the Document Format Group Codes screen should display Statement To set up statement format codes 1 Select the Formats button on the Document Format Group Codes screen Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Format Groups gt Formats The Statement Format Codes screen displays Statement Format Codes EDTDOCG2 m Statement Format Codes 2 STATEMENT EN Header sl STFO1201 Std Statement Header Form 12 pitch Display Line Header gt STFO1202 Std Statement Detail Hdt Form 12 Detail Line gt STFO1203 Std Statement Detail Line Form 12 pitch Line Footer gt STFO1204 Std Statement Detail Ftr Form 12 pitch Message Lines gt STFO1205 Std Statement Message Form 12 pitch Footer gt STFO1206 Std Statement Footer Form
34. e 199 Price ee el ET 199 Usage C d s deiere 200 Units of Measure UOM n ERENNERT ESA ER 201 UOM Related Fields EE 202 Ordered QUANTITY EE 203 Delivered Kat ng LE 203 Price QUENULY eege EE 204 Bat h Quantity sasivcxutvdduorvnendevnasbuusaeandeaemmnandnadmanendddtsacraxmeniandenasenesds 204 Inventory Cost Quantity EE 205 Purchase an e Le EE 205 R porti g e ul EEN 205 Liem ee Lee 205 Item TY DOS ee E ee Ee 205 Item Categories e EE 206 Item Categories UOM Setup EE 207 Item Categories Mix Defaults Setup ae 208 Item Categories Tax Override Setup 209 EMS serseri enee Nee ee Se dee ege dg ge SEENEN gege EE deeg de 209 Initial Iteni REES tu ee Eer DEEN EE 211 IEM ENUY EE 211 Item Main Tab SetUD EE 212 Item UOM Setup EE 213 Item CONVERSIONS Setup ee Edge dee ean a a ea 213 Item E ET 214 Item Tax Override Setup EE 215 Item Mix Setup eege eege 216 Item User Fields Setup giereg Edge Eed 217 Item LocauonsS SetU NEEN 218 Item Costs SetU ER 219 8 9 05 7 Item Prices EE ege EE e EE ER 220 Item Inventory Setup EE 221 Item Batching Setup WEEN 222 Item Batch Codes Setup s sssssssssssesesnsnunrnnnrrnrnnnrenrosssessnssnenunnnnenennnnn 224 Item Constituent Set p uuuuunssauu aaa s kayusasqapan papi aa eps aaa pesasqaqawnawasq 224 Automatic ProdUCtS EEN 225 Hints for Entering Items EE 226 Minimum Load Charge EE 227 Seasonal Charg s sscccevsscactextedvnsesase ni rinine E REEE
35. gt Addresses or Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Projects gt Addresses Projects Addresses Tab EDTPROJB Main Addresses Pricing Accounting Invoicing Distribution Distances Products Forecast Invoice Name RES a Address City State Country Postal Code Statement Name Address EE City L State o County Postal Code 2 Enter the Name and mailing Address information specific to the customer s invoices SS 277 3 Enter the Name and mailing Address information specific to the customer s statements 4 Enter the Name and mailing Address information specific to this customer s shipping location 5 Accept the screen to save the project or proceed to the Pricing tab Initially only the Invoice and Statement addresses are visible Use the scroll bar to display the shipping address Entering Project Pricing Information The Pricing tab includes information related to trade discounting terms code assignments for payment discounts plant and price category assignments that control aspects of pricing and flags that control automatic charges related to pricing Pricing settings are an integral part of the quote process accordingly all of the settings on this tab will default from the quote file They can be subsequently edited as needed To define project pricing information 1 From the Projects screen select the Pricing tab Quotes gt
36. is used on screens and reports when the source code is referenced Enter an abbreviated version of that description in the Short field that is used on screens and reports where the Description will not fit 4 Mark the Force Balance checkbox if debits and credits must balance before the batches using this source code can be posted It is highly recommended that you use the Force Balance feature as it greatly 300 reduces the number of errors that make their way into the general ledger 5 Mark the Maintain Quantity checkbox if data from this source will contain quantity statistical values rather than financial or monetary values 6 To add another source code select the Add or Insert Occurrence button at the end of the last line 7 When you re finished entering information accept the screen to save the source codes Cost Centers Cost Centers identify the locations within your business where accounting activity takes place For example you can create cost centers that represent such entities as plants pits the maintenance shop the main office etc Cost centers can be grouped together on financial reports in any fashion to accommodate divisional regional or company totals To set up a cost center 1 Open the Cost Centers screen Files gt GL Information gt Cost Centers 2 Enter a Cost Center number This code is used to access cost center information in other programs It is also used to sort various reports
37. screen Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Format Groups gt Formats The Invoice Format Codes screen displays Invoice Format Codes EDTDOCG1 W Invoice Format Codes 1 INVOICE x Header sl INF01201 Std Invoice Header Form 12 pitch Display Line Header sl JINFO1202 Std Invoice Detail Header Form 12 Detail Line gt JINFO1203 Std Invoice Detail Line Form 12 pitch Line Footer gt JINFO1204 Std Invoice Detail Footer Form 12 pitch Summary Ticket Header gt JINFO1205 Std Invoice Ticket Header Form 12 pitch Summary Ticket Detail gt JINFO1206 Std Invoice Ticket Detail Form 12 pitch Message Lines gt JINFO1207 Std Invoice Message Form 12 pitch Footer gt JINFO1208 Std Invoice Footer Form 12 pitch Number of lines in body of form EN 2 Enter the document format codes for each desired field The table below shows the available codes and suggestions for their content Header The Header is the first element printed on the form and typically contains such information as descriptive title text such as Sales Invoice page number customer account number and date It may also contain column headers for the form s detail data These column headers may include product code product description quantity price and extended price Line Header The Line Header contains information to appear directly below the Invoice Header Detail Line The Detail Lines typically sh
38. ticket or product so that the transaction may be invoiced 5 Invoice Print Options allows you to control what invoice print functions a user may perform The options are Allowed to Create Original Invoices and Reprint Invoices default Allowed to Create Original Invoices Only Allowed to Reprint Invoices Only The next two fields relate to Order Level Mix Design an option that allows mixes to be modified subject to QA approval during order entry For these user level options to have any effect Order LEvel Mix Design must be enabled at the system level Configuration Distribution 6 Allow Access to Order Level Mix Design gives the privileged user access to the order level mix design functionality in Order Entry 7 Allow Override of Un approved Mix Designs in Ticketing allows the user to ticket orders containing mixes that are not in the Mix Design file 8 Allow Project Updates from Order Entry Ticketing gives user the privilege to update project information based upon data entered in Order Entry or Full Scale Ticketing Such update information could include purchase order number job number delivery address delivery instructions map page and zone fields 9 Allow Overhead Loading gives the user the ability to perform overhead loadout ticketing This option is valid only with a COMMANDaggregate license 8 9 05 51 10 Allow Access to Quotes for Orders allows order takers to activate accepted quotes as proj
39. 1 OL qPe A 2 g 0D o1 aduejeq 00 00T v Aueduioo v Auedulioo syjyuno5229v A1lB u y 09 e Jo 1u uuuBisse y p109 1 OL JUNOWY yunouiyv yunoo35o5e A4 1u o Anuga d L uonmo5esue _ L 1Ip 49 Mad qns 1soo 3815 nuno55v sJu uruSrssyv qe A 2 OO0 OII ueduioo Auedwo7 s UNODDY BIGeAIBI9Y S JUNODOY 0 Dag BY p109 1 OL SdIOAUI Ue 00 OT WV xe l ueduuooS lqe ed xeL s jes 0 u wzsnfpy xel sajes a sod e p109 1 OL SDIOAUI 00 00I poo py Uejd sjuswysn py wv ue o u wyzsnfpy 2104AU SAINSOd e pio2 1 OL a GeAladay OO OTT Auedwo7 Auedwo7 s UNODDY BIGEAIBI9Y SJUNODDY 0 Dag BY p109 1 OL SdIOAUI Ue 00 OT WV xe l ueduuoo lqe ed xeL s jes 0 yu wyzsn py xeL s jes AneB u e p109 1 OL SOIOAUI 00 00I poo py yueld sjuswysn py wv ue o ntu unsn pv sdIOAUT Al3BB u e pio5 1 OL yunouiyv unowy yunoo355e A4 1u o Anuga d L uonmo5zesue _ L 1Ip 49 Mad qns 1soo 3815 3uno55v sjuaunsnipy 362 8 9 05 1so5 puepuejs soUeLe y pue 4SOD p AI 2 1 2707 BY u BDUBIAJJIP 00 ST 3 amp 2 pold 1U El Bld JEH JEWN Aue pio2 1 OU WAI SOD puepueys Buisn IneH JeUaeW JSOD pa Je uonoesue1 00 09 ueduioo Auedwoy yesjjo Aiolju AUul AJOJUDSAU BY 0 JOSJJO BU p109 1 OL Sjee wW S09 puepuejs 00 SZ 3 amp 3 pold 1U El Mey AIOUUSAUT ye AJOJUSAU 0 BSESIOU y P4OD94 OL JUNOWY AunOUU yu
40. 246 10 11 1 w z vi ES Select a Minimum Charge Option This field gives you a number of options to establish a minimum haul charge regardless of load size or clock time The options are No Minimum Charge Minimum Charge Amount Truck s Minimum Load Size times Charge Rate Truck s Schedule Load Size times Charge Rate Selected Minimum Charge from Cartage Zone Minimum Quantity Select a Minimum Pay Option This field gives you a number of options to establish a minimum payment regardless of load size or clock time The options are No Minimum Charge Minimum Pay Amount Truck s Minimum Load Size times Pay Rate Truck s Schedule Load Size times Pay Rate Selected Minimum Pay from Cartage Zone Minimum Quantity If the Minimum Charge Option is Minimum Charge Amount the Minimum Charge Pay field displays This value will be used to calculate minimum charges and payments based on the above two settings If either of the minimum charge pay option fields is set to Minimum Quantity the Minimum Quanitity and Maximum Quantity fields display The Minimum Quantity indicates the smallest cartage chage that will be calculated If desired you can also enter a Maximum Quantity to set a cap on cartage changes for the table Enter an amount in the Additional Per Load Amount if an additional charge applies Mark the Calculate Unloading Charge checkbox if necessary This checkbox indicates that the customer w
41. 271 PrOjJeCtS kouuuasnusuaqa yuwaquw aaa EE a Qa pu away q amaquawaaayyaaaqquaiaakaniy ah a 274 Project gt WEE 275 Entering Project Main Tab Information 276 Entering Project Address Information 277 Entering Project Pricing Information 278 Entering Project Accounting Information 281 Entering Project Invoicing Information 283 Entering Project Distribution Information ess get cerns eg RENN EERSTEN NEE EeNEEN 285 Entering Project User Fields Information 286 Entering Project Distances Information 287 Entering Project Products Information ENNEN EN SEN SNE NeR 287 Fixed Delivery PRICING siuxdiwtuieed dun EN Ee A E Ee 292 Adjusting e ne 294 Changing Price TYPES ulalssssssssssassssaqasqaqakapaqakassaqaqqsqanasakasqasasaqasaa 294 Entering Project Forecasting Information 295 Payment FORMS svivecvcvstvce tas dii aa A E a E 296 General Ledger Setup egene SEET 298 Lee el lui eg EE 298 SOUNGS CodeS eebe Ae 300 GCGOSECEntErS Zeene ENEE ee EE 301 Account TEE 302 G L BOOKING COES J uu asas sapan yaaspawpaepaeyyawasaupuqkipawpusqwquqakuypuwasaqqww
42. 8 Accept the screen If the license information has been entered correctly the Licenses screen will disappear If the license has been entered incorrectly a message box will display Invalid License and the license screen will clear Temporary Licenses COMMANDseries allows users to test modules for which they do not have a primary license A temporary license is good for thirty days and can be used only once for any module To activate a temporary License 1 Open the Licenses screen Files gt System Information gt Licenses Licenses EDTLICN W Licenses Pafet Fe Command Data All Products 2 Select the Temporary button The Temporary License Options screen displays 8 9 05 Temporary Licensing screen EDTLICN1 w Temporary License Options sal The following are lists of temporary options that are in addition to your permanent license You may add options to these lists but when added will only be available for 30 days rou cannot change delete or duplicate options that were previously added To make an option permanent contact Command Data for a new license zal Applications Expiration Date COMMAND map z 12 Jul 2001 Disable d Al Batch Console Count Expiration Date Libra Asphalt D j 12 Jul 2001 T Disable d Signaling Unit Count Expiration Date Speedcall Ric D j 12 Jul 2001 T Disable d 3 Select the Applications you wish to activate The Expiration Date of the temp
43. 8 Enter the Maximum Water that the mix can contain When the mix is batched the actual batched water amount can be subtracted from this amount and printed on the ticket as the maximum amount of water that can be added on site 9 Enter the Percent Air contained in the mix 10 If the mix contains lightweight aggregates enter the Lightweight Cu Ft 11 Enter the Minimum Cement Content in the mix 12 Enter the Water Holdback in the mix Item User Fields Setup The fields on this tab are configured on the Configuration screen Files gt General Information gt Configuration If there are no user defined fields flagged for item level display this tab will not display SS 217 To enter user fields information 1 Select the User Fields tab Items User Fields Tab EDTIMST8 Man UOM Conversions Sales TaxOveride Mic 2 Enter the appropriate information Item Locations Setup The Locations tab is used to indicate which locations carry the item in inventory To define locations information 1 Select the Locations tab Items Locations Tab EDTIMST9 Main UOM Conversions Sales Tax Overide Mie User Fields TUT ttt 2 Mark the checkbox next to the plant that carries the item in its inventory 3 The subsequent tabs on the Item editor allow separate entries for each location Mark the Set all functions to copy to all checkbox if you want a change to a field on one location
44. ACCGOUuntS 09 ENNER EN d dele van NUERA 43 Citrix geil e 43 Other Considerations ett E EKEEAEE AENERARE Ed E AE EE EE 43 Assigning a User and Password WEE 43 Preferences suqus uu asua paqa yaaa aaa ALA E a E 44 User level Licenses tere reese EE eege Eed Eege 45 879 05 3 PrIVIl g S EEN 46 Field level Security EE 47 Order Printers Lun u Ehe eeh dAn a sua qua asam aa 48 Communications Port Setup 50 ele EE 50 Plante uuu a ege ENNER Eege EAR EEN 52 Cost Centers Abee Edge 53 GrO DS E 54 Non COD Price Change r sssssssssssssssssssssssssssrssrssssssasa 54 Printer TT e NEE 55 Generic Printer Setup wweseversmeessnieransceudy caer AATE Eaa EEE ANKAA ENNER 57 Print Models sag utesasatamaaqaasapiasyaqqahuwquqa paqa kasuna qaqa aywedtawa aqqaMuwnaasas 58 Testing Ticket Printers in COMMANDSseries 59 KEE Ree reen 60 al E te LEE 61 elugle El 62 Company SQUID E 63 Company Cost Centers Te TN 64 Company Finance Charges Setup NEEN EE EEN 64 Employees g AE ER dE Ee EE 65 REASON leg eege sde Eege ANNERES SN SEENEN SEENEN NEEN 66 Mode TE 68 Signaling WHS EE 70 Signaling Units e ET 71 Signaling Unit OPtIONS uuu ssssaguisssayha aaa qaa qua asua uqapas ask iu sas 72 Signaling Unit Messages General 73 Signaling Unit Incoming Messages
45. Amount Percent Minimum Ticket field displays any changes made to Current Amount Percent Minimum Ticket for reference purposes only 14 Mark the Apply to the first Load Only checkbox to indicate that the sundry charge is to be calculated and appear on the first load only Any succeeding loads will not have this charge 15 If the Apply Automatically to all Orders checkbox is checked this sundry charge would appear on every ticket for every order if the ticket s scheduled or typed time meets the requirements for Begin Time and End Time and Days to Apply Charge 16 The Concrete Aggregate Asphalt and Block checkboxes only appear when the Apply Automatically to all Orders checkbox is selected Check the product line s to which this automatic charge is to be applied 17 The Item Categories button only appears for the Percent of Ticket Charge Type The Item Categories screen displays all item categories currently established with a checkbox beside each item category Select the item categories for which a Percent of Ticket Sundry Charge applies by marking the checkboxes Only those items for the item categories selected are charged a Percent of Ticket Sundry Charge 18 Accept this screen Vendors A vendor is any company from which your company purchases materials Records for these vendors are created added or edited on the Vendors screen Before new vendors can be added however vendor types must be defined Note You must be in
46. Auto signaling PTT MM300 Traxis Bosch Befu Radio Holland mf1104 Coded Communication Rohill COMMANDsignal Rohill 2 Digit Truck Dinet Sigtec Generic Speedcall Ric C Motorola Europe Speedcall Ric D Motorola BSC H Ultralog Motorola GCC 80 Vehicom Motorola Smart Status 1 4 Rohill 2 Digit Status 8 9 05 K i If the selected unit type supports messaging the fields and tabs pertaining to messages will display In addition if the unit type is COMMANDsignal a Default button will appear next to the Unit Type field This button creates default messages see below Note If you are attempting to communicate with a signaling unit not represented in the list shown please contact your Command Alkon Customer Service Representative for further instructions 5 Identify the COMMANDcomm Manager Number to control communication for this signaling unit The manager number can be found in the properties file of COMMANDcomm highlight the COMMANDcomm icon and press lt Alt Enter gt 6 Enter an appropriate COMMANDcomm Port Name If a COM port is entered click the Port button to further configure the communications port See the Communications Port Setup section of this manual 7 If this is a COMMANDsignal unit the Attack Delays fields display below the Port Name field These fields represent the time in milliseconds from the time you send the message until the unit sends a data pulse For example entering 12 causes it to wait
47. COMMANDinventory for Vendor and Vendor Types to display as menu options Vendor Types Setup The Vendor Types screen allows the user to create and edit vendor types To create a vendor type 1 In COMMANDinventory go to the Vendor Types screen COMMANDinventory gt Files gt Item Information gt Vendor Types Vendor Types EDTVNTY Type Description Short Vendor Class je Rail Car Hauler JRailCar Haul Vendor d z7 Helena Rock Quarry Rock Qua Material amp Haul d E Miscellaneous Supplies Misc Sup Material z d j3 Brick Manufacturer Brick Material z d IS Sand Vendor Sand Material r lt J It Cement Vendor Material Material z d E Independent Hauler independ Haul Vendor z d Ja Contract Hauler Contract Haul Vendor Iz d 2 Enter an alphanumeric code in the Type field This code uniquely identifies this vendor type in the COMMANDinventory system 3 Enter a Description for this vendor type Enter an abbreviated version of this description in the Short field 4 Select a Vendor Class for this type Material Vendor the vendor sells you material Haul Vendor the vendor transports material Material amp Haul Vendor the vendor transports material for you and sells material to you 5 To enter another vendor type select the Add Occurrence button 6 When you finish entering types accept the Vendor Types screen lendor Setup The Vendors screen allows the user wi
48. COMMANDsignal then pressing the Default button will import a set if standard messages both incoming and outgoing All that is imported are the message code and message text All other message fields must be configured manually Signaling Unit Incoming Messages The Incoming tab on the Signaling Units screen allows you to define messages for certain events The signaling unit will send these messages To set up incoming messages for the signaling unit 1 Click on the Incoming tab on the Signaling Units screen Files gt General Information gt Signaling Units gt Incoming Signaling Units EDTSIGU2 Options Incoming Outgoing Statuses Code Inbound Message Text Event Color Time Flag D SY Send Police zl o ns d Sound d 2 SI Send Ambulance aA aA E Sound d B a Request Lunch DE HM Sound d 4 a Request Quick Stop GR RE WI Sound d IS SY Request Wash Out sii be im Sound d je aj Jlost Need Directions z fis JI Sound d 2 Enter a Code and the Inbound Message Text to accompany it 3 Select an Event from the list Blank no event is associated with the message Clock in the truck is clocking in Clock out the truck is clocking out Leftover qty the truck is carrying leftover material 4 Select a Color for this message when it is displayed on the Tracking and Scheduling screen Enter a Time to indicate the length of time allowed for this truck status Enter a symbol in the Fla
49. Calcium Item Category MiG Admix Main UOM Conversions Sales Tax Override User Fields Locations Costs Prices Inventory Batchin Ordered Quantity Ordered Quantity Extension Code Default Dosage Quantity 90001 Dosage Per Weight of Cementitious Materials d 100 10 00 Delivered Quantity Ticket Quantity Extension Code gt 50001 ounces Delivered Quantity Per Mix Cubic Quantity T Accumulate Price Quantity Price Quantity Extension Code E 30001 Dosage Mix Delivered Quantity Batch Inventory Cost Purchase Reporti 50001 ounces ell ounces 50004 gallons ell Dosage Admixtures generally have the most complicated UOM settings because the amounts needed are dependant on the amount of mix ordered The primary values for this example will be calculated as follows Note These settings only take effect if the admix is ordered as an associated product Ifthe admixture is part of the mix design then values will be calculated based on the information in the mix item file Ordered Quantity The Dosage setting allows you to better control the proportions of an admixture to a mix In the above example the defined dosage is ten ounces per hundredweight of cementitious materials Entering a dosage prevents having to manually calculate the amount of admixture needed Delivered Quantity When the system prepares to send target ticket weights for a specific load it will calculate the target amount as follows 1 Ge
50. Code Sequence Code This field determines the number sequence for the assignment of quote codes 5 The four checkboxes on this tab determine how the COMMANDseries calculates the product price at the project or quote level For example a customer gets a 2 per cubic yard trade discount on a particular mix If the Use Project Product Trade Discount checkbox is marked when a mix is entered on the project product tab the price displayed will reflect the list price minus the trade discount Mark or clear the following option checkboxes as necessary Use Project Product Trade Discount Rules to Calculate Suggested Price for Project Products e Use Project Zone Zone Charge Rules to Calculate Suggested Price for Project Products Use Quote Product Trade Discount Rules to Calculate Suggested Price for Quote Products Use Quote Zone Zone Charge Rules to Calculate Suggested Price for Quote Products Lien Configuration Lien configuration has a wide array of options In addition lien configuration is dependent on the lien laws in the states in which the user does business As a result it is recommended that Lien configuration be done separately from the File Build For instructions regarding the configuration of the Lien application please refer to the Configuration section of the COMMANDIien User s Manual User Fields Configuration The User Fields Configuration option allows the privileged user the ability to configure custom fi
51. Configuration Biel EZ Code Field Name bh 1 Salesman employee code J f al 2 Customer code z d e 3 Project code z d 4 Item code r d Be ID 1 Salesman employee code ld Aj 2 Customer code D d 3 Project code D d 4 Shipping plant code D d 4 S Enter a unique Code for the configuration For example you may start with the number one 1 and increase by one From the drop down Field Name list select the first field variable you wish to use to sort and select a report This list is limited to significant fields from order and ticket files Use the Add or Insert Occurrence button next to the Field Name list to add the next field variable Continue adding field variables up to five until all desired variables are present Use the Add or Insert Occurrence button at the bottom of the configuration list to define another configuration When finished entering configurations accept the screen to save the Sales Data Configuration settings 8 9 05 COMMANDquote Setup If you are licensed for COMMANDquote there are some Quote specific data that must be entered Topics in this section Job Types Job Source Codes Contacts Setting Up Quote Printing Job Types Job Types indicate the type of work to be performed in the prospective job Job Types are user defined you can set them up in whatever manner will be the most useful for your company To enter job types 1 Goto the Job Types screen Files g
52. Contact name 10021 Bamboozle Builders BAMBC 110012 Barton Steel Erection BARTC Billy Borden 51041C Bali Hi Pools BALI H The lookup screen displays all customer records that begin with the search string Across the top of the lookup screen are displayed the search string and the selection key in this case the selection key is the customer Sort Name Note If only one record matches the entered string the system will simply retrieve the record into the form 3 Double click on the desired customer to enter that record in the form 4 You will be returned to the Orders screen with the selected record retrieved You can now continue order entry The following fields currently support smart lookup Each field is listed by the screen on which it appears as well as the field used as a search key Field Search Key Customer Code Customer Sort Name Tax Code Tax Code Description Item Code Item Description 8 9 05 33 Initial System Files The following section addresses entry of basic system information By entering this information you are in effect laying the foundation for your company s business operations There are a number of elements in the section that call for information that has not yet been entered For example when you enter Employee records you can assign drivers to trucks but you have not entered trucks yet Once you have entered trucks you can return to the Employee screen and assign trucks to drivers
53. Customers Products Tab EDTCUSTK lu x Ready Mix Products Product Entry Format field ale Slogan E Dee BR Associated Products line fester gt Block Common 8 far 2 d 2 Select a Plant from the field s list This field is used to determine the products displayed on the screen If All plants are indicated then all products regardless of their plant assignment are displayed If a specific plant is entered then only those products assigned to that specific plant are displayed below 3 Select a Product Entry Format from the field s list The product options are as follows Ready Mix Products displays mix products along with each mix s associated products in one section and extra products in a separate section 8 9 05 271 Customer Product Pricing Information 2500 2500 3 4 3 8 Summary Ready Mix Products displays mix products with a button to access the mix s associated products in one section and extra products in a separate section Aggregate Products displays all non mix products in a single section Enter a Product for the Mix Products line This code identifies each mix product assigned to a customer The same mix product can be assigned multiple times to a customer when varying groups of associated products are combined with each entry of the mix Select a Mix Products Plant from the field s list This field identifies the plan
54. E z 25008 3 41 6 MIX J 62 00 Pricing Ready Mix a A sl 20656 All z sl 3000 psi 3 4 6 MIx 62 00 Pricing Ready Mix Che A d Extra Products 207 Jal rj sl 374 Gravel 4gg Lb J 0 00 Pricing d E l n T rj sl BA Gravel gg lb T 0 00 Pricing d sife Ja zl gt 11 2 Gravel Agg Lb f B12 Pricing lt gt Aggregate Products displays all non mix products in a single section There is a different product entry screen for aggregate products documented below in the section entitled Fixed Delivery Pricing Enter a Product for the Mix Products line This code identifies each mix product assigned to a customer The same mix product can be assigned multiple times to a customer when varying groups of associated products are combined with each entry of the mix When the Product code is entered the product s Description is retrieved from the item master file Note Detailing on a the description fields will bring up the Project Product Description information screen 288 Project Product Description Information EDTPROJ4 Wi Project Product Description Information 25466 2500 E Description 2500 344 limestone air Short Eu 3 41 6 Usage Code efi ALL This screen allows you to make project specific changes to the product s descriptions and usage code Select a Mix Products Plant from the field s list This field identifies the plant from which this product can be sold to this project If th
55. Format Codes Setup 100 Receipt Format Codes Setup 101 Statement Format Codes Setup 98 Ticket Overflow Format Codes Setup 102 Document Formats 89 Adjusting Formats using Display Screen 91 Adjusting Formats using Document Fields Screen 91 Data Out and Data In 89 Entering Document Formats 90 Invoices Statements Quotes 90 Mask Characters 94 Tickets 89 Document Formatting 104 Document Tags 85 Document Tags Setup 86 Driver Overtime Tables 196 E Employees 65 Employee Files 65 F Field Level Security Worksheet 338 Fixed Delivery Pricing 292 Freight Methods 236 Functionality Preferences 306 G G L Accounting Periods 110 G L Booking Codes 304 Gathering Information 11 General Ledger Setup 298 Generic Print Formatting 57 I Initial Accounting Information 108 Initial System Files 34 Inventory Accounting Periods 108 Item Batching Setup 222 Item Categories 205 Item Category Setup 206 Mix Defaults Setup 208 Tax Override Setup 209 UOM Setup 207 8 9 05 Item Types 205 Items 209 Automatic Products 225 Batch Code Setup 224 Constituent Setup 224 Conversions Setup 213 Costs Information 219 Hints for Entering Items 226 Initial Item Entry 211 Inventory Setup 221 Item Entry 211 Item Main Tab Setup 212 Location Setup 218 Mix Setup 216 Price Setup 220 Sales Setup 214 Tax Override Setup 215 UOM Setup 213 User Fields 217 Items and Pricing 199 J Job Cost Phases amp Jobs 183 Job Source Codes 320 Job Types 320
56. In this situation the order condition of being suspended or released may be used as a signal to the next department that some stage of billing preparation has been completed The Suspend Order Reason Code serves as the default for all new customers entered Customer Invoicing Defaults Setup The information on this screen serves as default information for the corresponding fields in the customer editor To enter customer invoicing defaults 1 From the Customer Defaults section at the bottom of the Defaults tab select the Invoicing button Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Defaults gt Invoicing Customer Invoicing Defaults EDTCNFX8 m Customer Invoicing Defaults EN Print One Invoice Per Order Sort and Sub Total By z Print Products Tickets Detail z Invoice Frequency Daily x j Haul Charges Print haul charge as separate line item B j Minimum Haul Charges Print total minimum haul charge z Separate Invoices by Product Line 2 From the Print One Invoice Per field s list select the print option to default into the customer files 3 From the Print Products Tickets field s list select either detail or Summary for the default format for printing of products tickets 4 From the Invoice Frequency field s list select Daily Weekly or Monthly as the default frequency for invoicing 5 From the Haul Charges field s list select to print haul charges as a separate line item or to
57. L Licensing Entering a New License 36 Making a Backup 35 Restoring an Old License 39 Temporary 38 Locations 158 M Map Pages 186 Automatic Travel Times 189 Entering Map Pages 187 Map Page Time Periods 186 Map Pages Coordinates 189 Map Pages Zones 189 Message Text 106 Message Text Setup 107 Minimum Load Charge Tables 227 Modem Codes 68 Modem Setup 68 N Next Numbers 83 Non COD Price Change 54 P Payment Forms 296 Plant amp Delivery Information 158 Plant Costs Setup 166 Plants 159 Bins Setup 170 Communications Port Setup 163 Constituent Order Setup 171 Plant Batching Setup 164 Plant Communication Setup 162 Plant Costs Information Setup 166 Plant Scale Setup 168 Plant Scheduling Setup 165 Plant Setup 160 Plants Setup 168 Setting Up the Plant s Main Tab 161 User Fields 172 178 Pouring Methods 182 Preferences Color Preferences Setup 310 Font Preferences Setup 312 General Preferences Setup 306 Keys Preferences Setup 313 Sound Preferences Setup 309 Toolbar Preferences Setup 314 Tracking Preferences Setup 311 User Preferences Setup 308 Pre Ticketing Setup 81 Price Categories 199 Print Models 58 Printer Setup 55 Projects 274 Accounting Tab 281 Address Tab 277 Distances Tab 287 Distribution Tab 285 Forecasting Tab 295 Initial Setup 275 Invoicing Tab 283 Main Tab 276 Pricing Tab 278 Products Tab 287 User Fields Tab 286 R Reason Codes 66 s Sales Analysis Codes 125 258 Sales Data Configurat
58. LNLe Optional File gt LNLG E LNOW Input File Location sl cscv5 52qaVimports LNGH Import Array Size 1000 3 H LNOT IT Check Date Bounds on Imported Records H viel Show Selected Only 2 Scroll down the list of database tables on the left side of the screen until you see the license table LICN Double click the LICN table 3 Select the Delete Existing Records Before Import button This option deletes the existing license information preventing the two licenses from becoming merged and invalid 4 Enter the File name of the import file If no name is specified the system will look for a file names LICN TXT 5 The Optional File field is not needed for this operation 6 The Input File Location will default from the system s uSYS72 INT file Change the location if necessary 7 The remaining fields are not needed for this procedure 8 Accept the screen License Codes The different licensed functions are accessed with a two letter code Here are some of the application codes used by COMMANDseries CC Concrete Dispatch IG Invoicing AR Accounts Receivable AP Accounts Payable PO Purchasing GL General Ledger OE Order Entry amp Ticketing SH Scheduling CR Credit Checking SR Sales Reports PR Contribution Reports TA Time Analysis OM Order Monitoring TT Truck Tracking DS Dynamic Scheduling MS Mobile Signaling AU RP CA cw CT CR CD MO PP AT EX PS MP CP AS Auditing IV Invent
59. LPT or COM Port Name or select the proper printer from the field s drop down list If a COM port is entered in the first field the second field becomes the Port button Click on the button to set up the printer or modem that COMMANDcomm will use to print orders See instructions below Note The Communication Port Setup screen requires that the settings match the configuration of the printer or modem If you wish to print orders to a device that has already been setup within Windows select that device from the drop down list The Prompt option can also be selected if you wish to allow the user to select the device at each print command 7 Enter a Selective Address This field specifies the selective address code to use when printing an order through a multi drop phone line where more than one output device exists 8 Enter a Document Format This field specifies the format in which the document will print 9 Mark the Auto Dial Flag if COMMANDcomm will use the information in the Modem Phone Number and Modem Code fields to send data to a remote printer 879 05 49 10 Accept the User Order Printer Setup and Communication Port Setup screens Communications Port Setup The Communications Port Setup screen allows you to define information about the port To set up communications information for the port 1 Click on the Port button located on the User Order Printer Setup screen Files gt System Information gt Users gt
60. Lien Configuration N A EDTCNFXO User Defined Fields Configuration EDTCNFXP Koller Tax Breakout N A EDTCNFX1 Order Audit Log Fields Configuration N A 340 Form Name Screen Name Configuration EDTCNFX2 Batch Code Encryption Equation N A EDTCNFX3 Customer Sales Defaults N A EDTCNFX4 Customer Taxing Defaults N A EDTCNFX5 Customer Pricing Defaults EDTCNFX6 Customer Charges Defaults N A EDTCNFX7 Customer Accounting Defaults N A EDTCNFX8 Customer Invoicing Defaults N A EDTCNFX9 Customer Distribution Defaults N A EDTCNFZA Lien General Configuration EDTCNFZB Lien Notices Configuration EDTCNFZC Lien Releases Configuration EDTCNFZD Lien Events Configuration EDTCNFZE Lien Locations Configuration EDTCNFZF Lien Owners Configuration EDTCNFZG Lien Lenders Configuration EDTCNFZH Lien Contractors Configuration EDTCNFZI Lien Trusts Configuration EDTCNFZJ Lien Locations Configuration EDTCNFZK Lien Prelien Rules Configuration EDTCNFZL Lien Rules Configuration EDTCNOT Addition Selection of Notes N A EDTCNOT1 Customer Notes N A EDTCNOT2 Apply Projects N A EDTCNOT3 Customer Notes N A EDTCOMP Companies EDTCOMP1 Company Cost Centers Tab EDTCOMP2 Company Finance Charges Tab EDTCONV Item Conversions EDTCOST Cost Centers EDTCRED Credit Codes EDTCRIN Customer Inquiry Di
61. Order Printers gt Setup Communication Port Setup EDTUSNMD W Communication Port Setup COM1 ES Baud Rate 115200 M Data Bits 8 D Parity None z Stop Bits E z Flow Control Xon Xoff z 2 Inthe Baud Rate field select the number that represents the bits of data that the port can transfer per second 3 Inthe Data Bits field enter the number of bits that comprise a unit byte of data 4 Inthe Parity field select the type of parity that will be used to check for errors during transmission Options are Even Odd None Mark or Space 5 In the Stop Bits field select the number of bits that indicate a byte has been transmitted 6 Inthe Flow Control field select the process used to control the flow of information Options are None no flow control method is used XON XOFF the receiving port sends an XOFF signal when the buffer a temporary storage area is full The port will stop sending data It sends an XON signal when it is ready to receive more data Hardware flow control is determined by the hardware 7 Accept the data to return to the User Order Printer Setup screen Options The Options screen allows the privileged user to set up the various preferences regarding invoicing user access and ticketing To assign users options 1 Select the Options tab from the Users screen Files gt System Information gt Users gt Options Users Options Tab EDTUSNM6 Preferences
62. Plants Haulers Truck Types Trucks Trailers Delivery Methods Pouring Methods Job Cost Phases amp Jobs Zones Map Pages Deadhead Setup Task Codes Condition Codes Driver Overtime Tables Locations The Locations screen allows the user with appropriate system security access to add edit or delete locations Locations are used to identify sites where inventory items are maintained such as a plant s inventory or a central warehouse s inventory In some cases multiple plants may be assigned to a single inventory location To add a new location 1 Goto the Locations screen Files gt Item Information gt Locations Locations EDTLOCN E Locations Biel EX Location Code 1 Name Birmingham Plant Short Name BHAMPLT Address Line 1 fI2345h veS Address Line 2 City ngem S State JAL Country usa Postal Code 5654 Phone Number 1 205 555 7734 Phone Number 2 Company sl O Command Concrete Inc 2 Enter a number for the new Location Code 3 Enter a Name and Short Name to describe the location 4 Enter address information in the Address Line 1 Address Line 2 City State Country and Postal Code fields 5 Enter phone number information in the Phone Number 1 and Phone Number 2 fields 6 Enter a Company code This field represents the company or business entity to which the location belongs A company is uniquely identified by a company code which is edited on the Company screen 7 Accept the
63. Prep Invoicing Ticketing Truck Count Checksum Temporary Use the Clear command to delete the existing license The License screen will clear WARNING This step erases your existing license from the database Do not perform this step without first making a backup copy of your license Enter the Client Name exactly as it appears on your printed license Enter the Start Date and End Date of your license Enter the Applications as they appear on your license Use the lt Tab gt key to move from field to field as you enter information Go to each tab and enter the licensing information The Batch Console Signaling Unit and Overhead Loadout areas of the license will contain number sequences like this 11 2 The first number represents the unit type while the second number represents the number of such units allowed under the license These pairs are entered on the appropriate tab Batch Console Licensing Concrete Agoregate Asphalt Tracking Scheduling Pricing Prep Invoicing geg EN Batch Consoles Signaling Units Flat Scales Overhead Loadout Options Batch Console AR Eagle 2 way D Count 1 21 Generic 2 way z Count 1 _ r oo hur 879 05 Enter the first number in the first field then press lt Tab gt The Batch Console represented by that number will display Then go to the Count field and enter the second number Repeat as necessary 7 Enter the Checksum
64. Quotes gt Projects gt New Detail gt Pricing or Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Projects gt Pricing Project Pricing Information tab EDTPROJF Main Addresses Pricing Accounting Invoicing Distribution Distances Products Forecast Concrete Copy to All Salesman gt oo John Wunch Trade Discount Percent J a Sales nalysis Code gt fi Commercial Trade Discount Amount gt J 0 00 Cube Pricing Plant Code gt fi SHELBY Terms Code gt B 2cy10 25 Price Category gt E RESID Zone Code gt fi 000 z1000 Apply Charges Minimum Minimum Load Charge T able gt Cartage Pay Table gt J IT Haul Pay Seasonal Charge Table gt j2 Winter S Unloading Charge Table x Sundry Charge x V Apply Zone Charges Allow Price Change in 0 E Print Prices on Ticket I Restrict Orders to Project Products xl M Allow Automatic Price Adjustments Quoted Pay Tax Code sl hb BHAM Taxable Taxable z 2 Select a Product Line from the field s pull down list you can also move from product line to product line by using the scroll bar on the far right side of the screen Note Your system license determines the available product lines 3 If you want to use the same selections for all product lines mark the Copy To All checkbox 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Switch between available product lines using either the drop down field or the scroll bar Enter the Salesman
65. Read Only None the user is NOT allowed to access the form field at all Mark the Price Suppress checkbox if the user is NOT allowed to add delete change or inquire about price information on any price fields Mark the Cost Suppress checkbox if the user is NOT allowed to add delete change or inquire about cost information on any cost fields Accept this screen to save the group or user privileges or select another tab from the Users screen to set up more information Field level Security To configure field level security 1 Form Select the Privileges tab from the Users screen Files gt System Information gt Users gt Privileges Field level Security Privilege E All JAdd PriceSuppress Cost Suppress JEDTORDR Orders None zl PriceSuppress Cost Suppress Fields The Field button will not display unless a specific form with field level security options is entered In the Form fields enter a specific screen name for which the user is to have privileges from the pull down menus or Right click over the field to reveal the menu for each licensed COMMANDseries application Select the specific screen from this series of menus If the right click method is used to enter a form name a will be displayed at the end of the form name The is a COMMANDseries wildcard and its presence at the end of the form indicates that all fields on the form will assume the access level assigned on the main Pr
66. Screen N A SYSSVCC Service Control N A SYSTAIL Tailor Screen N A SYSTASK Task List N A 354 Appendix C UOM Examples Item Units of Measure Examples The following screen captures are examples of how item units of measure can be set up and billed in your system Please note that these are simply the most common examples and may vary according to your operation s needs Concrete Per Cubic Yard U Mix UOM EDTIMST2 40008374 ___ El 40003_ Mixes have a simple UOM configuration because they are almost always measured in cubic yards or cubic meters It is in constituents that you see variation 8 9 05 355 Expansion Joint Extra Product Extra Product UOM Expansion Joint 1 2 x 10 1 2 exp joint sl PeUnt e000 sl Extra products such as expansion joints and gloves also generally have a straightforward UOM configuration primarily because the amounts are not affected by the amount of primary product being purchased Cement Cement UOM EDT Cement Type Lbs F Conversions Sales Tax Ovenide User Fields Locations Costs x Fafe S gt 50003 KEE 1T 50003 CIE See leur ghleo Cement is usually measured in tons or tonnes for all cases except batching In this example the cement is measured in pounds for Inventory Cost but that is not always the case 356 8 9 05 Calcium Admix UOM Description Calcium Short Descr
67. Select the Conversions tab Items Conversions Tab EDTIMST3 e0002 2342 00000000 2 To convert the unit of measure enter the UOM code in the Convert From UOM field or select lt Enter gt to display the Possible Standard Units of Measure screen Possible Standard UOM FNDUOMS m Possible Standard Units of Measure 3 Select a code from this screen then press lt Enter gt to return to the UOM tab The code will display in the Convert From UOM field 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 from the Convert To UOM field 5 Inthe Multiplier field enter a number factor to be used to convert the UOM Item Sales Setup The Sales tab is used to enter information about the item such as tax status terms trade discounts and usage To define sales information 1 Select the Sales tab 214 8 9 05 I Items Sales Tab EDTIMST4 I Mam UOM Conversions Sales Tax Override Mix User Fields Locations Costs Taxing Information Taxable Nontaxable X j Non Taxable Reason gt J Discountable Trade Terms Usage Code gt i Footings Expiration Date mj 2 Indicate the Taxable status of the item Non taxable Taxable or Always Taxable 3 If the item is non taxable indicate the reason in the Non Taxable Reason field If the item is marked as taxable this field will not display 4 Inthe Discountable section indicate if the item is eligible for Trade and Terms discounts by marking the applicable chec
68. Short Description for the item 4 Select an Item Category for the item Files gt Item Information gt Item Categories The Item Type associated with the selected Item Category determines what tabs and fields are available 8 9 05 211 Item Main Tab Setup The Main tab is used to enter general information about the item The image below shows all fields The fields available for a given item are determined by the Item Type specified via the Item Category Items Main tab EDTIMST1 Inventory Batching Main UOM Conversions Sales TaxOveride Inventory Item Code gt Keep in Inventory Serial Number Saleable Item Do not allow ticketing Use Lot Number Constituent Item Admixture As Part OF Volume Calculation Allow Minimum Cement Content Override Allow Constituent Substitution Sees oe To enter information on the Main tab 1 Select the Main tab 2 If you are entering multiple versions of a single item water in gallons and water in liters for example you can enter the item code to be used for inventory purposes If metric water was Item Code 1 and standard water was Item Code 2 you could enter 2 as the Inventory Item Code for both items to combine the inventory totals 3 Mark Keep in Inventory if this item is to be tracked for Inventory purposes 4 If the Item Category cooresponds to the Kit or Pipe Item Types the Serial Number field will display 5 Mark the Saleable Item checkbox
69. System Forms SYS Gedeelt 354 Appendix C UOM Examples s sssssssasssasstussikashanqanuassasaassaqasau 355 Appendix D GL Booking Code Samples 359 COMMANDINVOIGIMG ee ed SE Ee 359 COMMANDF6CEIVEDIES Auge ENNEN EE ENNEN SE enue wanqawaqquyy akwa EAEE EA asa 361 COMMANDINVENtOryY GL EntrieS swiserisiasawidanivetantivewedweiwareeinndesicobewiseneada 363 Appendix E Content Pricing 369 Setting Up CONTEME PRICING iert eege eebe ENEE 369 Admixtures amp Content Pricing TEE 372 PIOVGCUS uuu aiaaeraqa ed gege Eed piataaaasankanka 372 Index eege Eege Eege 373 10 8 9 05 Introduction Welcome to the COMMANDseries Setting Up the System Guide Using this manual will help you prepare the COMMANDseries system for use in your construction materials business As you look through this manual the amount of information needed to properly set up the COMMANDseries system may seem overwhelming However once you start to enter the information you will realize that the process moves quickly Once you enter the required information you will notice the efficiency and ease of use that is part of the COMMANDseries design A properly configured system provides easily accessible information and an efficient usage Topics in this section Gathering Information Entering Codes Gathering Information Before you start entering data you should take the ti
70. Tab EDTJOBS3 Contacts Information Tab EDTJOBS4 Action Information Tab EDTJOBS5 Status Information Tab EDTJOBS6 Products Information Tab EDTJOBS7 Quotes Tab N A EDTLCIN Item Inquiries N A EDTLCIN1 Location N A EDTLCIN4 Serial Numbers On Hand N A EDTLCINS5 Lot Numbers On Hand N A EDTLCIN7 Item Inquiries N A EDTLICN Licenses EDTLICNA Concrete License Limits EDTLICNB Aggregate License Limits EDTLICNC Asphalt License Limits 344 Form Name Screen Name Configuration EDTLICNE Tracking License Limit EDTLICNF Scheduling License Limits EDTLICNG Pricing amp Prep License Limits EDTLICNH Invoicing License Limits EDTLICNI Batch Console License Limits EDTLICNJ Signaling Unit License Limits EDTLICNK Flat Scale License Limits EDTLICNL Overhead Loadout License Limits EDTLICNZ Options EDTLICN1 Temporary License Options N A EDTLNCO Lien Contractors N A EDTLNHD Lien Locations N A EDTLNHD1 Lien Dates N A EDTLNHD3 Notice Returns Receipts N A EDTLNHD4 Lien Addresses N A EDTLNHD5 Filed Lien Information N A EDTLNLE Lien Lenders N A EDTLNOW Lien Owners N A EDTLNQH Lien Queries N A EDTLNQH1 Lien Query Flags N A EDTLNQH2 Lien Query Dates N A EDTLNTR Lien Trusts N A EDTLOCN Locations EDTMAPP Map Page Time Periods EDTMAPS Map Pages N A EDTMAPS1 Map Page Tr
71. The field will be displayed and an entry will be required Select an option in the Show Zone Code in Orders Tickets field The options are the same as described in the previous field The Order Schedule screen has a button that specifies whether the Ticketing screen should take the load size from the truck or the schedule The Default Schedule Load Size From field establishes the system default for that button If you are printing barcode cards from COMMANDseries you will need to specify a Truck Barcode Ticket Format If you are printing barcode cards from COMMANDseries you will need to specify a Truck Barcode Ticket Sequence You can create a dummy ticket sequence that the system will use to generate barcodes The final two fields control how totals are diplayed on the Tracking screen 16 17 18 The Truck Tracking Plant Line Quantity allows you to display either the Ordered Quantity or the Scheduled Quantity on the Plant Summary Line The Truck Tracking Order Line Quantity allows you to display either the Ordered Quantity or the Scheduled Quantity on the Order Line Accept this screen to save these configuration settings Aggregate Configuration The Aggregate Configuration screen allows the privileged user access to customization options specific to COMMANDaggregate 8 9 05 143 To enter aggregate configuration information 1 From the Configuration screen select the Aggregate tab Files gt General Info
72. Throughout COMMANDseries you will often need to save your work also known as committing the data to the database There are a host of different 8 9 05 29 screens in COMMANDseries but they all have one thing in common the Accept command The Accept command is the same as Save OK Execute etc There are a number of different ways to accept a screen e Pressing lt F2 gt is the most common method e Clicking on the screen s accept button e Selecting the File gt Accept menu option e Clicking on the screen s Exit button When you close a screen that contains new or changed information a dialog box displays asking whether or not you want to save this new information Note A list of commonly used keyboard commands is included on the back cover of all COMMANDseries manuals Because the command Accept does not refer to a single button or key in the documentation the word accept will not have any special formatting For example you must accept the screen to continue Detailing Many COMMANDseries fields link to other data sources For example the Customer Code field on the Order screen is linked to the list of all customers in the system and the Date fields are linked to a calendar function Sometimes you can simply enter data in a field press lt Tab gt and move on However there will be other times that you will need to call up a list of available choices If you are on a field and want to view your
73. accounting periods apply 3 Enter the Accounting Year for which you are establishing accounting periods 4 Enter the Number of Periods A number of fields corresponding to that number of periods will open in the Period Dates section of the screen 5 Inthe Budgets Open field select which of three possible budgets is open 6 Enter a Start Date and End Date for each accounting period To designate a period as open currently able to accept transactions mark the Open box beside that period Note To create accounting periods that correspond to the months of the year select the Defaults button This also marks every period as open 7 Accept the G L Accounting Periods screen Bank Codes The Bank Codes function allows a user to define the codes that represent the various banks used by your organization Banks are assigned to Payment Transaction Batches indicating the financial institution to which deposits are made Bank Codes also define the G L Booking Code for the deposit To set up bank codes 1 Open the Bank Codes screen Files gt General Information gt Bank Codes 8 9 05 111 LE eg 7 8 Bank Codes EDTBKCD m Bank Codes I x Bank Code 1 Description South Trust Account 1 Short S trust1 Company el 01 Command Concrete Federal Routing Number fi 93 2993 Bank Account Number 8231 12 Enter a Bank Code to identify the bank and account Enter a description for the bank in the Description fie
74. after the main Projects screen The Projects screen is divided into several screens that can be accessed by clicking on the related tab The level of detail provided for each project is user defined Before entering project information gather information about specific jobs for customers to be entered as projects Note Fields on the Projects screen that are duplicated from the Jobs and or Quotes screen are populated with information from those screens The Projects screen contains many fields that are not available on either of those screens however and should be edited carefully These additional fields specific to the Projects screen allow you to customize information to better define the project for the specific customer Topics in this section Project Initial Setup Entering primary project information Entering Project Main Tab Information project information Entering Project Address Information invoice and statement addresses Entering Project Pricing Information to properly price the project 274 8 9 05 Entering Project Accounting Information credit and receivables Entering Project Invoicing Information relative to project invoicing Entering Project Distribution Information COMMANDseries distribution Entering Project User Fields Information Entering Project Distances Information relative to project distances Entering Project Products Information record project specific products Fixed Delivery Pri
75. application logo from displaying enter zero The field to the right of the Logo Time allows users to select an alternate splash screen Currently only one pre defined splash screen ships with COMMANDseries If you wish to design and display your own splash screen create a 16 or 256 color bitmap and change the LOGO16 parameter in the application section of USYS72 INI to LOGO16 x dir lt name gt bmp Be sure to fully qualify the location of the bitmap to be displayed and precede it with an at character Mark the Simplified Orders checkbox to make the Simplified Orders screen the default orders screen Mark the Use Order Prefix Screen checkbox if necessary When selected this checkbox causes the Customer gt Project Order gt Lookup screen CPOL screen to displayed as the first screen on the Orders screen Dispatch gt Orders This screen allows for a fast access to customers projects and existing orders at the initial setup in of new orders Mark the Use Toolbar checkbox to enable the COMMANDseries toolbar Mark the Show System Names in Title Bar checkbox to cause the system name Entered on the Configuration System tab to display on the COMMANDseries title bar This feature is particularly useful in environments with multiple COMMANDseries databases Mark the Clear Message Frame Frequently Conserve Memory checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox instructs COMMANDseries to clear the Message Frame wheneve
76. calculating the percentage of an outstanding balance to its original revenue amount Reports gt Percentage Outstanding Please note that you need to use the scrollbar to see all available transaction types Accept this screen or select another tab to configure more information Receivables Aging Configuration The Receivables Aging Configuration screen allows the privileged user access to fields in the configuration file that deal with the COMMANDreceivables application These fields provide a means of customizing COMMANDreceivables without requiring changes to the program To enter receivables aging configuration information 1 From the Configuration screen select the Aging tab Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Aging 8 9 05 151 Configuration Aging Tab EDTCNFXJ System Defaults Distribution Dispatch Aggregate Signaling Invoicing Inventory Receivables Aging Statements Financials Projects Quotes User Fields Aging Method JByCalendarMonth e Aging By Date Code Invoice Date x Aging Prox Day Aging Buckets 1 CurentMonth zl Description CURRENT 2 Fist Previous Month E Description f30 60DAYS 3 SecondPrevious Month zl Description J60 S0DAYS 4 ThirdPrevious Month Description 30120 DAYS 5 Fourth Previous Month zl Description O ER120 6 None v Description None v Description 2 Select an Aging Method from the field s list Thi
77. combine them with the material price 6 From the Minimum Haul Charges field s list indicate whether to print the total minimum haul charge or to separate the actual and incremental haul charge 7 Mark the Separate Invoices by Product Line if you want invoices to be separated by product line Customer Distribution Defaults Setup The information on this screen serves as default information for the corresponding fields in the customer editor These fields carry over to individual orders 879 05 137 To enter customer distribution defaults 1 From the Customer Defaults section of the Defaults tab select the Distribution button Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Customers gt Distribution Customer Distribution Defaults EDTCNFX9 Concrete z Copy to Ai Default Order Type a Tracking Order Color mis E Print Mix Weights on Ticket D Order Measurement System Customary or Metric B From the Product Type field s list select Concrete or Aggregate Mark the Copy To All checkbox if necessary When marked this copies the customer distribution configuration Select a default Tracking Order Color Mark the Print Mix Weights on Tickets checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox causes mix weights print on the tickets Select a default Order Measurement System from the field s list The options are Customary Only Metric Only or Customary or Metric Distribution Configur
78. correspond to the months of the year The default setting marks all periods as open If an accounting period is open mark the Period Open checkbox beside it This allows entry of transactions in for that period If the checkbox is not marked that period is considered closed and COMMANDseries will not accept any new transactions dated within that period After setting accounting periods for the year accept the screen G L Accounting Periods The G L Accounting Periods function allows the user to establish beginning and ending dates for general ledger accounting periods within an accounting year These dates control the accounting periods for G L activity only COMMANDseries does not currently have a G L package This function is provided for legacy users of COMMANDfinancials which is no longer available To set up G L accounting periods 1 In COMMANDreceivables go to the G L Accounting Periods screen Files gt General Information gt G L Accounting Periods 110 G L Accounting Periods EDTGLPD W G L Accounting Periods Of x Company 01 Command Concrete Accounting Year 2001 Number of Periods fiz Budgets Open ii Period Dates Start Date End Date Start Date End Date m m Opn of off T Open SIS Opn olf BI TI Open m mi F ua m TF open m IT Open Open SI Open Open Si T Open Open Defaults 2 Enter the Company code that represents the company to which the
79. cost effective use of a truck and driver s time These charges are added to an order and or ticket by adding a specific minimum load charge item acting like a service charge to the order Before entering minimum load charge information gather information about your company s policy regarding minimum load charges Minimum Load Charge Table Setup It is useful to have more than one minimum load charge table for different levels of charges If you do both customary and metric work you will need at least one charge table for each measurement system Note Before you can create a minimum load charge table you must set up an item for small load charges To set up a minimum load charge table 1 Goto the Minimum Load Charges screen Files gt Item Information gt Minimum Load Charges Minimum Load Charges EDTMCHG Minimum Load Charge T able 3 Description Small Load COD Mete Short COD Mei Item Code gt Jf9 Small Load Charge Metric Unit of Measure 0002 feet Minimum Quantity Minimum Loads Price Exempt Loads Load Load Load Load Oty Charge Oty Charge Oty Charge Oty Charge e Pome E som EI 260 o I9 399 oo 2j 407 11500 87 160 f 8500 M47 280 5500 27 400 f 2500 STT RTS 15 300 s000 2 E 4 20 105 00 10 200 7500 18 320 4500 2 5 TOD 10000 11 220 7000 340 2000 2 E 6 120 3500 12 240 e500 18 360 3500 24 L 8 9 05 227 2 Enter a Minimum Load Charge Table code to ident
80. could list the account codes under the Product Category detail level and the cost centers under the Plant Code detail level G L Booking Codes EDTGLCD W G L Booking Codes ell x Type of Entry Accounts Receivable M Company C Customer Product Plant Code C Accounting Category Product Category C Accounting Category Product Category Product C Accounting Category Product Plant Product Category Plant Product Customer Customer Product Category Detail EEEE EE Eol 304 4 On the detail sheet that appears select a category to configure and enter an account code sub account code and or a cost center for that category To open a blank line select the Add Occurrence button G L Booking Codes EDTGLCDA W General Ledger Booking Codes 2 Accounts Receivable 5 When you finish configuring the detail level accept the detail screen 6 Repeat the process selecting one or more radio buttons for each type of entry you want to format then accept the GL Booking Codes screen 8 9 05 User Preferences This section demonstrates how to set user specific preferences These settings are stored at the workstation level they do not follow the username Functionality Preferences The Preferences screen allows you to change aspects of application functionality including the following e User preferences such as language date display options and print model options that are set initially b
81. credit code information gather information about the types of credit statuses you will assign to your customers and projects Unless noted otherwise the features listed below are available to all users There are some features that are available only to those users licensed for Credit Checking To enter a new credit code 1 In COMMANDconcrete or COMMANDaggregate go to the Credit Codes screen Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Credit Codes Credit Codes EDTCRED m Credit Codes i x Credit Code 1 Description AAA Okay to sell Short AAA Okay Credit Type Charge Only lk Display Credit Code Description Exceed Limit Authorization Code ennen IV Verify Credit Limits Concrete v Do not exceed ordered quantity in ticketing a Require Project on All Orders v 2 Enter a Credit Code to identify the new customer credit classification 3 Enter a Description and Short description for the zone 4 Select a Credit Type for the credit code The possible are Cash only only cash may be received from this customer Charge only only charge orders are allowed for this customer Charge or cash C O D or charge orders may be taken for this customer No sale no orders of any kind can be taken for this customer Tickets on existing cannot be generated 5 The Display Credit Code Description checkbox will be automatically checked if the Credit Type is anything but Charge Only If for some reason you als
82. display purposes The quantity can be displayed on the ticket or ticket data out forms These extensions are preset within the application and calculate the ticket quantity as follows Delivered Quantity Ticket Quantity Delivered Quantity Delivered Quantity per Mix Cubic Quantity Ticket Quantity Delivered Quantity Mix Ticket Quantity Dosage Per Mix Cubic Quantity Ticket Quantity Ordered Quantity Order Dosage Quantity Doses Per Load Ticket Quantity Ordered Quantity Mix Ticketed Quantity Ordered Quantity Ticket Quantity Ordered Quantity Blank Quantity Ticket Quantity null value Note that this extension will set the ticket quantity to a blank value and prevent the printing of a ticket quantity Price Quantity This setting defines the amount of material for which the customer will be charged Under normal circumstances the value for the Price Quantity will be the same as the Delivered quantity But if you want to give a customer a reduced price to compensate for poor service you could accomplish this task during invoice prep by reducing the Price Quantity This way the customer is not charged full price but because the Delivered Quantity is not changed your inventory records remain accurate The Price Quantity has a Price Quantity Extension Code that determines how the Price Quantity will be calculated The Price Quantity value is stored in the PRICE_QTY field of the TKTL or TLAP tables The value in
83. e woy s e woy s ew10 yu unoodq yu uunood yu uunood yu uunood yu uinooq 69 sbel se yu unooq spe Juawns0q spe Juawns0q spe yu unoodq yu unooq S8 si quunu 1X N si quuinu 1X N si quunu 1X N si quunu 1X N sJ qunu 1X N Co s d e5S LL SUD Bui3 yon olnv 9 syun BuljeuBis sun BuljeuBis OZ pasn Ajases s pod Wapo W pasn Ajase sapod Wapo W pasn Ajases sapod WapoW pasn Ajases s poo WapoW pasn Ajases p sn Ajeet Sapod WapowW s poo5 wapop 89 s po d UOSeSY s po d uose z So9pod uose y s po d uose y S9pOd uose y y s po d uose y 99 saaAojdwy saaAo dwy saaAojdwy saaAojdwy saaAojdwy s o duig S9 s lueduioo s lueduuioo s lueduioo s lueduioo s lueduioo s lueduioS T9 y3bue7 p09 35u 7 poo 35u 7 poo 35u 7 epod unlBu 1 po5 Auedwoy 18S Aueduuoo aS Aueduuoo aS Auedwoy ae Auedwos jes Aduasina Aduasing Aduasing Aduasing Aduasing Aduasing Aduasing 09 S49qUldd S1 l1ulid S1 1ulid S1 l1ulid S1 l1ulid S194Uldd si luld S si sn si sn si sn si sn si sn si sn si sn Tp Buisu or 1 Bulsuaorq Bulsusaorq Bulsuaorq Buisu or1 Buisu or1 Buisu 217 SE a6ewe 01 e60166y BAIZNIIXA A10 USAUT s lqeA 32 3 BuIDIOAUT 9 819U0 d si quinu Bed ul saoueued 1UDuS q Aew aal JON QIUTIIJOY WPMD uu s s y dn Sun s pinp BduUdIIJoYy MIMD V xip
84. edited description will only be used when the item is added to an order via the Auto Product function 4 Enter the Quantity to be added 5 Accept the screen Hints for Entering Items For quick entry of multiple mixes e Open an existing mix and click on the Save As button This clears the item code while retaining the rest of the mix s information e Enter a new item code and change the price strength constituents and other necessary fields accordingly To set up a mix with a non taxable haul charge e Include the haul charge on all mixes as usual e Setup a new tax location for the existing tax location create two identical tax locations e Set the new tax rate as exempt and the exemption amount for your haul charge e Select new tax rate for customers who receive tax free hauling e Ifzone charges are included the zone charges are taxed but the amount is minimal Do not worry too much about the pricing When entering prices for items remember that these prices can be customized for each customer and project allowing you freedom in making bids and rewarding loyal customers with better prices for items Minimum Load Charge Tables A minimum load or short load is a load that falls on or below the size specified on the Truck screen as the minimum load size for the truck Minimum load charges are assessed on the Orders and or Ticketing screen s to make up for the fact that such loads are not an efficient or
85. establish seasonal charges and the date ranges for which they are applied to orders and tickets Files gt Item Information gt Seasonal Charges Unloading Charges To establish methods of calculating unloading charges Files gt Item Information gt Unloading Charges Sundry Charges To set additional charges such as fuel surcharges or environmental charges Files gt Item Information gt Sundry Charges Vendor Types To set up types of vendors related to inventory receipts and purchase orders Files gt Item Information gt Vendor Types Vendors To set up vendors related to inventory receipts and purchase orders Files gt Item Information gt Vendors Freight Methods To set up freight methods related to inventory receipts and purchase orders Files gt Item Information gt Freight Methods Zones To set up the large geographical areas to which deliveries can be made Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Zones Cartage Rate Codes To define cartage rates that are later applied to orders along with the detailed information specified during the code setup Files gt Cartage Information gt Cartage Rate Codes 8 9 05 17 System Information a0 PO lt m Qm GE gt m sl OH CO ar Purpose Cartage Surcharge Codes To establish additional payments applied to a cart
86. get WYSIWYG mode by granting the ability to click and drag fields to the desired location To adjust document formats through the Display screen 1 Click on the Display button from the Document Formats screen Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Formats gt Display COMMAND Aggregate Order Form ES Command Aggregate Order Form x Ye ye Ye Ye Ye Ye ye Ye Ye Ye Ye EK Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye KEK Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye KK Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye KKK Ye Ye Ye ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye KKK KEK Ye Ye KKK Ye Ye Ye ye yr Ps COMMAND CONCRETE ORDER FORM CUSTOMER NAME XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXxXXXxxx ORDER DATE MM DD YY DELIVERY ADDRESS XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXxXxxx PROJECT CODE XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXxXxXx ORDERED BY XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXxXxXx gt x PROJECT NAME XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXxXxXx PHONE NUMBER XXXXXXXXXXXXx JOB NUMBER XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SCHEDULED PLANT TIME DUE ON JOB HH NN TRAVEL TIME XXXX TRUCK SPACING XXXX QUANTITY PRODUCT CODE PRODUCT DESCRIPTION XXXX XX XX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXX XX XX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXx XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXxX XXXX XX XX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXX XX XX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXx XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXx INSTRUCTIONS XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
87. gt Users 2 Assign the group a User name using uppercase or lowercase characters 3 Mark the Group checkbox to assign the information you enter to a group of users 4 Enter an Owner Name This required field specifies the full name of the group Preferences To assign user preferences 1 Select the Preferences tab from the Users screen Files gt System Information gt Users gt Preferences Users Preferences Tab EDTUSNM1 Preferences Licenses Privileges Order Printers Options Plants Cost Centers Language English X Date Format mm dd yyyy or dd mm yvyy z Date Order Month before day zl Print Model gt J SCREEN Report to Screen Only Allow This Print Model Employee Code sl E Albert Tschannen Default Location for Mix Conversion gt E Plant Code E Is Trussville Quarry Scale Code gt South Scale 2 From the Language field s drop down list select the language that will be used by this user or user group 3 From the Date Format field s drop down list select the format that you want to use when viewing dates 44 From the Date Order field choose whether you want the month to display before the day or the day to display before the month Select a printer from the Print Model field s drop down list Mark the Only Allow This Print Model checkbox if you want the user or group to be able to use that printer only Select the Employee Code from the drop down list Popu
88. hauler records that identify people or companies outside of your organization who are assigned to tickets and deliver items in their own truck If you plan to use haulers it is necessary for you to set up a hauler code for your company Name this hauler Company Truck and assign it to all trucks your company owns when setting up the actual trucks Before entering hauler information gather information about the people or companies that you contract with to deliver your items To add a new hauler 1 Goto the Haulers screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information Haulers EDTHLER m Haulers Oix Hauler Code 100 Name Lit Aganer Contact John Cromeans Charge amp Pay Phone Number 879 3282 Company gt 02 Command Agaregates Insurance Carrier Name Insurance Expiration Date 2 Enter a Hauler Code to identify the new hauler Enter the Name of the hauler or hauling service such as Acme Trucking 4 If possible enter a Contact name for reference with the hauling service name 5 Enter a Phone Number to accompany the hauling service name and contact 6 Identify the Company for which the hauler normally works If the hauler does not work primarily for a specific company or if your system contains only one company leave this field blank 7 Enter the Insurance Carrier Name and Insurance Expiration Date 8 Accept the Haulers screen to save the new hauler information Sg Truck Types A tru
89. how you want to categorize your customers within invoicing financial and reporting functions To enter an accounting category 1 Goto the Accounting Categories screen Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Accounting Categories 124 8 9 05 Accounting Categories EDTACAT W Accounting Categories Accounting Category 1 Description Trade Customers Short Trade Document Format Group Codes Invoices sl JINVCNFI2 StlnNf12 Credit Memos JINVCNFI2 StlnNf12 Debit Memos gt JINVCPLI7 StlnPH7 Next Number Sequence Codes Invoices sf INVOICE Credit Memos lb INVOICE Debit Memos lb INVOICE Language Greek L 2 Enter an Accounting Category Code to identify the new accounting category 3 Enter short and long descriptions for the accounting category 4 Select document format group codes for all of the Invoices Credit Memos and Debit Memos you will use Your Command Alkon Project Manager sets up your document format groups 5 Select Next Number Sequence Codes for all necessary categories Next numbers are set up on the Next Numbers screen Files gt General Information gt Next Numbers 6 Select the Language that should be printed if different from the system language If the field is left blank the system default will be used Note This seldom used feature requires the Print In Language document tag attribute be setup Any tag with this attribute prints 7 Accept the Accounting
90. if the item is saleable The value will initially default from the selected Item Category Note Items not marked as salable will not be available in order entry 6 If the Saleable Item field is flagged the Do not allow ticketing flag becomes available COMMANDseries allows users to assign price by item category This modification is effected by creating a dummy item record for a item category If you are creating an item category item for this purpose select the Do Not Allow Ticketing flag Note Additional information on this field can be found in the appendices 7 Mark Use Lot Number if the item is to be tracking using Lot Numbers This flag is often used for block products Note This field will not be available if the Serial Number flag is set 212 8 Mark Constituent Items if the item is a mix constituent When you later enter mixes you will fill out a mix Constituents tab Only items flagged as Constituent Items will be available on that tab Note The next three fields relate to Materials Manager If it is not in the license these fields will not display 9 Mark Admixture As Part Of Volume Calculation if the material is added to a mix in volumes sufficient to significantly afffect yield calculations 10 Mark Allow Minimum Cement Content Override to enable a Materials Manager user to reduce the cement content less than the specified minimum This box is unchecked by default 11 Mark Allow Constituent Substit
91. in Orders Tickets If this is selected the Delivery Instruction zoom box will automatically open when the cursor enters the Delivery Instructions field 16 Auto Display Instructions in Orders Tickets If this is selected the list of customer projects will automatically open when the cursor enters the Projects field 17 Auto Display Possible Projects in Orders Tickets If this is selected the list of possible products will automatically open when the cursor enters the Item Code field 18 Accept the screen to save user options information Plants The Plants tab allows users to set up security to limit the number of plants in most areas of COMMANDseries that a user can access to view add or change data This function effectively allows the user to divide a system into several divisions from an operational view but keep a single unified database for file storage of customers projects products and other files This will not control every area of the system Areas covered are in the operational end of the system from projects orders tickets Daily and Scheduling Reports to Invoice Preparation It assumes that users enabled to enter customers products and other master files will have ability to see all plants To configure plants 1 2 Select Files gt System Information gt Users gt Plants Users Plants Tab EDTUSNM7 Preferences Licenses Privileges Order Printers Options Plants Cost Centers
92. inside parentheses z Alternate Currency Conversion Factor 3 Enter a long Description and Short description for the currency type 4 Enter a Currency Symbol specific to the currency and select Leading number or Following number to specify the Symbol Placement 5 Enter a Thousand Separator and Decimal Separator If a decimal separator is used mark the Decimal Places Used checkbox 6 Select a Negative Sign character to indicate a negative value and select Symbol Inside Parentheses or Symbol Outside Parentheses for the Negative Sign Placement 7 If desired enter an Alternate Currency Conversion Factor This factor will be multiplied by the total invoice amount to allow for printing in a currency other than that configured in the systems 8 Accept the screen to save the new or changed currency Code Lengths Four codes form the heart of your COMMANDseries accounting structure e Company Codes e Cost Center Codes e Account Codes e Sub account Codes Before going any further in the file build process you must establish the lengths for each of these codes Once these lengths are entered the appropriate editor will enforce the lengths 8 9 05 61 To establish code lengths 1 Open the Financials Configuration screen Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Financials Setting Code Lengths EDTCNFXL Configuration PE System Defaults Distribution Dispatch Aggregate Invoicin
93. invalid the Data In record is rejected A log of all substitutions and rejections is added to the existing log of records An option to write the log to a Database table instead of a Log Report is available using the pull down menu Set the default Language to use in the system This can be overridden at the user level on the Users screen Files gt System Information gt Users or from the Preferences screen Miscellaneous gt Preferences Select the Date Format for dates to display throughout the COMMANDseries applications Select Month before day or Day before month in the Date Order field Customer Defaults The buttons along the bottom of the Defaults form allow you to establish defaults for new customers These option cover the majority of the fields in 132 the customer record so that establishing the defaults will save a great deal of time during data entry Customer Sales Defaults Setup To configure customer sales defaults 1 From the Customers Defaults section at the bottom of the Defaults tab select the Sales button Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Defaults gt Sales Customer Sales Defaults EDTCNFX3 m Customer Sales Defaults EN Concrete Copy to All Sales Analysis Code gt fi Commercial Salesman sl fo John Wunch 2 Select a Concrete or Aggregate from the Product Line field s list 3 Mark the Copy To All checkbox if necessary When marked this copies custo
94. is available to print on all of the above 4 Enter the message Text This field represents the message text that is printed on a customer form when the associated message code is selected Multiple lines may be entered The message automatically auto wraps the message text unless the user defines each line break by pressing lt Enter gt 5 Accept the Message Text screen 8 9 05 107 Initial Accounting Information The following section addresses entry of basic accounting and sales tax information By entering this information you are in effect laying the foundation for your company s accounting operations Topics in this section Inventory Accounting Periods A R Accounting Periods G L Accounting Periods Bank Codes Adjustment Codes Tax Authorities Tax Authority Locations Tax Codes Credit Codes Terms Codes Accounting Categories Sales Analysis Codes Inventory Accounting Periods The Inventory Accounting Periods function allows you to establish beginning and ending dates for inventory periods within an accounting year These dates control the accounting periods for inventory activity only While the Inventory Accounting Periods look and function similar to A R Accounting Periods the two are completely distinct items To set up inventory accounting periods 1 In COMMANDinventory go to the Inventory Accounting Periods screen Files gt General Information gt Inventory Accounting Periods 108 Inven
95. items you use or sell Usage Code Setup To enter a new usage code 1 Go to the Usage Codes screen Files gt Item Information gt Usage Codes Usage Codes EDTUSGE m Usage Codes X a bi Description ALL USES Residential flatwork Above grade walls ICF Low rise C 1 P tilt up Parking areas High rises Highways Streets local roads d um 701 702 703 704 Ei CH Le J CH Eat 8 9 05 3 WS 5 Enter a Code for the new usage Enter a Description and Short description for the usage code as desired To enter another usage code click on the Add Occurrence button or press lt Shift F6 gt Accept this screen to save the usage codes Units of Measure UOM In a program such as COMMANDseries in which many different things get measured and calculated in many different ways it is important to have a mechanism to ensure that items prices and amounts get measured correctly Complicating things further certain items get measured differently in different parts of the business process Cement for example is often measured in pounds for batching but measured in tons for inventory And of course some customers may purchase material in US Customary measurements while others require metric amounts COMMANDseries controls how items are measured by assigning each item several of Unit of Measure UOM codes This section provides an overview of the different UOM o
96. jo ayes y pode OL yunouuyv JUNOWY yunoo535e A4 1u o Au adA L UODOESURBIL 1Pp 19 1iq d qns 1Ssoo 3815 nuno55v p si A i SJUNOWe 1Ip 19 our W JIPAID pub our w jIqaq aIIOAU S5 tu2D SUIDIOAUIGNYWWOD s ii3ug 75 AiOJUSAUIGNVYWWOD s q8Al9991QNVIWIWOD2 BuIsIOAUIGNYWWOD U01 DAS SIY ul s3Ido A UO s duu es o5u 1J 1 se p piAo1id aue sajdwes asou AAIIDE YY USAID 104 suoiqeinBijuo5 BPOD Hulyoog 15 Jo sajdwes awos ae Hulmojjo4 sojduivs po2 Sunpioog 75 G xipusddy 359 8 9 05 s nnueno yonpoid uleuu 00 00I e9 DO4d ueld s jes GOD ur1 3aonpoid BY Jo Ssappugenbh y p4odea4 OL a GeAlade4 00 00SS Auedwos Auedwoy SHO GOD sjunoosoe 0 AIDUS e13o1 y p4odo4 OL 00 00S Wv xeL Auedwos ajqeAeg xeL sajes ajqeAed XEL s esS y p109 1 0 a Gexe JI quejd yoes woud 00 000S IECH pold 1U El sajeS GOD peddiys ynpoid yoes jo ayes y p102 1 OL yunouuv JUNOWYy yunoo535e A4 1u o Au d L uonmoesue _ L 1p 19 1yiq d qns 1Soo 3815 n3uno55v aIJoau GOD 360 8 9 05 yuawAed euIBiio y 104 pew s 117U BU BSUBADY sJu uu ud PION VO 00 000Z v AueduioO g AueduuoO vg Auedwodsejut UO g oO 104 w V AUBLUIOOISIUT ue p109 1 OL d 00 000Z g Auedwoy v Auedwoy d v AuedwodsajuT 0D 0 V 03 104 div ueduuooi luI ue pio25 1 OL qP
97. lt 2 CITY fo Unincorporated No Tax d CNTY E Jefferson County d 2 Enter a Tax Code to identify this tax configuration Enter a long Description and Short description for the tax code 4 Select each Tax Authority and the appropriate related Tax Location for this tax code 5 Repeat Step 4 for each tax authority that applies to the tax code you are defining 6 Accept the Tax Code screen to save this tax code SE Note Alter a current tax code by using the Add Occurrence button to add a new tax authority location or using the Delete button to delete a tax authority location Each tax code must have an entry for each Tax Authority defined in the system To account for areas in which no tax is charged for a specific authority you will need to create zero rate tax locations for each authority Credit Codes Credit codes dictate how orders and tickets can be generated in the COMMANDseries applications Credit codes are assigned to customers and projects to specify the current credit status for the customer or project When orders are established and when the first ticket is generated for an order the 8 9 05 credit code for the customer or project is verified A project credit code will override a customer credit code Any number of credit codes can be established and maintained in the system The Credit Type field controls the nature of the credit code and the action taken regarding orders and tickets Before entering
98. of a job through its stages and reduced invoicing costs Job Transfer orders will not be invoiced Note To enter Job Cost Phases or Jobs you must e Have aggregate in the system license e Bein Aggregate Invoicing or Receivables To enter a Job Cost Phase 1 Goto the Job Cost Phase screen Files gt General Information gt Job Cost Phases 8 9 05 183 Job Cost Phase EDTPHSE A Job Cost Phase Enter a Job Cost Phase code This code is a character string of up to 16 characters Enter a Description 40 characters Enter a Short Description 8 characters Select the Add Occurrence button to enter another phase or Accept the screen Creating a Job Cost Job is a matter of creating a job code and then assigning specific Job Cost Phases to that code Once that is done the job can be tracked within COMMANDseries To enter a Job Cost Job 1 Go to the Job Cost Job screen Files gt General Information gt Job Cost Job Job Cost Jobs EDTJCIB E Job Cost Jobs Phases 2 3 4 5 6 Enter a Job Cost Job code or detail on the field to select from a list Enter a Description of the Job Enter a Short Description Enter a Job Cost Phase or detail on the field to select from a list Select the Add Occurrence button to enter another phase or Accept the screen 184 8 9 05 Zones The Zones screen allows access to zone records that represent the large geographical areas into which de
99. of new tickets for each map page travel time date plant combination against the existing number of loads If the new loads will exceed the specified Total Travel Time Loads the load count and total time for that map page will be reduced by the precentage specified in the Acceptable Travel Time Load Percentage field 5 Add new load times to the running total and the load count field is incremented accordingly 6 Divide the total load times by the number of loads to get averages 7 Update the travel times on the map page with the new averages Deadhead Setup COMMANDseries now supports deadheading in the Tracking amp Scheduling system Deadheading support is provided through several different functions e Tasks e Conditions Driver Overtime Details on configuring each of these features are provided immediately after this section 192 To set up deadheading 1 Load the Task Codes Files gt Plant and Delivery Information gt Task Codes and edit add or subtract from them as necessary Accept the form your data will not be saved unless you accept the form For detailed instructions on this step refer to the Task Codes section of this document 2 Load the Condition Codes Files gt Plant and Delivery Information gt Condition Codes and edit add or subtract from them as necessary Confirm the Deadhead condition color and flag match customer preference Accept the form your data will not be saved unless you
100. of the Projects screen you have the option to select a Product Format Type If you select Aggregate Products the screen changes Projects Products tab Aggregate Products EDTPROJO Main Addresses Pricing Accounting Invoicing Distribution User Fields Distances Products Forecast Plant E z Aggregate Products v Default Price Type FOB Price z FOB Price S Truck Wo Cat SE Product Plant Description Quantity Type Price Table Rate ER JALL Gloves Leather ja J 15 00 IT om 15 00 x d 33 JALL 172 exp joint fa J 300 f2 f ooo 3 00 gt a To establish aggregate pricing 1 Select a Default Price Type for the project This selection simply specifies the project default Pricing options can be changed at the product level Note Changing the Default Price Type for an existing project does not affect products already entered The change will only affect new products added to the project Enter a Product Code or detail on the field to select from a list Enter the Plant from which the customer will order the product To select all plants enter ALL or Tip If the same product is entered once for all plants and once for a specific plant the specific plant setting will have precedence The product Description will default from the product file Enter the Quantity of the product that the customer expects to buy during the course of the project This value is entered for reference only E
101. on the Calc ed line Enter estimated To Plant travel times for travel from the job site back to the plant Theoretically drivers already know where the plant is so the To Plant time may be a little less than the To Job time Use the inner Add Occurrence button to add a new date Range Use the outer Add Occurrence button to add travel times for another plant Accept the screen to save the map page 188 Map Pages Zones Setup To enter map pages zones information 1 Select the Zones tab on the Map Pages screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Map Pages gt Zones Map Pages EDTMAPS2 Travel Times Zones Coordinates Zone Code sl hong Zone 1000 Pom Zone 1001 Note Remember zones are not associated with travel times they are strictly used for applying travel surcharges 2 Select a Zone Code to associate with the current map page The zone allows users to apply travel surcharges to orders during order entry and can be set up on the Zones screen Files gt Plants amp Delivery Information gt Zones Note Click the Add Occurrence button to set up multiple zone codes Map Pages Coordinates To set up map pages coordinates 1 Select the Coordinates tab on the Map Pages screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Map Pages gt Coordinates Map Pages EDTMAPS3 Travel Times Zones Coordinates Upper Left Coordinate Latitude 4 3119N Longitude fo 00E Lower Right Coord
102. options press lt Enter gt A form will appear with a list of selections appropriate to that field Some fields also have small buttons next to them that have the same effect Example of fields with detail buttons Owner gt Baptist Church Architect JFasenden Architechs Engineer gt Lindhurst Engineering General Contractor gt Kraus Anderson The small buttons are called detail buttons The act of bringing up a list of available choices whether by using the detail button or the lt Enter gt key is referred to as detailing on a field Clicking on the detail button will do the same thing as pressing the lt Enter gt key In this example to retrieve a list of all the architects in the system you could either e Press lt Tab gt until the cursor is in the Architect field then press lt Enter gt Or e Click on the detail button to the left of the Architect field regardless of the location of the cursor Some types of fields have specialized detail buttons such as date fields 30 Example of a Date button Order Date j Even though the button is different its place to the immediate left of the Order Date field lets you know that it is a detail button Add Occurrence Many forms in COMMANDseries call for varying amounts of data For example one order might have only one item but the next might have four For any situation in which you finish entering something and say I need to enter a
103. or a constituent or both The Item Category is also assigned on this tab Assign Units of Measure and extension codes These default from the Item category but can be edited at the Item level Establish non standard conversions For example converting a cubic yard of a mix to a specific number of blocks Tax and discount information Use to override tax information entered on the Sales tab Only available if the Item Type is concrete or asphalt This tab holds reference and batching information about the mix strength slump aggregate size etc for concrete strenght asphaltic cement type minimum temperature etc for asphalt Enter information in item specific user defined fields The specific fields must first be created on the Configuration User Fields tab Specify which locations have the item A plant cannot ship an item if the item does not exist at the location s associated with the plant plant level cost information Record price information for the item at each plant Record inventory information for the item at each plant Record batching information at each plant Record cost information about constituent products Record batch codes for each plant Item level associated products Information can be recorded for customers and or items When orders are placed for a customer or project for a specific item the customer project specific item information is used in lieu of the generic item information Before entering i
104. page and typically consists of information about the sale such as purchase order price project code and product code Footer The Footer of a receipt is generally printed at the end of each page and typically consists of information such as the total sale 3 Enter the Number of lines in body of form View and adjust the form by clicking the Display button 5 Accept the Receipt Format Codes and the Document Format Group Codes screens 8 9 05 101 Invoice Out Format Codes Setup This screen is used to specify the various elements document formats that make up an invoice out document Each of the elements must already be defined using the Document Format screen Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Format Groups gt Formats When setting up an invoice out document consider the type of printer the size of the type style font and the length of the form on which the statement will be printed to ensure that all desired information will fit in the space allowed on the statement The information shown in the various elements of the invoice out document is dependent upon the user defined setup of these documents in the Document Formats screen The Document Format Group Type field on the Document Format Group Codes screen should display Invoice Out To set up invoice out format codes 1 Select the Formats button on the Document Format Group Codes screen Files gt General Information gt Docume
105. plan to adjust this price using the Calculate Price Change function Enter any Sundry Charges applicable to this project If necessary select the Project Sundry Charge Pricing button to override the standard pricing for the sundry charge Sundry Charge Pricing EDTPROJ5 f Project Sundry Charge Pricing 1 SATSUN EN Price ll EubeYa Price Extension D Effective BI Previous Price li Duer Price Extension D Create Separate Invoice Mark the Create Separate Invoice checkbox if you want the sundry charge to be billed separately Accept the screen when your are done Additional sundry charges can be added by pressing the Add Occurrence button Enter Any Surcharge Codes applicable to this project Aggregate only If a Surcharge is specified a field will apear that will allow you to override the surcharge Rate If necessary set the Override Terms Discount flag The box is selected two additional fields display The Discount Rate Type lets you select between a discount amount and a discount percentage The Discount Rate is the override rate Accept the Project Product Pricing Information screen Select the Ready Mix button to enter the Batch Code and Slump for the mix product and accept the Project Product Ready Mix screen Project Product Ready Mix Information EDTPROJ2 W Project Product F Batch Code Slump 4 If necessary enter a Product for the Associated Products line the si
106. screen Plants Plants represent the physical sites from which items can be shipped and prices can be set Plants are used in a variety of ways throughout COMMANDseries applications Items are assigned to individual plants to indicate item availability at the plant Pricing cost inventory batching and other information can be set at the plant level for each item Plants are assigned to trucks and drivers indicating the default home base for each Plants are assigned to customers projects and eventually orders as billing plants indicating that the plant controls the prices charged and the company to which the order and its subsequent invoice are assigned Plants are assigned to projects and eventually to orders as scheduled plants which control the plant from which order schedules are developed Plants are assigned to tickets as shipping plants indicating the plant from where the items are delivered 8 9 05 T59 e Plants play a critical role in the process of charging sales tax in that they are assigned a tax code indicating the tax authority locations used for point of origination taxing The Main tab provides basic information about plants Through separate tabs you can access communication batching scheduling and costing information about the plant In addition tabbed screens for plants scales bins constituent order and user fields are available Before entering plant information gather information about plant
107. specific color to project orders the Tracking screen becomes harder to read Assigning project colors should be the exception rather than the rule 12 Mark the Print Mix Weights on Tickets checkbox if necessary When this checkbox is checked all delivery tickets for the project will include constituent weights 13 Accept the screen or proceed to the User Fields tab Entering Project User Fields Information The User Fields tab allows you to enter information for the project in your system s user defined fields User Fields are created and configured for the entire system through the User Fields tab on the main Configuration screen Files gt General Information gt Configuration User fields can be restricted to specific uses Customers Orders Tickets etc For a user field to appear on the project screen it must be created with a Field Type of Project If the field is created with Field Types of Project and Orders then the field can be used to communicate between order entry dispatch personnel and account management personnel If there are no user defined fields flagged as project related the User Fields tab will not be displayed To enter project user field information 1 From the Projects screen select the User Fields tab Quotes gt Quotes gt Projects gt New Detail gt User Fields or Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Projects gt User Fields Projects User Fields Tab EDTPROJK
108. the mix as usable or not usable by Quality Control Note Once enabled at the system level use Order level Mix design must be enabled for individual users See the Users section for more information 20 If you are using the Mix Design screen enter a Mix Design Document Format to print out mix designs 21 If you are using an encryption equation to provide security for your QC connection to COMMANDseries press the QC Encryption button Batch Code Encryption Equation EDTCNFX2 23 Batch Code Encryption Equation jeg Equation lt batch code gt Field List batch Code D j Enter the encryption equation and Accept the screen 22 If you are licensed for the Material Manager the Material Manager button will display Press the button to call the Material Manager Configuration screen Material Manager Configuration EDTCNFY1 f Material Manager Configuration ES System Lab Location ER Volume to Weight Constants Cubic Feet to Pounds 62 38300 U S Gallons to Pounds 8 33000 23 Enter the System Lab Location for Material Manager 24 Enter appropriate Conversion constants 25 Accept the screen to return to the Distribution tab 8 9 05 141 26 Proceed to the Dispatch tab Dispatch Configuration The Dispatch Configuration tab allows customization of the dispatching features of several of the COMMANDseries functions To enter dispatch configuration 1 Aggregate Copy to All Select the Dispatch t
109. the year portion of a date field expressed numerically YY uses the last two digits of the year while YYYY uses the century format HH Time Represents the hour portion of a time field in military format NN Date Represents the minute portion of a time field x y Characte Indicates that only a portion of the character field r should be included Where x and y are numbers AA m start at position x in the string and include y characters i e COMMANDseries using a mask 1 7 would result in COMMAND x y Characte Indicates that only a portion of the character field r should be included Start at number x in the string and include through number y i e COMMANDseries using a mask 8 6 would result in series Note If a data value is too big for the mask for example with 12345 678375 the form field overflows and the mask is printed out as a pound sign followed by as much of the field as it can put in the mask Using the sample mask this case would be 12 34 Document Format Groups The Document Format Group Codes screen allows access to the document format groups that identify the individual document formats created with the Document Formats screen that make up invoices statements and quotes Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Formats These forms in contrast to orders and tickets are comprised of various sections i e h
110. to a customer Extra products are not specific to any one mix product assigned to a customer and can be added to any order for the customer Accept the screen Pricing options for Associated and Extra Products The Customer Product Pricing information will have some additional fields if the item in question is an associated or extra product 8 9 05 Customer Product Pricing Information associated product EDTCUST1 Customer Product Pricing Information 50 AEA US Estimated Quantity Dosage Default Load Quantity Dosage Price ll 3361 perc d Price Extension Per unit Effective By foiJan 2001 Previous Price per c yd Price Extension Per unit D kd Allow Automatic Price Adjustments Print on Separate Invoice Price Included in Mix Price UOM Extensions e The Print on Separate Invoice allows users to flag an item to be invoiced separately from the main order e If the Price Included in Mix Price is selected then the price of the admixture will not be added to the mix price This field is only available if trhe product in question is an associated product Projects Projects represent specific jobs for customers and contain delivery product and pricing information that assists the user in delivering materials and billing the customer To ensure that projects created through the quote module are consistent with those entered manually the Job and Quotes screens have been patterned
111. want to copy this information to all locations Item Batch Codes Setup The Batch Codes tab is used to enter batch codes and batch code descriptions To define batch code information 1 Select the Batch tab Items Batch Codes Tab EDTIMSTF Main UOM Conversions Sales Tax Override Mix User Fields Locations Costs Prices Inventory Batching Batch Codes Constituents Location Code 1 SHELBY 4 Batch Code Description Short Descr ER El E Copy to Al 2 Inthe Batch Code field enter a code that you want to represent the item Note When interfacing with an Eagle batch codes can be no longer than eight alphanumeric characters 3 The second line batch code is used as a reserve code For example if dispatch sends one batch code and the batcher has none in inventory the batcher will use the reserve code and send this information back to dispatch Dispatch will always send the primary code but it will accept either the primary or reserve code In the Description field enter text that describes the batch code Enter an abbreviated description in the Short Description field Mark the Copy to All checkbox to copy this information to all locations Accept the screen or proceed to the next tab oS Item Constituent Setup The Constituents tab is used to enter information about the quantity of constituent products at each location The tab is only available for concrete and asphalt item types To de
112. you may select the Defaults button to set 12 periods with dates beginning on the first day and ending on the last day of each month and accept the screen Or Enter the Number of Periods maximum of 13 you wish to create for the specified accounting year Typically the number of periods is dictated by months of the year quarters or other standard accounting periods However remember that the Sales Data Periods settings are independent of any other COMMANDseries system accounting or GL period settings 4 Enter a Start Date and End Date for each of the periods created by the Number of Periods value To post sales data for a given period ensure that the Open checkbox adjacent to the dates is marked By default all newly created sales periods will be open 5 Accept the screen to save the new sales data period information Sales Periods may be closed to prevent any additional sales from being posted to the period Closing Sales Periods has no impact on A R Accounting Periods Similarly closing A R Accounting Periods whether manually or by the Period End Processing routine in COMMANDreceivables has no effect on any Sales Data Periods Attempting to post sales data to a closed period will result in an error message To close sales data periods 1 Go to the Sales Data Periods screen Reporting gt Sales Data Periods 2 Enter the Accounting Year associated with the sales data period s you wish to close 3 Unmark the Open check
113. your own template to create a customized quote template This template may contain company logos headers and footers There are three parts to formatting a document template e General Document Layout e Formatting for non Table Related fields e Formatting for Table Related fields General Document Layout Quote layouts are set up according to the standard procedures for Microsoft Word Adjust margins select fonts insert company logos anything you want to do to give your quote a more professional appearance For specific formatting instructions consult your Microsoft Word manual formatting for Non table Related Fields The Quote Print function operates by the use of the Search and Replace function Once the template is loaded and the database accessed each field variable listed in the template is replaced with its corresponding value from the database Each field in the database is noted in the template by the format TBLE field name e TBLE is the quote system database table that contains the field e field name is field in the database table e Tildes are placed at each end to ensure that only the field variables get replaced Note There are zero spaces within the field layout Ex YMCH Min Loads For a list of all available table field combination see the SAMPLEQUOTEALL DOT template The font type or size you assign to the field format will use for the information in that fiel
114. 1 2 seconds Note There are three Attack Delay fields one representing each card of the RIC If you have a single card RIC enter a value in the first field Enter values in he first two fields for a second card RIC and all three fields for a third card RIC 8 Accept the screen to save the signaling unit information Signaling Unit Options The Options tab on the Signaling Units screen allows you to specify messages and statuses that the signaling unit can accept and display To set up signaling unit options 1 Select the Options tab on the Signaling Units screen Files gt General Information gt Signaling Units gt Options Signaling Units EDTSIGU1 Options Incoming Outgoing Statuses Allow Truck Punch In Allow Truck Punch Out Acknowledge Valid Statuses Acknowledge Invalid Statuses Allow Text Messages lt lt l lt l 14 2 Mark the Allow Truck Punch In Punch Out checkboxes if you want this signaling unit to send a truck punch in or punch out flag to the system 3 Mark the Acknowledge Valid Invalid Statuses checkboxes if you want COMMANDcomm to send a flag to the signaling unit acknowledging that a valid invalid status was received 4 Mark the Allow Text Messages checkbox if you want this signaling unit to accept and display text messages 5 Accept the screen to save the signaling unit options Signaling Unit Messages General All of the message fields are initially blank If the unit type is
115. 12 pitch Number of lines in body of form EN 2 Enter the document format codes for each desired field The table below shows the available codes and suggestions for their content Header The Header typically contains descriptive title text such as Customer Statement page number company name and address customer account number and statement date It may also hold column headers for statement detail data These headers may include invoice number transaction type transaction date transaction amount sales tax discount amount transaction total and transaction balance The Statement Header is the first element printed on the statement Line Header The Line Header typically shows the project name with which the statement detail will be associated It is positioned directly below the Header Detail Line The Detail Lines typically show the individual transactions for a particular project The transaction detail may include such information as invoice number transaction type transaction date transaction amount sales tax discount amount transaction total and transaction balance The Detail Lines are positioned directly below the Line Header Line Footer The Line Footer typically shows the total transaction balance for each project The Line Footer is positioned directly below the Detail Line Message Lines This field contains any desired free form text The Message Lines are positioned directly below the Line Foo
116. 9 05 19 System Information aa PO lt Qm AD gt m 0 CO ar Purpose Cost Centers To identify cost centers that represent where or at which fiscal location i e plants main office shop etc a general ledger transaction occurred Files gt G L Information gt Cost Centers Account Codes G L Booking Codes To identify the chart of accounts that represent the type of activity i e receipt usage sales sales tax payable cash received etc is recorded by a general ledger transaction Files gt G L Information gt Account Codes To set up tables that tie cost centers and account codes to various types of inventory invoicing and receivables activity in order to assign an individual cost center and account code to each general ledger transaction that is made Files gt G L Information gt G L Booking Codes Hauler truck Information To specify cartage employees on the hauler truck or driver level Files gt Cartage Information gt Hauler Truck Information Deduction Codes To identify and implement organized deductions from the cartage rate of a hauler truck driver allowing systematic deductions for loans penalties etc Files gt Cartage Information gt Deduction Codes Quoted Deductions Sales Data Periods To apply deductions to the cartage transactions of a hauler truck or drive
117. 981 syiun Bulye4913 0 ny LL sqor SOD GOL est s seud ISOD qof est obewes 01e60156y SAIL Aiolju AurI s lqeA 32 13 BuIDIOAUT 9 9819U0 d 8 9 05 332 spolsed eyep sajes OTE suoipnp p p zond 9SZ Sapod uononpeq SSZ UODESULLIOIUI yonsz 4sajney VST Sapod Sapod s poo Bulyoog 1 5 Bulyoog 1 9 Buryoog 1 9 PO s po5 JuNODDV sapod junoo5v Ssapod uno29y ZOE S19 U99 SOD s1 U 2 SOD S19 U99 SOD TOE sedAj uno22y s d 1yunoo55v sedAj yuno55v 862 spoaloid spaloid syalod spealoid sjo old vZ si uiolsno si uiolsno si uiolsno si uiolsno SIBWIOISND 8SZ s poo2 o5i1nos s poo o5i1nos s poo o5i1nos oog Sapod s poo Sapod sisAjeue s es sisAjeue s jes sisAjeue sales gcz s lioB 1eo s ioB 1eo saloba ed saluoba eo Bununossy Bununossy Bununossy Bununoo5v PZT s poo SUJAL s poo SUJAL s po5 SWAL Sapod suu l OZT s poo Da s po2o Da s po Dal Sapod UpsD OZT s 1e1 s 1e1 s 1e1 s 1e1 Be1Ie5 p zond ebeweo p 1ono aBbeyed p aonO abewes p zond ESZ po ab4seyoins Ssapoo abseysins s po abseyoins s poo abseyoins abewesy obewes obewesy obewes TSZ s poo s poo s poo s poo 21 app ayes abewesy aje1 obeyes aje1 obewes GEZ SpOlldad Bununossy abeyes 8EZ eyez 01e60156y SAIL Aiolju Aur s lqeA 32 13 BuiS roAurI 9 81DU0 d 8 9 05 obeyes uoneinbijuoo HIED S les LTE e6 16by A
118. Accounting Category This field is used to specify a code that groups customers projects together 4 Mark the Apply Finance Charges checkbox if necessary If marked the Create Finance Charges routine in COMMANDreceivables will process this customer s account to see if finance charges are warranted 5 Mark the Print Statements checkbox if necessary When marked the Statement Print function will include this customer when statemetns are run for all customers or for a range of customers when that range includes the current customer If the customer is not included in normal statement printing it must be requested individually on the Statements screen 6 Enter all necessary Credit Card Information 7 Ifthe system is configured to maintain credit at the company level you will be able to enter separate credit information for each company Otherwise the system wildcard will default as the Company Code 8 Enter a Credit Code This field assigns a credit code to the customer for the current company The credit code controls how orders can be taken and shipped for the customer 10 11 12 13 14 15 Enter the Credit Limit This is the dollar amount of credit established for the customer Enter the High Balance This field represents the highest balance a customer has attained for the current company This amount can be entered when setting up customers This field is automatically updated when Enter a Cred
119. BPRC1 Calculator Tab FNDBPRC2 Material Costs Tab FNDBPRC3 Overhead Costs Tab FNDBPRC4 Delivery Costs Tab FNDDATE Calendar FNDLNCO Lien Contractors FNDLNHD Lien Header Location Manager FNDLNLE Lien Lender Manager FNDLNLG Lien Event Log FNDLNOW Lien Owner Manager FNDLNQH Lien Query Header Manager FNDLNTR Lien Trusts Manager FNDOTRE Order Tree FNDVOLM Volume Calculator FNDVOLM1 Columns FNDVOLM2 Slabs Footing Walls FNDVOLM3 Steps on a Level Grade FNDVOLM4 Integral Footings FNDVOLM5 Stairs FNDVOLMA Calculator UOM Selection Forms SEL Form Name Screen Name SELADJW Adjustment Recap Report SELARIN A R Invoices SELATBR Aged Trial Balance Report SELAUDT Audit Report SELBATC Batch Code Generator SELBATT Batch Totals Report SELBCMP Batching Comparison SELCCST Calculate Cost SELCNOT Customer Notes SELCONT Contribution Report SELCRCH Credit Status Change Report SELCRGL Create G L Entries SELCRIN Customer Inquiry Report SELCRLM Credit Limit Report SELCRPC Period End Processing SELCRPT Purge Transactions SELCRSI Creating Orders for Separate Invoices SELCSTU Cost Update Registers SELCTAJ Deduction Report SELCUHS Credit History Report
120. BREAK Break JBREAK JI Clock Prod Clock M Prod DOT Jj JDEAD Deadhead JDEAD Boh z M Cock T Prod V Clock T Prod V DOT DEAD d JINSVC In Service JINSVC Boh z M Cock T Prod V Clock T Prod T DOT d LUNCH Lunch LUNCH Driver T Clock J Prod Clock Pod DOT LUNCH JONLOD On Load JONLOD Diver JI Clock J Prod MV Clock M Prod F DOT H JOOSVC fOutof Serice foosvc z I Clock Prod Clock Prod DOT A SHOP Shop SHOP z I Clock T Prod T Clock T Prod DOT d zi 2 Press the Add Occurrence button or press lt F6 gt A new line will appear on the form 8 9 05 193 3 Enter a Code for the new task This code can be comprised of alphanumeric characters and can be up to 5 characters in length This code will be used internally to track the task Note Codes for the default Tasks cannot be edited 4 Enter a Description of the task The description can be up to forty characters in length practically however a maximum of twelve is recommended 5 Select a Task Type to determine if the task applies to a Truck a Driver or Both If teh field is left blank the system will read it as Both 6 Enter a Short description of the task This will generally be the same as the task Code but does not have to be This description will be used in reports in areas where the full description will not fit 7 Classify the task with regard to Truck Times Each task can be flagged as Clock or Productive time
121. Categories screen to save this category and its settings Sales Analysis Codes The sales analysis codes give you a means of classifying orders for reporting purposes Once the codes have been entered they can be assigned to customers and projects When an order is entered it will automatically be assigned the appropriate sales analysis code If a sales analysis code has not been assigned to the customer or project it must be assigned at the order level Sales analysis codes can be constructed to identify any type of grouping of customers and projects based on the business practices of your company Before entering sales analysis code information gather information about how you want to group customers and projects for analysis purposes 8 9 05 125 To enter a sales analysis code 1 Go to the Sales Analysis Codes screen Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Sales Analysis Codes Sales Analysis Codes EDTSANL W Sales Analysis Codes Description Aggregate ere Te Commercial Residential COD B trategic Accounts ee JAsphalt Producer Concrete Producer Block Producer Enter a Code to identify the sales category or group Enter a Description and a Short description for the sales analysis code Use the Add Occurrence button or press lt F6 gt to add another sales isi x Short comm ds JRES d coD d STRAT ad Des d ASP d CON d JBLK lt gt analysis code or accep
122. Charges aggregate only Allow Automatic Price Adjustments Customer Charges Defaults Setup To enter customer charges defaults 1 From the Customer Pricing screen select the Charges button Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Defaults gt Pricing gt Charges Customer Charges Defaults EDTCNFX6 m Customer Charges Defaults Concrete Copy to All Minimum Load Charge Table LTL Met Seasonal Charge Table ER Unloading Charge Table bh Apply Minimum Load Charges Minimum Load Charges on Separate Invoice Apply Seasonal Charges Seasonal Charges on Separate Invoice Apply Unloading Charges I Unloading Charges on Separate Invoice 2 From the Product Type field s list select Concrete or Aggregate Set the Copy to All flag if desired 3 Select the Minimum Load Seasonal and Unloading Charges as needed 8 9 05 135 Mark the Apply Minimum Load Charges Apply Seasonal Charges and or Apply Unloading Charges checkboxes if you want to apply the charge tables specified in the fields above Note The minimum load options only display if the product line is Concrete Mark the Create Separate Invoice if desired When marked this checkbox causes minimum load charges to be printed on separate invoices Mark the Seasonal and Unloading Charges on Separate Invoices checkboxes if you want to apply the charges on a separate invoice Accept the Customer Charges Defaults screen to save the charges
123. Constituent Order User Fields Device Type Eagle v8 26 2 way x Setup Print Dispatch Copy Allow Order Printing b Allow Report Printing Setup Material Transfer Inventory Transactions Shipped To This Plant Create Transfer Transaction For Manual Posting Y 2 Select a Device Type from the list for the plant s ticket This field specifies if the tickets are passed to a printer or a batch panel Mark the Print Dispatch Copy if you want a copy of a ticket for this plant to print at the dispatch office Mark the Allow Order Printing box if you want a copy of an order for this plant to print to the plant specified on the Orders screen Mark the Allow Report Printing box if you to print reports to this plant 162 10 11 12 Click on the Setup button the upper button of the two for each active form of plant communication in the Device Type field The Plant Communication Setup screen appears Note If a specialized interface such as a SmartPass is specified as the Device Type the setup screen will be different Please refer to the documentation for the interface in question for more information Plant Communication Setup EDTPLNTA m Plant Communication Setup 1 Plant Copy Manager Number l 2 Port Name LPT1 Selective Address 2 Auto Dial Flag Enter a Manager Number to specify the COMMANDcomm manager number to be used when printing an order Enter an LPT or C
124. Discount Rate Type and the Discount Rate fields will display 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Define the Product Line Surcharge Code and Surcharge Rate at the bottom of the screen Accept the Customer Product Pricing Information screen Select the Ready Mix button to enter the Batch Code and Slump for the mix product and accept the Customer Product Ready Mix screen Customer Product Ready Mix Information EDTCUST2 W Customer Product Read F Batch Code E Slump 2 Enter a Product for the Associated Products line This code uniquely identifies each associated product assigned to each customer specific mix product Note Associated products are so closely related to the shipment of the mix product in that they are automatically included on orders and tickets with the mix The best example of an associated product is an admixture that is to be batched with the mix product but is not included in the mix product s list of constituent products Select the Associated Products Pricing button if available and define customer product pricing information Customer Associated Product Information EDTCUST3 m Customer Associated Product Information 30659 3000 per 244 6 x ltem Code Description Category 54 sl ixAccelerator Accel o Pricing lt Enter any necessary Extra Products This code uniquely identifies each extra product assigned to a customer More than one extra product can be assigned
125. Document Calcualtion Tag Setup N A EDTDOCT4 Document Code List Tag Setup N A EDTDROT Driver Overtime EDTEMPL Employees EDTETSK Task Codes EDTFINH Finance Charges Batch Information N A EDTFINH1 Finance Charge Transactions Detail N A EDTFRMT Freight Methods EDTGLCD G L Booking Codes N A EDTGLPD G L Accounting Periods EDTHLER Haulers EDTHLPV Cartage Plant Zone Information EDTICAT Item Categories EDTICAT1 UOM Tab EDTICAT2 Concrete Mix Defaults 8 9 05 343 Form Name Screen Name Configuration EDTICAT3 Aggregate Mix Defaults EDTICAT4 Sales Tax Override Tab EDTIMST Items EDTIMST1 Main Information Tab EDTIMST2 Units of Measure Tab EDTIMST3 UOM Conversions Tab EDTIMST4 Sales Information Tab EDTIMST5 Sales Tax Override Tab EDTIMST6 Concrete Mix Tab EDTIMST7 Asphalt Mix Tab EDTIMST8 User Defined Fields Tab EDTIMST9 Locations Tab EDTIMSTA Location Costs Tab EDTIMSTB Location Pricing Tab EDTIMSTC Location Inventory Tab EDTIMSTD Location Batching Tab EDTIMSTE Location Constituents Tab EDTIMSTF Location Batch Codes Tab EDTIMSTG Location Copy Tab N A EDTISUB Item Substitution N A EDTIVPD Inventory Accounting Periods EDTJBSC Job Sources EDTJIBTY Job Types EDTJCJB Job Cost Jobs Phases N A EDTJOBS Jobs EDTJOBS1 Main Tab EDTJOBS2 Sales Information
126. E 2 Use Leftover gt z E d w Select the Return Plant to indicate to which plant the truck is returning Select an Event from the list to define an action for the outgoing message The valid options are Blank no event is associated with the message Type Ticket the ticket is being typed Cancel Ticket the ticket has been cancelled 74 Change Plant the shipping plant has been changed New Assignment the driver now has a new assignment Cancel Assignment the current assignment has been cancelled 5 Assign a document format in the Format Name field 6 Accept the screen to save the outgoing messages information Signaling Unit Statuses The Statuses tab on the Signaling Unit screen allows you to define codes for various events To set up status information for the signaling unit 1 Select the Statuses tab from the Signaling Units screen Files gt General Information gt Signaling Units gt Statuses 2 Enter a CA Code for each CA Status event These codes allow for configuration of the signaling unit without the need for hard coding Refer to the unit manufacturer s information for the correct status codes Signaling Units EDTSIGU4 Options Incoming Outgoing Statuses CDI Status CDI Code CDI Status CDI Code CDI Status CDI Code Load In ToJob E Dut of service LG OnJob ER Unload ER In Service i7 Wash EN To Plant EN Driver punch in At Plant FE 3 Accept the screen to save th
127. EREE ERE ENSE 228 ill User 229 S ndry ee EE 231 Un ee 234 Freight Methods vest tesa Ae ee eg 236 Cartage amp Delivery Information 238 Cartage ACCOUNTING Periods sessiversvenexssrvcenyveendiunv annus ERAN EENS EE E 238 Cartage Rate TEE 239 Hourly Cartage EE 240 Per Load Cartage EE 242 Quantity Distance Cartage Rates 243 Plant Zone Cartage Rates geet een Giedi 246 Quantity Cartage Hates NEEN 248 Setting up a Custom Cartage Rate Table w Equation 250 Cartage Surcharge COdGS eet ee 251 Quoted Cartage Pay ege 253 Hauler Truck Information At Sege Eege dea de Ee gege 254 IR ie ein Bn el TEEN 255 Q oted D d cti nS sareen hasqa ga mac EANN kuupa wu a TAERE NEEL watay waw aaa 256 Customers and Projects eu ENKNENEKSKEKE s asssusupasananapawawanamawanasswwawswwswa 258 KE 258 TE e Tue 259 Customer Main Tab SetuP EE 259 Customer Address Setup WEE 260 C st rmer Sales SOU EE 261 Customer Taxing SCtup 2 d e ebe Ed EE edd REEDER 262 Customer Pricing Zetting eege e En eeh E ENEE 262 Customer Charges Setup EE 264 Customer ACCOUNTING Setup 266 C stormer INVOICING Setup EE 268 Customer Distribution Setup eet dE ENNEN EEN dE 270 Customer User Fields Setup sg z5NVESEARNNE ERR EEEREK ENEE NEEN ENK EEE EA KNK OSKAR EEN 270 Customer Products Setup tee ere
128. Entry This flag is found on both the customer and project pricing tabs Note Selecting the Price Suppress flag in User Privileges has the same effect as a field level PRICE_DISP privilege of None In the event that the Price Suppress flag is set while user field level privileges are set to read only or full the Price Suppress flag setting will take precedence During order entry as soon as customer and if necessary project information has been entered the system determines what level of access the user will have to item pricing based on the following matrix Field level Print Price Allow Price Privilege on Ticket Change User s Access Level None N N no edit no display Y N no edit no display N Y no edit no display Y Y no edit no display 54 Read Only N N no edit no display Y N display only N Y display only Y Y display only Full N N no edit no display Y N display only N Y edit Y Y edit If a user has no access then no pricing information is displayed If the user has display only access then the item price is displayed in an inactive field The PSC is displayed immediately below the price field for reference purposes If the user has full access the Item Price field activates Note You can track prices changed in Order Entry If a price is changed in Order entry that price is labeled with a Price Source Code PSC of 90 User Ente
129. Field Type Literal x Attributes 1 On Credit Memo Invoice Only x I m Begin At 1 End At Mask or Literal Text aj ee Lett Justify Value on Display The Line field value comes from the Document Formats screen Line field 5 From the Field Type field s list select one of the following Field the field as one that changes value according to the tag associated with it Literal the field as one that includes the same literal text each time as designated in the Mask or Literal Text field 6 If you selected Literal skip to step 8 of this procedure If you selected Field select a name from the Name field s pull down menu This menu lists all variable field content options 7 Enter the number of Occurrences Sub Occurrences and Sub Sub Occurrences These numbers represent the specific occurrence and sub occurrence to appear in the current field For example if you selected Product Code from the Name field s list and entered 3 in the Occurrence field the value of the third product code listed would display in the document format Sub Occurrences are typically used for associated products and user defined fields Sub Sub Occurrences are typically used for user defined fields on an item 8 Define new document tags associated with this field if necessary on the Document Tags screen accessible through the Tags button 9 From the Attributes field s pull down menu select the field s attributes
130. Format Group Codes gt Formats The File Import Export Format Codes screen displays File Import Export Format Codes EDTDOCG8 W File Import Export Format Codes STMTFO12 Standard Statement Form 12 pitch EX File Header Format gt STFO1 201 Std Statement Heade Display File Detail Format gt STFO1 202 Std Statement Detail Number of lines in body of form 32 2 Enter the document format codes for each desired field File Header Format The Header typically contains information such as descriptive title text like Master File In It is the first element printed on the document File Detail Format The Detail typically shows the details of the file import or export These lines are positioned directly below the Header 3 Indicate the Number of lines in body of form View and adjust the form by clicking the Display button 5 Accept the File Import Export Format Codes and the Document Format Group Codes screens Ca Document Formatting Records in the document format file control the formatting of all printed forms or data out files Ticket Order Data Out Printing Formatting The following comments relate to how the data can be formatted during the data out which also applies when printing tickets and or orders 104 e Gring fields that contain only numeric characters can be formatted with a mask of number signs as many as are needed for the largest number that might be stored in t
131. IWNIOXyA A10USAUT Sd QeAIDD04y Buld1ioAUT GK EIER d 333 8 9 05 8 9 05 334 8 9 05 335 8 9 05 336 8 9 05 337 Field Level Security Worksheet The following list indicates which screens allow you to set field level security You can make copies of this section and use the worksheet to record your site access policies for the different screens Topics in this section Processing Forms DBA Edit Forms EDT Find or Lookup Forms END Selection Forms SEL System Forms SYS Appendix B Field Level Security Note The appearance of N A in the Configuration column or there is no Configuration column in the table indicates screens that do not permit field level security configuration Processing Forms DBA Purge Post Data Out In Form Name Screen Name Configuration DBAAUDT Audit Purge N A DBACNOT Purge Customer Notes N A DBACRPS Post Transactions N A DBACTPD Update Period Deductions N A DBACTTK Update Cartage Tickets N A DBAEXOR Export Orders and Tickets N A DBAEXPR Export Data DBAFCHG Calculate Finance Charges N A DBAIMOR Import Orders and Tickets N A DBAIMPR Import Data DBAINIT Initialize Analyze Files DBAJBQU Purge Closed Jobs amp Quotes N A DBALNLI Lien Legacy Invoice Manager N A DBALNSU Lien Location Substitution N A DBALNUP Lien Locations Update N A DBALOCK Database Locks N A DBAORDR Purge Expired Orders a
132. If the field is left blank the system will use the price from the item master 4 Enter Price Up Down modifiers 5 Accept the screen and the project 3 2 Appendix E Content Pricing Index A A R Accounting Periods 109 Account Codes 302 Account Types 298 Accounting Categories 124 Adjusting Cartage Rates 294 Adjustment Codes 112 Assigning a User and Password 43 Auto Ticketing Interface 75 Auto Ticketing Units 77 Auto Ticketing Units Communication 78 79 Setting Up Auto Ticketing Units 77 Setting Up the Libra Asphalt Interface 80 Setting Up the XCI LC20K Interface 79 Stop Light Setup 80 B Bank Codes 111 C Cartage amp Delivery Information 238 Cartage Rate Codes 239 Custom Rate Table with Equation 250 Hourly Rates 240 Per Load Rates 242 Plant Zone Rates 246 Quantity Rates 248 Quantity Distance Rates 243 Cartage Surcharge Codes 251 Changing Price Types 294 Code Lengths 61 COMMANDcartage Cartage Accounting Periods 238 COMMANDcartage Setup Cartage Rate Codes 239 Deduction Codes 255 Hauler Truck Information 254 Haulers 172 Quoted Cartage Pay 253 Quoted Deductions 256 Trucks 174 COMMANDexecutive 316 COMMANDquote Setup 320 COMMANDseries Accepting or Saving a Screen 29 Accessing Help 27 Add or Insert Occurrence 31 Calendar Function 28 Detailing on a Field 30 8 9 05 373 Entering Codes 22 Entering File Information 26 Exiting COMMANDseries 26 Logging into COMMANDseries 25 Lookup Screens 27 Setting
133. LS5 DLL needs to be among Command Series DLLs and needs to be registered on the client workstation To register run the following commands from the start run menu option on the client workstation regsvr32 regtool5 dll The DSN used for Command Series needs to be a system DSN Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP users need to have privilege to read registry To verify if the user has the Read access to the Registry Run regedt32 and choose the Security option SQL Server Troubleshooting ActiveX component can t create object error when printing a quote A reason for the error is missing or unregistered regtool5 dll A resolution is to add register regtool5 dll Table or view does not exist error A reason for the error is a missing Quote print view Run the Create Views option of the Database Updates and check the message frame for dberror after create view statements associated with the Quote Print views The Quote Print views are as follows YQHD YQPR YCRG YCTR YCZN YMCH YQPC YUCH An additional view in CmdSeries Plus is YQPP Invalid object name error A reason for the error is that the view specified in the error message does not exist Run the Create Views option of the Database Updates and check the message frame for dberror after the create view statement associated with the view You can run this statement using SQL as well The create view scripts are saved as MSG_Q messages in the Uniface app
134. MMANDseries system The information entered on this tab serves as the defaults for various data entry functions making the process more efficient Topics in this section Defaults Configuration Setup Customer Sales Defaults Setup Customer Taxing Defaults Setup Customers Pricing Defaults Setup Customer Charges Defaults Setup Customer Accounting Defaults Setup Customer Invoicing Defaults Setup Customer Distribution Defaults Setup Distribution Configuration Defaults Configuration Setup To set the defaults configuration 1 From the Configuration screen select the Defaults tab Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Defaults Configuration Defaults Tab EDTCNFXB Log Report English mrn dd yyyy or dd mm yyyy Month before day Saes Taxing Deg _ Accounting ___Invoicing _ Distribution The Dispatching Defaults fields allow you to establish ultimate defaults for key dispatching fields That is if you specify a Default Schedule Load Size 8 9 05 131 then the system will use that value only if it cannot find a load size anywhere else in the system 2 3 Specify the primary dispatching product line for this system in the Dispatching Defaults Product Line field Mark the Copy To All checkbox if the defaults should be applied to all items in the specified product line The Product Price field is not currently used Functionality for this field will be added in fut
135. Main Addresses Pricing Accounting Invoicing Distribution User Fields Distances Products Forecast Primary Contact aJ 2 Enter the information required by the user field If the text of the message is longer than the field you can press lt Enter gt or select the Zoom button to the left of the field to open a larger text box 3 Accept the screen or proceed to the Distances tab Entering Project Distances Information The Distances tab allows you to record the distances from various plants to the project site If entered this information will default into the Order Scheduling screen speeding up order entry and making scheduling more accurate particularly if Map Pages are not used To define project distances 1 From the Projects screen select the Distances tab Quotes gt Quotes gt Projects gt New Detail gt Distances or Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Projects gt Distances Projects Distances Tab EDTPROJL Main Addresses Pricing Accounting Invoicing Distribution User Fields Distances Products Forecast Plant Code Distance Estimated Travel Time 1 Main Plant 800 4 Minutes 2 North Side 26 00 e Minutes 3 River Road 31 00 45 Minutes 4 West End Plant 7200 110 Minutes 2 Enter the Plant code Enter the Distance between this plant and the project site 4 Enter the Estimated Travel Time in minutes between this plant and the project site 5
136. N Trucks are assigned or rostered ahead of time Truck arrives at gate card is read If truck is rostered assigned the truck is dispatched to the order The stop light will flash green If the truck is not assigned rostered or the truck is not identified the stop light will flash red An error message is displayed on the comm manager Gross Ticketing Lane 1 2 3 Truck drives onto scale Card is read If the truck is dispatched to a valid order the gross weight is retrieved and a ticket generated based on the gross weight A ticket is printed and the stop light turns green If the truck is not dispatched to a valid order a message is displayed on the comm manager and the stop light flashes or remains red Driver leaves scale retrieves ticket and leaves plant Combo Lane Gross amp Tare 1 2 Truck drives onto scale The system compares the gross weight to the tare weight in the truck record If the gross weight is equal to or less than the tare weight plus the Truck Minimum Weight over Tare for Gross value set on the Configuration gt Aggregate tab the scale weight is read as a tare and the the system reads the weight as a tare weight and update the truck record accordingly If the truck has been assigned to an order and the gross weight exceeds the allowed weight the system uses the scale weight as a gross weight and generates a ticket Supported Readers Command Alkon has a partnership wi
137. NDseries involve selecting information from a list In some cases customer or items for example those lists can be quite long To simplify the lookup process we have established Smart Lookup for selected fields This feature allows you to find a specific record quickly even if the list you are searching is long Most lookups in COMMANDseries are based on some sort of code Customer Code Project Codes etc However most of the codes used in COMMANDseries are arbitrary numbers and it is difficult to keep track of them Smart Lookup allows you to perform lookups based on the description of the record the Customer Name instead of the Customer Code for example Because you are more likely to remember a customer s actual name that a code smart lookup allows you to find a specific record faster than if you were to search based solely on codes To use smart lookup Note This example demonstrates looking up a specific customer The basic process is the same for all fields that support smart lookup 1 Once the cursor is in the Customer Code field enter the first few letters of the Customer Description not the customer code Searching for customers beginning with BA A Orders Order Date 21 Oct 2002 a Monday Order Code Customer Code gt BA Order Type Project Code Payment Form Lot Block xl 2 Detail on the field A lookup screen will appear A Choices x A Customer File BA Records Selected By Sort name Cust2m Name
138. O62 Plant 378 Fixed Truck 432 Variable Truck Cost Per Hour 29 00 Yearly Interest Rate 900 Truck Productive Factor 65 00 Z Desired Profit Per Quantity 3 50 Enter the Administration Cost Per Quantities specifying the estimated administrative cost per yard or meter to use in the calculation of projected costs for profit reporting This value is multiplied by the number of yards or meters to determine the estimated administrative cost per ticket Enter the Sales Cost Per Quantities specifying the estimated sales cost per quantity to use in the calculation of projected costs for profit reporting This value is multiplied by the number of yards or meters to determine the estimated sales cost per ticket Enter the Dispatch Cost Per Quantities specifying the estimated dispatch cost per quantity to use in the calculation of projected costs for profit reporting This value is multiplied by the number of yards or meters to determine the estimated dispatch cost per ticket Enter the Plant Cost Per Quantities specifying the estimated plant cost per quantity to use in the calculation of projected costs for profit reporting This value is multiplied by the number of yards or meters to determine the estimated plant cost per ticket Enter the Fixed Truck Per Quantities specifying the fixed truck cost per quantity to use in the calculation of projected costs for profit reporting Fixed trucking costs are those costs that do not vary significan
139. OM Port Name or select the proper printer from the field s list In the case that a COM port is entered in the first field the second field becomes the Port button See the following section for more information Note The Communication Port Setup screen requires that the settings match the configuration of the printer or modem If you wish to print orders to a device that has already been set up within Windows select that device from the list The Prompt option can also be selected if you wish to allow the user to select the device at each print command Enter a Selective Address This field specifies the selective address code to use when printing an order through a multi drop phone line where more than one output device exists If necessary set the appropriate type of Document Format Mark the Auto Dial Flag if COMMANDcomm will use the information in the Modem Phone Number and Modem Code fields to send data to a remote printer Accept the screen Communications Port Setup The Communications Port Setup screen allows you to define information about the port To set up communications information for the port 1 Go to the Communications tab on the Plants screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants gt Communication 8 9 05 163 10 Configure each of the Device Types as necessary using the Device Type Setup button Click the lower Setup button located in the Allow Report Printing section
140. PRDJ_NA ME Sting40 E YGOC 5 CUST_FREG_CODE String 1 L YGTA 6 PROJ_FREG_CODE String 2 LJ vate z CUST COMES Number2 C Yms 8 PROJ_COPIES Number2 L YITR L YJSC L YOPJ L YOPL AN YOPR L YOR M yPau KR YPRJ SE C Retrieve Occurrence s z Do f of 1 2 If you have purchased the Credit Check module and would like to verify the credit limits for customers with this credit code mark the Verify Credit Limits checkbox The product line field coordinates with the following Do not exceed and Require Project checkboxes The field defaults to Concrete set the product line as necessary then proceed to the following checkboxes Check the Do not exceed ordered quantity in ticketing checkbox to ensure the delivered quantity of product does not exceed the ordered ticketed quantity of product Check the Require Project for all Orders checkbox if necessary 8 9 05 119 6 To modify other product lines change the product line field to the appropriate product and repeat steps 4 and 5 above 7 Accept the screen to save this credit code and its related information Terms Codes Terms codes dictate when invoices are due and the payment discount if any which can be given if payment is made by the discount date Terms codes are assigned at the customer and project level When orders and tickets for the customer or project are invoiced the appropriate terms code is assigned to the invoice and the due date d
141. Parameters Security Control COMMANDseres Security x COMMANDseries Security Window Securit The two options are e COMMANDseries Security default e Windows Security Once this screen is accepted all people who subsequently launch COMMANDseries will be subject to the selected security system COMMANDseries User Accounts If a system is being installed with Windows security the first person to launch COMMANDseries will be prompted for a username If the entered username matches the Windows username the person will be allowed to log on to COMMANDseries with sufficient privileges to add additional users Citrix Environments In order to use Windows security in a Citrix environment users must be configured so that their Windows Citrix and COMMANDseries usernames are identical Other Considerations The new form User Security Management is subject to standard COMMANDSseries security Access to this form should be strictly controlled Users should be reminded of standard Windows security functions including locking the workstation Enabling Windows Security disables the Password field in both the User editor and the User Preferences editor If Windows security is enabled all password management from password length to aging is handled through Windows not COMMANDseries This new feature is not supported in Windows 98SE Assigning a User and Password Before entering this data you need to gather inf
142. Press the Add Occurrence button to enter another plant or accept the screen to save the project or proceed to the Products tab nas Entering Project Products Information The Products tab allows you to set up mix and aggregate products for the project To define project products 1 From the Projects screen select the Products tab Quotes gt Quotes gt Projects gt New Detail gt Products or Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Projects gt Products 8 9 05 287 Select a Plant from the field s list This field is used to determine the products to be displayed in the screen areas below If All plants are indicated then all products regardless of their plant assignment are displayed If a specific plant is entered then only those products assigned to that specific plant are displayed There are three different product entry screens in the Project editor each with specific functions The three screens are Ready Mix Products Summary Ready Mix Products Aggregate Products To use the Ready Mix Product entry screen 1 Select Ready Mix Products in the unlabeled product entry format field The Ready Mix Products screen displays Projects Products Tab EDTPROJM mix Main Addresses Pricing Accounting Invoicing Distribution User Fields Distances Products Forecast Plant all X j Ready Mix Products x j Mix Products Product Plant Description Category Price sl 25466
143. Price Categories EDTPREP Edit Orders amp Tickets EDTPREP1 Order Haul Information EDTPREP2 Order Pricing Information EDTPREP3 Other Order Information EDTPREP4 Other Order Line Information EDTPREP5 Order Line Associated Products EDTPREP7 Edit Ticket Information EDTPREP8 Edit Aggregate Ticket Information EDTPREPA Product Descriptions EDTPREPB Reason Code EDTPREPC Edit Ticket Times EDTPREPD Other Associated Product Information EDTPREPE Ticket Extra Products EDTPREPF Ticket Time Information EDTPREPG Other Ticket Information EDTPREPH Ticket Associated Products EDTPREPI Possible Products N A EDTPREPJ Ticket Charges EDTPREPK Order Sales Tax Information N A EDTPREPL Remove Order Ticket Remove N A EDTPREPN Other Lookups N A EDTPREPO Suspend Product Form Name Screen Name Configuration EDTPREPP Ticket Status EDTPREPQ Order Line Cartage Charge Info EDTPREPR Product Cartage Charges N A EDTPREPS Order Haul Charges N A EDTPREPT UOM Quantity Extensions EDTPREPU Order Credit Debit Memo Information EDTPREPV Order Line Credit Debit Information EDTPREPZ Edit Suspended Tickets N A EDTPRIJX Edit Project Expiration Information N A EDTPROJ Projects EDTPROJ1 Product Pricing Information EDTPROJ2 Product Ready Mix Information EDTPROJ3 Associated Produc
144. Pricing configuration button allows the privileged user access to fields in the configuration file that deal with the COMMANDreceivables application These fields provide a means of customizing COMMANDreceivables without requiring changes to the program To enter customer pricing defaults 1 From the Customers Defaults section at the bottom of the Defaults tab select the Pricing button Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Defaults gt Sales Customer Pricing Defaults EDTCNFX5 D Customer Pricing Defaults Ea JAggreaate Copy to All Charges Price Category 4 Light Ct s Pricing Plant Code lf CENTER TypePrice FOBPice f Trade Discount Percent iz Trade Discount Amount 000 cuyds Terms Code v 1 Net 3 Zone Code O Cartage Charge Rate Table sl Apply Zone Charges I Restrict Orders to Customer Products Print Prices on Ticket Apply Minimum Haul Charges T Allow Price Change in DE x V Allow Automatic Price Adjustments Note This graphic combines elements from concrete and aggregate pricing screens 2 From the Product Type field s list select Concrete or Aggregate 3 Select a Price Category This field provides the default value for the Price Category field on the Customers screen when adding a new customer Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers 4 Select a Pricing Plant Code This field provides the default value for the Sales Analysis Code field on
145. RDR Orders JAdd x M Price Suppress Cost Suppress Fields d H Press right mouse button over Form field to display a menu of choices 2 Inthe Form fields enter the screen names for which the user must have privileges from the pull down menus Or Right click over the field to display the menu for each licensed COMMANDseries application You can select the specific screen from this series of menus Note If using multiple applications within COMMANDseries you can grant a user privileges for an entire application and switch to another application from the User Privileges screen by selecting the application name from the Alternate Menu s options A prompt will ask you which activity you wish to perform Caution The form RPTWRIT must be included in the forms selected for privileges when individual editors are selected if the user is to have privileges to listings for that editor When All or is selected the form does not have to be individually specified since it is included in the All selection 46 Enter a Privilege from the drop down list The options are as follows Add the user is allowed to add delete change and inquire This option provides full control over a field Chg change the user is allowed to change and list existing records but cannot delete existing records or create new ones Ing inquire the user is allowed to inquire but NOT add delete or change This option is the equivalent of
146. Seasonal Charge Table Seasonal charges will be applied to customer s orders based on the settings in the specified charge table If necessary select an Unloading Charge Table Unloading charges will be applied to customer s orders based on the settings in the specified charge table Checkboxes next to each of the previous three charges give you the option to flag a charge to be billed on a Separate Invoice An invoice prep routine Create Orders for Separate Invoices creates new orders and transfers the charges to them If necessary select a Sundry Charge To modify the charge amount press the button If additional sundry charges are needed select the Add Occurrence button to the immediate right of the Sundry Charge field If necessary select a Preferred Hauler Aggregate only If necessary select a Cartage Pay Table if the product line for this item is aggregate This code specifies the cartage fees that will be paid to the hauler The Apply Minimum Haul Pay checkbox to the right denotes if checked that the project order will be subject to at least the minimum charge specified in the cartage table 8 9 05 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 If necessary select a Charge Cartage Table Aggregate only This code specifies the cartage fees that will charged to the customer The Apply Minimum Haul Charges checkbox to the right denotes if checked that the project order w
147. Select a haul charge Item Code This code will appear on the customer invoice it is used to define the taxability of the cartage rate table and for determining where to book GL entries The Item Code must be set up prior to setting up the Cartage Rate Table Select a Minimum Charge Option This field gives you a number of options to establish a minimum haul charge regardless of load size or clock time The options are No Minimum Charge Minimum Charge Amount Truck s Minimum Load Size times Charge Rate Truck s Schedule Load Size times Charge Rate Select a Minimum Pay Option This field gives you a number of options to establish a minimum payment regardless of load size or clock time The options are 8 9 05 241 12 13 14 15 16 No Minimum Charge Minimum Pay Amount Truck s Minimum Load Size times Pay Rate Truck s Schedule Load Size times Pay Rate If either of the two previous fields is set to a minimum amount the Minimum Charge Pay field displays This value will be used to calculate minimum charges and payments based on the above two settings If either of the minimum charge pay option fields is set to Minimum Quantity the Minimum Quanitity and Maximum Quantity fields display The Minimum Quantity indicates the smallest cartage chage that will be calculated If desired you can also enter a Maximum Quantity to set a cap on cartage changes for the table Enter an amount in the Additional Per Load Amo
148. The field information will only print if the attribute exists 10 Change the values in the Begin At and End At fields if necessary The values for these fields default from the Begin At and End At fields of the Document Formats screen 11 Enter the field s Mask or Literal Text A mask string may need to be entered here if the option selected in the Name field involves dates literal text should be entered if the field type selected was Literal 8 9 05 93 Note Use the Zoom button if the entire text does not display 12 Mark the Left Justify Value on Display checkbox if you want the value of the field to be left justified when printing key fields to a table i e customer codes project codes and product codes 13 Accept the Document Format Field Document Fields and Document Formats screens Mask Characters The mask characters that can be used in document formats are as follows Mask Characte r N 9 Din Z and t p Field Type Numeric Numeric Numeric Numeric Numeric Numeric Numeric Numeric Meaning Use Represents a numeric value Decimal places are zero filled insignificant places are space filled Represents a numeric value All zeros are suppressed Represents a numeric value Non significant places are zero filled Represents a number value Non significant places are asterisk filled This would be used for example when printing an amount on a check and fil
149. These flags control automatic time logging For example if In Service is a task that is flagged as Clock time then any time an Out of Service truck has its task changed to In Service the system will check its clock status If the truck is not currently clocked in the system will automatically clock it in 8 Classify the task with regard to Driver Times The concept here is the same as with Truck Times however there is an additional field DOT Driver time associated with tasks flagged as DOT will be tallied and monitored independently of Clock time And given task can be classified as both Clock and DOT time Clock Time is used to calculate both daily and weekly overtime DOT Time is used to calculate rolling overtime Note The Productive Time flag is currently not used by COMMANDseries functionality using these flags will be implemented in future releases 9 Double click in the Condition field to associate an existing Condition with this task Assigning a condition to a task allows you to monitor that task on the Tracking amp Scheduling screen Note You cannot edit the Conditions associated to the default tasks 10 Accept the screen to save the new task Condition Codes Condition Codes are used to display certain truck and or driver conditions on the graphic Tracking amp Scheduling screen Doing so provides dispatchers with a much more accurate picture of overall fleet status Condition codes can also be associated with Ta
150. This value is the length the stop light will flash a given signal 5 Accept the screen Pre Ticketing Setup You must follow a specific set of steps to set up pre ticketing regardless of whether you initiate pre ticketing through COMMANDseries or via a truck s VSC To set up pre ticketing 1 Load the Task Codes Files gt Plant and Delivery Information gt Task Codes 2 Accept the form Failure to accept the form will result in the data not being saved 3 Load the Condition Codes Files gt Plant and Delivery Information gt Task Codes 4 Confirm that the deadhead condition color and flag match the customer preference If necessary set the color and flag fields appropriately 5 Accept the form Failure to accept the form will result in the data not being saved 6 Set up a Driver Overtime Code Files gt General Information gt Driver Overtime Note For more information refer to Driver Overtime Tables on page 196 7 Add the Driver Overtime Code to the employee code record for each driver as appropriate Files gt General Information gt Employees Scale Types COMMANDseries can handle any scale interface by allowing the user to configure it using the Scale Types screen In many cases you will need to consult with the installer manufactuerer of the scale to get some of the appropriate settings or to configure the scale itself Individual scales are specified in the Plant editor To set u
151. Topics in this section COMMANDseries Licensing User Configuration Non COD Price Change Printer Setup Generic Printer Setup Print Models Currency Code Lengths Companies Employees Reason Codes Modem Codes Signaling Units Auto Ticketing Interface Auto Ticketing Units Pre Ticketing Setup Scale Types Next Numbers Document Tags Document Formats Document Format Groups Document Formatting Message Text 34 COMMANDseries Licensing COMMANDseries Licensing is accomplished through two methods e A COMMANDseries license controls what specific modules are active e A COMMANDnetwork license controls how many users may be connected to COMMANDnetwork at any given time When your software is initially installed your license will already be entered in the system If additional modules are purchased later you will be issued a new license Installing a new license is a three step process 1 Make a backup of your existing license 2 Delete the existing license 3 Enter the new license Topics in this section Making a Backup of the Existing License Entering a New License Temporary Licenses Restoring an Old License Making a Backup of the Existing License Backing up the existing license provides you with some additional security In the event that there is something wrong with your new license you can always restore the old license and keep your business up and running To back up an existing license 1 Open
152. Type field established the default pricing for all subsequently entered products If the default price type is changed it will have no effect on existing products To change a product s Price Type 1 Press the detail button sl on the product line The Project Product Pricing Information screen displays EDTPROJ1 detail W Project Product Pricing Information 28 1 1 2 Gravel Estimated Quantity 25000 Default Load Quantity Price 212 mm Fix Cartage Delivered M Price Extension Perunt f Effective BI Previous Price Ir pm Price Extension x Print on Separate Invoice 2 Change the Price Type as needed 3 If other information on the screen has changes change it as well 4 Accept the screen Entering Project Forecasting Information The Forecast tab allows you to predict not only how much of a product a customer will be ordering during the life of a project but also how those deliveries will be spread out over time Once project forecasting information has been entered the Sales Forecast Display will provide projection forecast information for quantities and gross revenues Note Project Begin and Project Expiration dates must be entered accurately on the Projects Main tab for forecasting to function properly To enter project forecasting information 1 From the Projects screen select the Forecast tab Quotes gt Quotes gt Projects gt New Detail gt Forecast or Files gt Custome
153. Up the System 24 Smart Lookup 32 Starting COMMANDseries 25 Using the Tab Key 29 COMMANDseries Licensing 35 Companies 62 Company Setup 63 Cost Centers Setup 64 Finance Charges Setup 64 Condition Codes 194 Configuration 127 Aggregate Configuration 143 Customer Accounting Defaults 136 Customer Charges Defaults 135 Customer Distribution Defaults 137 Customer Invoicing Defaults 137 Customer Pricing Defaults 134 Customer Sales Defaults 133 Customer Taxing Defaults 133 Defaults Configuration 131 Defaults Configuration Setup 131 Dispatch Configuration 142 Distribution Configuration 138 Financials Configuration 153 Initial Configuration 128 Inventory Configuration 148 Invoicing Configuration 147 Lien Configuration 155 Quotes Configuration 154 Receivables Aging Configuration 151 Receivables Configuration 149 Receivables Statements 152 Signaling Configuration 146 User Fields 155 156 Contacts 321 Cost Centers 301 Credit Codes 117 Currency 60 Customers 259 Accounting Setup 266 Address Information 260 Charge Setup 264 Distribution Setup 270 Invoicing Setup 268 Main Tab Setup 259 Pricing Setup 262 Products Setup 271 Sales Information 261 Taxing Setup 262 374 User Fields Setup 270 Customers and Projects 258 D Deadhead Setup 192 Delivery Methods 181 Document Format Groups 95 Document Format Group Setup 96 File Import Export Format Codes Setup 103 Invoice Format Codes Setup 97 Invoice Out Format Codes Setup 102 Project Quote
154. Water Meter Bin 4 Enter a Description of the bin 5 Enter a Short description of the bin 6 Press the Add Occurrence button to enter another bin if necessary Constituent Order Setup By default COMMANDseries will batch constituents in the order in which they appear in the mix design If constituents must be added in a specific order for the plant enter that order on this tab and the settings will override the order in the Item record To set up plant constituent order information 1 Click on the Constituent Order tab Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants gt Constituent Order Plants Constituent Order Tab EDTPLNT8 Main Communication Batching Scheduling Costs Plants Scales Bins Constituent Order User Fields ltem Code Bin sano2 Ej s e JROCK 3 Moo e gt CEMENTA dad 2 Enter one or more constituent Product Codes for the plant in order of how they should be sent to the batch plant Note The up and down arrows allow you to change the order of the products 3 Enter the Bin number that is required for COMMANDseries to store and include for each constituent sent in the adjusted mix ticket 8 9 05 171 Plant User Fields If your system has been configured for plant specific user fields you may edit those fields on the User Field tab For information about user fields see the system Configuration section Haulers The Haulers screen allows access to
155. XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXx XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Yc Yr Yc Yc Yc Ye Yc Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye Yr Ye Yc Ye Ye Yc Yr Ye Ye Yc Yr Yc Yc Ye Yc Yr Ye Ye Yc Yr Ye Ye Yr Ye Yc Ye Ye Ye Yc Ye Yc Ye Ye Yc Yr Yc Yc Ye Ye Yc Yc Ye Ye Yr Ye Ye Yc Ye Yc Yc Ye Yc Yr Ye Ye Yr Ye Ye Ye Ye Ye e ye al d 2 Place the cursor over a field you wish to move Note From the Display screen you can toggle between Tag display and Masks display Click the mouse s right button and select Display Tags Masks to toggle modes 3 Click and hold the left mouse button while dragging the field to the desired location Note The form s title bar displays the name of the form as well as the coordinates of the last field clicked by the mouse The coordinates are displayed in rows to columns format rows columns 4 Double click on a field to define its formatting characteristics 5 When finished with adjustments exit from the Display screen Adjusting Formats Using the Document Fields Screen A complete listing of all fields and their characteristics is available on the Document Fields screen This screen can be used to adjust the field s attributes in greater detail than the Display function 8 9 05 EN To adjust document formats using the Document Format Fields sc
156. a new source code 1 Open the Source Codes screen Files gt GL Information gt Source Codes 2 Enter a Source Code to identify the G L transaction source This code is used to access source code information in other programs It is also used to sort various reports that contain source code information The source code is alphanumeric To insure that proper sorting takes place in lookup windows and reports always follow the guidelines described below Make ALL source code either all numbers all letters or all numbers and letters don t make some codes all numbers and other codes all letters etc If your codes contain any letters make all codes the same length that is put the same number of characters in each code Source Codes EDTSRCD W Source Codes fal Source Code Description Short ER COMMANDreceivables ER IV Force Balance Maintain Quantity d E JGL General Ledger G L MV Force Balance Maintain Quantity d IN Inventory IN Z ForceBalance Maintain Quantity d JQT Quantities JaTy Force Balance M Maintain Quantity d JPR Payroll Pn Force Balance D Maintain Quantity d PU Purchasing IA M Force Balance P Maintain Quantity d JAP Accounts Payable aP Z Force Balance Maintain Quantity d JAR Accounts Receivable JAR Z Force Balance Maintain Quantity az 3 Enter a Description of the accounting area that the source code represents such as Accounts Payable or Payroll Where space permits it
157. ab EDTCTSG Cartage Surcharge Codes EDTCTSG1 Automatic Surcharges By Product N A EDTCTTK Cartage Ticket Edit N A EDTCTTK1 Cartage Surcharges N A EDTCTTY Contact Type Codes EDTCUHS Customer History N A EDTCURR Currency EDTCUST Customers EDTCUST1 Product Pricing Information EDTCUST2 Product Ready Mix Information EDTCUST3 Associated Products Information EDTCUST4 Product Description Information EDTCUST5 Sundry Charge Pricing EDTCUST6 UOM Quantity Extensions 342 Form Name Screen Name Configuration EDTCUSTA Main Tab EDTCUSTB Addresses Tab EDTCUSTC Sales Tab EDTCUSTD Taxing Tab EDTCUSTE Pricing Tab EDTCUSTF Charges Tab EDTCUSTG Accounting Tab EDTCUSTH Invoicing Tab EDTCUSTI Distribution Tab EDTCUSTK Ready Mix Tab EDTCUSTL Ready Mix Tab EDTCUSTM Aggregate Tab EDTDLMT Delivery Methods EDTDOCG Document Format Groups EDTDOCG1 Invoice Format Codes EDTDOCG2 Statement Format Codes EDTDOCG3 Project Quote Format Codes EDTDOCG4 Receipt Format Codes EDTDOCGS5 ___ Invoice Out Format Codes EDTDOCG6 Ticket Overflow Format Codes EDTDOCS Document Formats EDTDOCS1 Document Format Fields EDTDOCS2 Document Fields EDTDOCT Document Tags N A EDTDOCT1 Document Field Tag Setup N A EDTDOCT2 Document Lookup Tag Setup N A EDTDOCT3
158. ab from the Configuration screen Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Dispatch Configuration Dispatch Tab EDTCNFXE A Truck Tracking Orders to Load Lead Time 3999 al Truck Tracking Messages Allowed Messages and statuses z Truck Tracking Drders to Load Lead Time J 480 New Assignment Frequency Plant Changed X New Assignment Timing fat Plant z Allow P O Change on Ticket Default Pricing Plant from Scheduled Plant Show Delivery Methods in Orders Tickets Yes Y j Show Map Page in Orders Tickets Yes z Show Zone Code in Orders Tickets Yes M j Default Schedule Load Size From Schedule el 2 3 Select Concrete or Aggregate from the Product Line field s list Mark the Copy To All checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox copies the configuration settings that are specific to this product line to all other product lines From the Truck Tracking First Status field s list select Printed or Load This option identifies the status that causes a ticket to be displayed on the Truck Tracking screen Note If tickets are typed well in advance of being loaded on a truck pre ticketed use Load as the first truck tracking status Note This field displays only if Concrete is the specified product line In the Truck Tracking Orders To Load Lead Time field specify the number of minutes prior to an order s scheduled start time the order will appear on the display on the Truck Tracki
159. able to be included with the customer s orders 8 9 05 263 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Note This field is only available when concrete is the selected product line Mark the Print Prices on Tickets checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox causes prices to be printed on all delivery tickets for the customer Prices for C O D or cash delivery tickets are always printed Prices for charge delivery tickets are only printed when this checkbox is selected This field is also used to determine access to non COD prices during Order Entry See Non COD Price Changes for additional information Mark the Allow Price Change in O E checkbox if necessary This field is used to determine access to non COD prices during Order Entry See Non COD Price Changes for additional information Mark the Restrict Orders to Customer Products checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox causes the Orders screen for non project based orders to allow only those products that are entered as customer specific products Products cannot be added to the order from the product file Mark the Apply Minimum Haul Charges checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox causes the minimum haul charge to be applied to this customer if the calculated haul charge is less than the calculated minimum haul charge A charge table is assigned to each aggregate order each charge table has an associated minimum haul charge Note This
160. accept the form For detailed instructions on this step refer to the Condition Codes section of this document 3 Set up a Driver Overtime Code Files gt General Information gt Driver Overtime You must provide the Description and Short Description but the Calculate section is optional For detailed instructions on this step see the Driver Overtime Tables section of this document 4 Add the Driver Overtime Code to the employee code record for each driver Files gt General Information gt Employees Task Codes COMMANDSseries uses Task Codes to more accurately track driver times Tasks not only give you a clearer idea of what the driver is doing in addition because you have a better idea of a driver s work at any given time it is easier to avoid having to pay driver overtime A default set of task codes is provided on system install These initial settings cannot be deleted however they can be modified and additional tasks can be added as needed As you become more proficient with the system it may be advantageous to modify the task configuration To set up a new task code 1 Open the Task Codes screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Task Codes Task Codes EDTETSK Task Codes Bisi x Code Description Short Task Type Truck Times Driver Times Condition JBDOWN Breakdown JBDOWN ZC Clock Prod KR Clock M Prod T DOT lt J
161. age transaction Files gt Cartage Information gt Cartage Surcharge Codes Credit Codes To establish the credit codes that are assigned to customers and projects and dictate what action takes place for orders and tickets regarding the credit status of the customer or project Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Credit Codes Terms Codes To set up the terms codes to be assigned to customers and projects that identify the payment terms for an invoice i e due dates and discount amounts Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Terms Codes Accounting Categories To establish the groups to which customers and projects can be assigned and allow unique invoice formats and numbering unique G L booking codes and special sort options on some reports Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Accounting Categories Sales Analysis Codes To set up sales analysis codes that are assigned to customers and allow sorting and totaling options on sales analysis reports Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Sales Analysis Codes Source Codes To set up source codes that are assigned to G L transactions to identify the application in which they were created Files gt G L Information gt Source Codes 18 System Information aa PO lt 7 AD gt lt m 0 ar Purpose Configurat
162. aka 304 User PFeferencgesS J u u u I aus sssssSasssaaaswawswanansamasasawaasasnaaasaaa 306 Functionality Preferences siivessiedandsiawevessaeswssawbeialeadsideaniacensaieasyaananasaeenss 306 General Preferences Setup ou Ceuta geg EeueN SEN td NENNEN Ed 306 User Preferences EE 308 Sound Prererences S tUD ulus viniani iani E aqa a sak ARENS 309 Color Preferences Setup eegene nedd eege 310 Tracking Preferences Setup gear EE Eege 311 Font Preferences Setup WEE 312 Keys Preferences ab ke ve deht EAR RE d EE Seege d SEKR 313 Toolbar Preferences Setup e veNEN NEEN EN KEN KREKENKEEE ENEE ENNEN KANN CES K NEEN 314 COMMANDEXGECULIVE iicciccnsdstsscinsssnsmsadensiassnansmncnmmennadaneenmaeaneniinnedmn 316 Sales Data E e EE 316 Sales Data Configuration tele Eege 317 COMMANDquote Setup uQsuusss usss sssuswssuwanawawamawaswakaaaamamasaaa 320 leie KEE EE 320 IGE SOURCE CodeS ve dee 320 KEREN eege 321 Setting Up Quote PRINCINO cigeecdeentaiceeviaienacemeuniie aE a E Ea a 323 Setup Telegram EES Eeer 325 Appendix A Quick Reference Guide 329 Appendix B Field Level Security a s 338 Field Level Security Worksheet 338 879 05 9 Processing FOrms DBA Atten ES ea BEA 338 Edit Forms EDT EE 339 Find or Lookup Forms FND ise Age inii aa Een 351 Selection Forms SEL MEN 352
163. al characters listed above Hard coded characters can also be used within the format definition For example a scale may send over G in position 11 In the Sign Characters section enter the characters that represent Positive and Negative weights In the Motion Characters section enter the characters to be used in the scale reading when the scale is in Motion and when it is Still Note The scale s configuration determines what is considered an in motion weight Consult the manufactuere installer for details In the U O M Characters section enter the character s that should be placed in COMMANDaggregate s scale reading to represent the unit of measure in the Received field 10 In the second field use the pull down menu to select a unit of measure to decipher the first Received field 11 On the Special Characters field the Bit field will display the bit that is used by some scales in lieu of the sign motion and UOM characters It is a single character byte that represents settings for one or more of the fields 12 Accept the Scale Types screen Next Numbers The Next Numbers screen allows you to control the sequential numbering of specific records genereated by COMMANDseries Use the next numbers entries to generate numbering sequences for order codes ticket codes invoice codes receipts codes quote codes etc Order and ticket next numbers are determined by the sequence code assigned to a plant record F
164. ame number as a Replication Target Number for any 879 05 161 11 12 13 14 15 other replicating plant to serve as the Replication Target Number This number represents the manager number that COMMANDreplicator uses to communicate Select Next Number Sequences for the Order Code Ticket Code and Invoice Code Next number sequences are set up on the Next Numbers screen Files gt General Information gt Next Numbers Mark the Tracking checkbox if the trucks based at this plant are tracked on the Tracking and Scheduling screen Mark the Scheduling checkbox if the trucks based at this plant are available on the Tracking and Scheduling screen If you would like to change the default Tracking or Order Truck Color for this plant select a new color Accept the screen to save the main plant information Plant Communication Setup The Communications tab allows the privileged user access to communications information for the plant This includes information specific to the remote printing and distribution of tickets including those sent via the COMMANDcomm interface To set up plant communication information 1 From the Plants screen select the Communication tab to go to the Plant Communication Information screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants gt Communication Plants Communication Tab EDTPLNT2 Main Communication Batching Scheduling Costs Plants Scales Bins
165. and Con Order Code zh Weighmaster x fho Zacharie Ticket Code xn Invoice Code xn Tax Code sl i Birmingham Map Page linn PD Tracking Zone Code gt 3001 Bimingham Je Scheduling Inventory Location gt i Birmingham Plant Tracking Truck Color gt AM Ice Replication Target Manager Tracking Order Color EBD Signaling Unit x 10 Enter an Address on the three lines provided Enter a Phone Number for the plant Select the Company that owns the plant Companies are defined on the Companies screen in the General Information section Files gt General Information gt Companies Select the primary Weighmaster for this plant Weighmasters are defined on the Employees screen Files gt General Information gt Employees Select the Tax Code that applies to the plant s location Tax codes are defined on the Tax Code screen in the Sales Tax Information section Files gt Sales Tax Information gt Tax Code Select the Map Page on which the plant is located The system uses this information to estimate deadhead travel time between plants Select the Zone Code that indicates where the plant is located Zones codes are maintained on the Zones screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Zones Select an Inventory Location Inventory locations are defined on the Locations screen Files gt Item Information gt Locations If you are using database replication enter any unique number that is do not use the s
166. and allow for 100 orders for that plant Tickets 12000000 Continues to increment and would support 1 million ticket numbers for that plant Invoices 120000 Continues to increment and would support 9 999 invoice numbers for that plant Note Quote sequences are not set up by plant 8 9 05 To add or create a next number setting 1 Goto the Next Numbers screen Files gt General Information gt Next Numbers Next Numbers EDTNEXT m Next Numbers Le CI x Order Sequence Short Begin At n JOrders ORDERS fi d Ticket Sequence Short Begin At Next End At 2 Plant 2 E f200000 f200000 233999 M Perpetual d 3 Plant 3 E 200000 300000 1399999 MV Perpetual d SS Invoice DM amp CM Receipts Sequence Short Begin At fi Invoices JINVOICE 1000000 d a 3 Credit or Debit Memo JCM 88000000 d Quote Sequence Short Begin At Next 1 Quotes JauoTes fi B d Project Sequence Short Begin At Next fi fi fi fi fi A F Batch No Begin At 1 2 Enter a Code to identify this numeric sequence for orders tickets invoices or quotes This is the first field on the row if the sequence if plant specific use the plant code 3 Enter a Description for the sequence in the field next to the Code Enter a short description in the Short field 5 The entry in the Begin At field depends on the sequence type For the Order Sequence enter a number for the first order of each day
167. and top feed For Symbol Sets Code Page select BRASCII This setting allows the proper interpretation and printing of international characters 8 9 05 59 Note If the printer is in Epson FX emulation mode you must also select Set II in Symbol Sets Character Set to properly print international characters if in ML emulation mode select Standard HP printers require no special setup procedures for the printing of these characters 6 Press the Print button on the printer to print the specifications you have defined Adjust these specifications as necessary 7 In COMMANDseries go to the Plant Communication Setup screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants gt Communication gt Setup 8 In the second Port Name field enter the name of the new printer Note Leave the first field blank 9 Accept the Plant Communication Setup screen 10 Go to the Data Maintenance screen Manage gt Data Management gt Data Maintenance 11 In the File field enter PLNT and press the lt Tab gt button on your keyboard 12 Scroll down until you see the TKTING_PORT_SETUP Ticketing Port Setup field The contents of this field should be the name of the new printer with preceding it For example if the name of your new printer was print1 then the contents of this field would be print1 13 Enter and then ticket a test order Send the ticket to the printer 14 Review the printed ticket and confirm that pitch is set
168. anges for the table Note To establish a pure per mile rate set both the Minimum and Maximum Quantity to 1 12 Enter an amount in the Additional Per Load Amount if an additional charge applies 13 Select the Range tab to develop a rate table based on quantity or distance Quantity Distance based Cartage EDTCTRT2 Main Range From thru Rate Eff Date Prey Base Rate Base J of 5 1 50 Rate Type Distance Base Rate D Min Quantity Max Quantity Range Range 10m 20m 115 H H 30 Sum Range Rate to Base Rate 14 Enter your Base rate information 15 Select a Rate Type from the drop down menu 16 Select the Sum Range Rate to Base Rate checkbox if necessary If this checkbox is checked the cartage rate will be the sum of all applicable ranges Minimum and maximum quantities can be specified for each distance band 17 Accept this screen to save the cartage rate and related information SS 245 Plan Zone Cartage Rates Cartage can be paid based on the location of the plant the truck type or delivery zone Occasionally zones may overlap it is critical that the zone and plant match Do not use a zone code not associated with the plant in question Charges will not be calculated correctly Plant zone cartage rates are determined by 1 the destination zone 2 the shipping plant and 3 the truck type Values for these three factors are set up on the Zones tab The rate is then multiplied by the q
169. anies function Files gt General Information gt Companies Establishment of beginning balances for new accounting years accounts belonging to an account type with a Balance Sheet account class have beginning balances established equal to the ending balance of the accounting year being closed accounts belonging to an account type with a Profit amp Loss account class have a zero 0 beginning balance established Handling of statistical data separate from financial data accounts belonging to an account type with a Statistical account class are separated from the other accounts that are financial in nature This separation is evident on various reports as well as in the Journal Transactions function 7 The most common set of account types and their account class assignments are Account Type Account Class Assets Balance Sheet Liabilities amp Equity Balance Sheet Sales amp Revenue Profit amp Loss Costs amp Expenses Profit amp Loss Quantities Statistical Data 8 9 05 299 To add another account type select the Add Occurrence button at the end of the last line When you are finished entering account types accept the screen to save the information Source Codes The Source Codes form allows you to set up source codes that identify the accounting area or sub ledger from which G L transactions originated The source code is printed on the detail Trial Balance Report for each transaction To set up
170. ant amp Delivery Information gt Plants gt Scales Plants Scales Tab EDTPLNT6 2 Enter a Scale Number to identify the scale you are defining 8 9 05 3 Enter a Description and a Short description for the scale 4 Select a Scale Type or detail on the field to select from a list of available scale types 5 Select a Weighmaster A complete list of possible weighmasters is available through this field s detail button 6 Enter a Port Name This name represents the logical port that COMMANDcomm uses when producing plant or dispatch copies of the ticket order or report 7 Enter a Selective Address for the specific plant output device to use when sending a ticket order or report through a multi drop phone line 8 Enter the Scale Manufacturer Model and Serial Number 9 Enter the scale s Weight Division and Capacity according the scale s specifications 10 Mark the Manual Weight checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox allows the weighmaster to enter weights manually 11 Click the Communication button to go to the Scale Communication Information screen Scale Communication Information EDTPLNTC m Scale Communication Information 1 First Scale Primary Ticketing Device Device Type Printer B Setup Secondary Ticketing Device Device Type ER Disk Output x Setup Temporary Ticketing Device Device Type ER Disk Output E Setup 12 Select a Device Type
171. any Finance Charges Setup Company Setup Before entering company information gather information about the setup for your business entities and group plants for reporting purposes Review the settings on the Realign Accounts and Cost Centers screen Manage gt Application Management gt Realign Accounts amp Cost Centers to verify the length of Company Codes Cost Center codes and Account codes If any changes are needed make them at this time it is a lot easier to change these values before account information gets entered To set up your company or companies 1 Se SE Go to the Companies screen Files gt General Information gt Companies Companies EDTCOMP1 m Companies 1 x Company Code 01 Name Command Concrete Short Concrete Address Line 1 E 800 International Park Drive Remit to Line 1 1800 International Park Dive Phone Number 205 879 3282 Current Accounting Year 2000 Save Balances Years 5 Save Detail Years 1 Tax ID n Cost Centers Finance Charges Cost Center Account Net Profit Joico sl ell Retained Earnings gt jo oo gt 21 24 gt Enter a numeric Company Code to identify the company and press lt Tab gt Specify a Name and a Short name to describe the company Enter the company s mailing address in the Address Line 1 field Enter the location of the company s remittance office in the Remit to Line 1 field Enter the Phone Number for the compan
172. ap Vejd ynNejap Vejd ejd 0 WSIADI SJUejd HSIAB4 Slue d 0 1ISIA 41 Ss1ue d 0 1ISIA 4 SJUeld 0 1ISIA 1 SJULjd S A 4 SJUeld 8 s uoz s uoz s uoz s uoz s uoz s uoz s8T spoyjew 1uBI 1jJ 9EZ sJOPUd VEC s Bieuo s Buieuo puns Aipuns TEZ saBueyo soBieyo soaBueyo sabseyo Buipeol un Buipeol un Buipeolun Buipeolun 67Z saBueyo saBueyo s Jey jeuoseas jeuoseas Sabseyo jeuoseas Ieuose s gzz s Jey saBueyo saBueyo sabseyo peo WNWIUlW peo WNWIUIW peo uinuulull peo uuinuuluil Z ZZ Suu 1 Suu 1 Suu 1 Suu 1 Suu 1I swa 60Z saluoba eo S l1OB 1e2 uu nI sauobajyeo wel souobea ed Wait seuobe ed Lal sauobejeo wel wa I SOZ sapoo Besn sapoo Besn s po Besn s po esn s po obesp sapoo esn looz s l1059 72 S 1 1059789 Jldd S 14069 789 Jlld souobe ed ad SauOobaigp Jldd SaUODaIp73 d 29d 66T LO Jan LO Jan LO Jan LO Jaaup yon4 pue 1tue d nun pue 1ue d yon4 que d ann que d Tan que d yon4 que d Joj sli neJ p dn 104 synejap dn 104 sy neJj p 104 s Nejap 104 s3y nejJ p 104 sa nej p dn JOS o1 1ISIA 1 3 S 0 1ISIA 1 dn 3 s 0 1ISIA 1 dn S o1 3ISIA 41 dn S 0 3ISIA 41 S 0 PSIA 1 s olduug s olduug s olduug s olduug s olduug s o duig S9 sobed dew sobed dew sobed dew sobed dew sobed dew 8T spolsed spolsed spolsed spon d spoiled alia abed dew uun sbed dew wu1 abed dew alu abed dew au Hed dew
173. arge Amount Truck s Minimum Load Size times Charge Rate Truck s Schedule Load Size times Charge Rate 10 Select a Minimum Pay Option This field gives you a number of options to establish a minimum payment regardless of load size or clock time The options are No Minimum Charge Minimum Pay Amount Truck s Minimum Load Size times Pay Rate Truck s Schedule Load Size times Pay Rate 11 If either of the two previous fields is set to a minimum amount the Minimum Charge Pay field displays This value will be used to calculate minimum charges and payments based on the above two settings 12 If either of the minimum charge pay option fields is set to Minimum Quantity the Minimum Quanitity and Maximum Quantity fields display The Minimum Quantity indicates the smallest cartage chage that will be calculated 13 If desired you can also enter a Maximum Quantity to set a cap on cartage changes for the table 8 9 05 249 14 Enter an amount in the Additional Per Load Amount if an additional charge applies 15 Accept the Cartage Rate Tables screen to save the cartage table or proceed to the Range tab Setting up a Custom Cartage Rate Table w Equation Users can create custom cartage tables that use equations to calculate the cartage amount The custom rate can be set up as a simple per quantity equation or it can be set up to calculate based on a set of ranges Custom cartage tables are used for hauler pay only To ent
174. ary Notice Required field found on the Configuration screen Lien gt Pre Lien Rules Select a Lien Required option These options determine how how the system will respond when a new order is created without an assigned lien location Not Required denotes that the creation of a lien location is not required for orders for this customer Required Man denotes that the creation of lien locations is required at all times but must be created manually Note that this selection is rarely used because dispatch is slowed greatly by having to create the lien locations Required Auto denotes that the creation of lien locations is required at all times but takes place automatically 8 9 05 267 16 17 18 Required Auto Exempt denotes that the creation of lien locations is automatic but the lien locations are automatically marked exempt This option is useful for storing lien location information for customers that do not necessarily warrant lien locations in the preliminary stages If the need arises to issue lien notices the correct data will have been maintained for implementing preliminary and lien notices See the COMMANDIien User s Manual for additional information regarding lien configuration Select the External Liens flag if liens for this customer will be handled outside of COMMANDseries When a valid reason code is entered in the Suspend Order Reason Code field and saved all new non project or
175. ate the proper setup of each customer record the Customers screen is split into several screens that can be accessed by clicking on the related tab Before entering customer data gather information about each customer to be entered in the system including basic information such as addresses and phone numbers as well as sales taxing pricing accounting etc Topics in this section Customer Main Tab Setup basic information about each customer Customer Address Setup invoice and statement address information Customer Sales Setup information for customer sales analysis Customer Taxing Setup information to properly tax the customer Customer Pricing Setup information relative to item pricing Customer Charges Setup information related to charges Customer Accounting Setup information about credit and receivables Customer Invoicing Setup information relative to invoicing Customer Distribution Setup customer distribution information Customer User Fields Setup enter user defined fields Customer Products Setup information related to products Customer Notes record notes about the customer Customer Main Tab Setup To enter basic customer information 1 2 3 4 Select Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers Customers EDTCUST Customer Code 99123 Al Name Nationwide Concrete Delivery Inc Sort Name NATION Enter a Customer Code to identify the customer in reports and customer looku
176. ation This form enables feature customization of several COMMANDseries functions to setup customer distribution defaults To enter distribution configuration 1 Select Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Distribution 138 Configuration Distribution Tab EDTCNFXD Receivables Aging Statements Financials Projects Quotes Lien User Fields Optimization System Defaults Distribution Dispatch Aqqreqate Signaling Invoicing Inventory Days to Save Detail 365 Number of Days Back to Allow Dispatch J o Change Truck Signaling Unit with Inbound Messages B j Cartage Frequency Monthly D Default Schedule Adjustment Type X Require Order Oty on Non Primary Products for Orders D Apply Schedule Adjusment Type B J Dynamic Plant Fleet Size Allow Dispatch to Activate Quotes Z Use Shipping Address IT Tax FOB Shipments based on the Shipping Plant s Tax Code Require Postal Code J Update Scheduled Oty Based On Ordered Oty Travel Time Post Tolerance Il Acceptable Travel Time Load Percentage Total Travel Time Loads Allow Order Level Mix Design QC Encryption Default Mix Design Approval Status Mix Design Not Approved B j Mix Design Document Format 1 Material Manager 2 Inthe Days To Save Detail field enter the number of days that detailed information on orders and tickets should be saved The value entered here is used by the Purge Expired Or
177. auler pay only Before entering cartage rate codes you need to gather information about each type of cartage rate you pay You may enter as many different cartage rate tables as desired Topics in this section Hourly Cartage Rates Per Load Cartage Rates Quantity Distance Cartage Rates Plant Zone Cartage Rates Quantity Cartage Rates Setting up a Custom Cartage Rate Table w Equation Hourly Cartage Rates If paying for truck usage by the hour use Hourly Cartage Rates Hourly cartage rates can be calculated as Productive or Clock and do not necessarily include travel time or distance Hourly productive cartage rates calculate cartage rates by the hour according to the time the driver or truck is actually productive meaning the truck is involved in loading delivering or returning from a load The formula for calculating hourly cartage rates is CARTAGE TIME x RATE Hourly clock rates are based on the entire time the driver or truck is on the clock regardless of whether any of that time is nonproductive To enter a new hourly productive or clock cartage rate 1 Go to the Cartage Rate Codes screen Files gt Cartage Information gt Cartage Rate Codes 2 Enter a Cartage Rate Table to identify the new cartage rate 3 If the table is intended for a single customer or project enter the appropriate Customer and Project Codes If a cartage table is assigned to a specific customer project the table can only b
178. avel Times EDTMAPS2 Map Page Zones N A EDTMAPS3 Map Page Coordinates EDTMCHG Minimum Load Charges EDTMDSN Mix Design N A EDTMODM Modem Codes EDTMTMG Material Manager EDTMTXT Message Text EDTNEXT Next Numbers EDTORDR Orders EDTORDRO Customer Project Order Lookup EDTORDR1 Order Haul Information EDTORDR2 Order Pricing Information EDTORDR3 Other Order Information EDTORDR4 Order Line Schedule Information EDTORDR5 Other Order Line Information 8 9 05 Form Name Screen Name Configuration EDTORDR6 Order Line Associated Products EDTORDR7 Order Line Cartage Charge Info EDTORDR8 amp Order Line Scheduled Loads EDTORDR9 Associated Product Other Information EDTORDRA _ Product Description EDTORDRB Order COD Calculation N A EDTORDRC Remove Order Reason Code EDTORDRD Scheduling Screen EDTORDRE Test Order Print EDTORDRF Suspend Order Reason Information EDTORDRG Standing File Order Lookup N A EDTORDRH Order Truck Rostering EDTORDRI Order Sales Tax Distribution N A EDTORDRJ UOM Quantity Extensions EDTORDRK Order Audit Log Information EDTORDRL Order Audit Log History EDTORDRN Common Order Functions N A EDTORDRO Sundry Charge Distribution EDTORDRP Order Line Mix Design EDTORDRQ Suggested Shipping Plants N A EDTORDRR Lot Numbers
179. be applied Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Truck Types To apply the rate to all truck types lt Tab gt through this field a wildcard will appear in the field gt Tip Use the system wildcard to simplify data entry For example if you have one rate for Plant 1 and another rate for all of your other plants Enter one rate for Plant and another for Plant 1 19 Enter the cartage rate for hauler pay and haul charges 20 If the Minimum Charge Option on the Main tab is Selected Minimum Charge from Cartage Zone the Minimum Charge field will be active allowing you to assign a minimum cartage charge for individual plant zone combinations 21 If the Minimum Pay Option on the Main tab is Selected Minimum Pay from Cartage Zone the Minimum Pay field will be active allowing you to assign a minimum cartage pay for individual plant zone combinations 22 Accept the Cartage Plant Zone Information and Cartage Rate Tables screens to save the cartage rate and related information Quantity Cartage Rates Cartage may be charged based on the quantity of the materials being hauled Quantity cartage rates can be determined simply by multiplying the cartage rate by the load size CARTAGE RATE x LOAD SIZE For example with a load size of 18 24 tons at a rate of 2 00 ton the total cartage would be 36 48 Additional charges and minimum quantities can also be included as factors To enter a new quantity cartage rate 1 Go
180. box s next to the period s you wish to close 4 Accept the screen to close the fields and exit the screen If necessary closed periods may be re opened by opening the Sales Data Periods screen marking the checkbox associated with the sales period s you wish to open and accepting the screen Sales Data Configuration The Sales Data Configuration screen allows users to define the layout of the database tables used for COMMANDexecutive reports When sales data is posted the data is written to the data warehouse according to the field combinations specified in the sales data configuration Reports then can be generated by these levels and separated into sections according to differences in the levels Therefore the sales data configuration dictates how Sales Reports Gross Margin Reports and Contribution Reports may be designed When entering sales data configurations it is helpful to understand the effect they have on a report Sales data configurations determine the available settings to sort reporting data in the various report selections screens The last entry in the configuration is the entry that the related report will 8 9 05 generate However designing reports and their related sorting options operates from the top down so multiple reports with varying levels of detail may be created from a single configuration For example imagine a sales data configuration is set with the following levels 1 Company Code 2 Plant Cod
181. cally applicable to concrete and asphalt mix item type categories Files gt Items gt Item Categories gt Mix Defaults Item Categories Mix Defaults Tab EDTICAT2 UOM Mix Defaults Tax Override Strength ha m Slump Enter a default Strength value This value is used as the default for the strength when items using the concrete asphalt mix item category are added on the Item Ready Mix Asphalt Information screen respectively Files gt Items gt Mix This fields is of particular use if you have so many mixes that you need to sort them by strength Note You may click on the detail button associated with this field to select from a list of valid units of measure for the strength 3 Enter a default Slump value This value is used as the default for the slump when concrete mix items using this item category are added on the Item Ready Mix Information screen Files gt Items gt Mix 4 Proceed to the Tax Override tab or accept the screen Item Categories Tax Override Setup The Item Categories Tax Override screen allows you to specify tax related information for the specific item category that will override the taxability and or tax rate of the general order For example a tax override may be used when a user is shipping between states when the material is taxable in one state but not in the other These settings will apply to all items belonging to the item category unless specific overrides are assigned
182. ce of the cost center code when specifying the desired cost center on system screens Tip Use abbreviations that are easy to remember If you forget the cost center code on system screens you can enter the abbreviation instead Enter a Description for the cost center To add another cost center select the Add Occurrence button When you are finished entering information accept the screen Account Codes The Account Codes function defines the general ledger accounts used by COMMANDreceivables Use the Account Codes screen to edit general ledger accounts to suit the needs of your business To enter a new account code 1 2 Select Files gt GL Information gt Account Codes Enter a unique account code in the Account field Account Codes EDTACCT m Account Codes it x Account 1014 Description Cash in Southtrust Bank Short STRUST GL Summarize Flag No summarizations Y Account Type x fa Assets Normal Sign Normal Debit Balance x Source Codes fcr En Summarize monthly z fot Qty Summarize monthly v zi MV Limit Cost Centers 022 Aga Haulers Cost Center lt 10 Enter a Description of the account i e Sales Ready Mix or Cash in Central Bank Enter an abbreviation of this description in the Short field Select a GL Summarize Flag The summarize flag causes multiple detail transactions from the COMMANDreceivables application to be recorded in your g
183. ceipt CMPCOD Company CCCLAB Cost Center CUSLAB Customer Code DATLAB System Date INCRCT Message Text The Message Text screen allows the user with appropriate system security to enter and edit message text Message text is used to communicate information to customers using COMMANDreceivables statements and COMMANDinvoicing invoices For example a message text code can be established with the following text Our offices will be closed Thanksgiving Day and the following Friday Have a nice Holiday This message could be selected during invoice runs and the text would print on each invoice Also statements can print messages based on the oldest balance on a customer s account For example a customer with a balance over 120 days old could have the following message printed on their statement Your account is overdue Please contact our credit office immediately The general message text to be printed on every order invoice or statement is selected during the actual preparation of each form in the Print Invoices screen in COMMANDinvoicing Invoicing gt Print Invoices in the Statements screen in COMMANDreceivables Reports gt Statements and on the Edit Orders amp Tickets screen in COMMANDconcrete Options gt Edit Orders amp Tickets Aging related statement messages are assigned to aging categories in the Receivables Statement Configuration screen Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Re
184. ceivables gt Statements 106 Message Text Setup To enter message text 1 Go to the Message Text screen Files gt General Information gt Message Text Message Text EDTMTXT m Message Text DES Code Type Text fi AR lnvoicing z aj Thank you for using Command Data concrete Call on us for any of your construction ne d aj 2 Orders z a Thanks for your order MSG 1 E L n z af Your not full of bricks you ordered the right mix d 88 AR x EI This is a test of the emergency message text system d AGI AR x a Thank you for doing your business with Command Data Concrete Call on us for all of yor z DOE Eg z A Thank you for using Command Data Concrete You may call our office for any questions PEHE ar q Thank you for using Command Data Concrete Your account has past due charges that d AGI4 aR z aj Your account is seriously overdue Please call or come by our office as soon as possible d x 2 Enter a message Code This code identifies each message text and is used to select a message to be printed on customer forms 3 Select the Type of message from the list of valid options AR the message text is available to print on statements Invoicing the message text is available to print on invoices AR Invoicing the message text is available to print on statements and invoices Orders the message text is available to print on orders and tickets Any the message text
185. cent Recycle value represents the percentage of recycled asphalt included in the mix 216 To define mix information for concrete 1 Select the Mix tab Items Mix Tab Concrete EDTIMST6 Main UOM Conversions Sales Tax Override Mix User Fields Locations Costs Prices j Strength sl PEB psi Aggregate Size 374 Slump 4 Cement Type Water Cement Ratio Ad Days to Strength 28 Pricing Information j Pricing Cement Content Batching Information Maximum Water Percent Ar Volume 6 000 Min Cement Content Lightweight Cu Ft water Holdback Material Manager Sort Code gt 2 Enter the Strength of the mix This field represents the average design strength of the mix product 3 Enter the Slump of the mix The slump is a measure of the cohesion plasticity water content and solidity of the mix 4 Enter the mix s Water Cement Ratio This ratio represents the amount of water in the cement It can be printed on the ticket by specifying the document format field on the Document Formats screen Files gt Document Formats 5 Enter the mix s Aggregate Size This is the maximum size of the individual particles of aggregate filler in the mix 6 Enter the Cement Type This field identifies the type of cement in the mix product 7 Enter the mix s Days to Strength This field specifies the number of days of hydration required for the mix to reach the strength specified in the Strength field
186. cessary Aging Categories to be printed on statements See Message Text on page 69 6 Select a Statement Format Group Code to define the statement s layout These codes are set up on the Document Format Group Codes screen Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Format Group Codes Financials Configuration The Financials Configuration screen allows the privileged user access to fields in the configuration file that deal with the COMMANDfinancials application These fields provide a means of customizing COMMANDfinancials without requiring changes to the program 879 05 153 The code length fields which are used by COMMANDinvoicing and COMMANDreceivables were set earlier in the File Build process If you need to adjust these lengths after your G L information structure has been entered you will need to use the Realign Accounts and Cost Centers function See the System Management manual for additional information The remaining fields Number of Budgets Budgets Round to and Multiple Companies relate to a financials package no longer supported by Command Alkon and should be ignored for new systems Configuration Financials Tab EDTCNFXL W Configuration ME System Defaults Distribution Dispatch Aggregate Invoicing Inventory Receivables Aging Statements Financials Projects Quotes Uen User Fields Company Code Length Cost Center Length Account Code Length Sub Account Cod
187. ch the invoices are sorted and sub totaled Print Products Tickets allows you to select whether products and tickets listed on an invoice print in Detail or Summary Days on One Invoice allows you to choose whether invoices are created for single days or for multiple days If available select the cycle code for the printing of customer invoices for this project from the Invoice Frequency field If you want the system to automatically print more than one copy of invoices for this project enter the appropriate number in the Copies to Print field From the Haul Charges field select the method for printing haul charges Print haul charges as a separate line item or Combine haul charges with material price From the Minimum Haul Charges field select the method for printing minimum haul charges Print total minimum haul charge or Separate actual and incremental haul charge Mark the Separate Invoices by Product Line checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox causes each product included on the invoice to be displayed as a separate line Accept the screen to save the project or proceed to the Distribution tab Caution Selecting options on this screen in and of itself will not produce a specific invoice layout The options selected must also be reflected in the Invoice Document Group Formats Entering Project Distribution Information The Distribution tab allows access to miscellaneous dispatching information for the proj
188. checkbox is only displayed when Aggregate is the selected product line Mark the Allow Automatic Price Adjustments checkbox if necessary This checkbox sets the default Allow Automatic Price Adjustments value for any new items added to the customer record Changing this field has no effect on items previously entered Click the Quoted Cartage button to go to the Quoted Cartage Rates screen See the Quoted Cartage Rates section of this manual for more information Proceed to the next tab or accept the screen to save the customer information Customer Charges Setup The Charges tab allows you to define certain charges to be billed to the customer Some customers prefer to have non material charges billed on a separate invoice To accommodate this need each charge has a flag that indicates that it should be billed separately If needed run the Create Orders amp Tickets for Separate Invoices routine during invoice prep It will identify charges flagged for separate invoicing and move those charges to new orders which can then be invoiced separately 264 To define customer charge information 1 From the Customers select the Charges tab Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers gt Charges Customers Charges Tab EDTCUSTF Main Addresses Sales Taxing Pricing Charges Accounting Invoicing Distribution User Fields Products Concrete D I Copy to All Minimum Load Charge T able x f
189. cing Quoting fixed prices to customer Entering Project Forecasting Information material delivery times Project Initial Setup General information about the project defaults from the Quotes screen Any default information can be edited to customize this project for this specific customer s requirements To enter basic project information 1 Go to the Projects screen Quotes gt Quotes gt Projects gt New Detail or Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Projects 2 If the Projects screen is accessed from the Quotes screen the Customer Code will default from the Quote file if the Projects screen is accessed directly a Customer Code must be entered manually Projects Main Tab EDTPROJ m Projects r r 2204 Lakeshore Dr Birmingham AL 35209 Enter thru alley behind heating plant 8 9 05 275 4 Enter a Project Code to identify the project in reports and project lookup screens If a Project Next Number sequence has been created Tab through the Project Code field and a code will be automatically assigned Enter a Name to identify the project Entering Project Main Tab Information The Main tab on the Project screen allows you to enter information such as the project s address contact person and setup date To define main information 1 Select the Main tab on the Projects screen Quotes gt Quotes gt Projects gt New Detail gt Main or Files gt Customer amp Project Info
190. ck token The flag character will be right next to the truck code Take care to select flags that will not confuse the dispatchers If for example your truck codes are numeric avoid numeric flags as the result would be very confusing for the dispatcher If the truck codes are all numeric then avoid numeric flags If codes use both numbers and letters it is recommended to use special characters etc to avoid confusion Tip It is not necessary to employ both a color and a flag on every condition Users might want to use flags for lower priority conditions and colors for higher priority conditions For example if your truck codes are numeric you might use a D flag to indicate a Daily Overtime Warning If the driver s hours exceed the daily limit you could then combine the D flag with a warning color Such an approach gives you more flexibility in assigning flags and codes 8 Assign the condition a Priority rating 1 being the highest priority Priority ratings are used to resolve conflicts in condition displays That is if a truck ends up being in two conditions at once for example Deadhead and Hourly Warning then the condition that is displayed on the screen will be the condition with the highest priority In the event that both conditions have the same priority then the system will display the most recent condition 9 Accept the screen to save the condition Driver Overtime Tables COMMANDseries allows users t
191. ck type specifies a user definable grouping of trucks by function materials carried and or capacity For example truck types could be defined for the following trucks e Nine cubic yard capacity rear discharging ready mix truck e _Eight cubic yard capacity rear discharging ready mix truck e Nine cubic yard capacity front discharging ready mix truck Each of these trucks normally has its own truck type Various reports and screens use the truck type grouping In addition when scheduling an order you have the option of specifying a specific truck type Before entering truck type information gather information about the types of trucks you own or use for the delivery of items To define a new truck type 1 Goto the Truck Types screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Truck Types Truck Types EDTTTYP EN Truck Types Op x 0 Truck Type Description Short Maximum Load Size Minimum Load Size Scheduled Load Size Job Wash Time Truck Tarp Time Unload Time Number of Drops Percent Drop 1 Percent Drop 2 Percent Drop 3 Percent Drop 4 Percent Drop 5 Percent Drop 5 2 Enter a Truck Type Code to identify the new truck type 3 Enter a Description and Short description for the truck type 4 Specify the default Maximum Load Size maximum amount the truck can carry for this type of truck If necessary use the detail button to select a unit of measure 5 Specify the default Sch
192. colors can be set each on separate screens Note To reset color defaults go to the Options menu from this screen and select Defaults To define color preferences 1 Go to the Colors tab on the Preferences screen Misc gt Preferences gt Colors Preferences Colors Tab SYSPREF4 m Preferences General User Sounds Colors Tracking Fonts Keys Toolbar Forms Application Background xxx Llser Color 1 xxx a Window Display xxx User Color 2 xxx Unavailable Field Xxx User Color 3 _Xxx Unavailable Label oc User Color 4 Xxx Unavailable Button oc User Color 5 Xx Bright Field Kecl User Color 6 _Xxx Bright Label User Color 7 _ Xxx Bright Button Beal User Color 8 Xxx Progress Bar Kecl User Color 9 Xx Game Background K l User Color 10 _ Xxx User Color 11 ac Normal Button Display gt User Color 12 Xe Unavailable Button E User Color 13 Xxx Bright Button bk User Color 14 Xxx User Color 15 Dee 2 For each listed field Label User etc select a display color by clicking on the Colors button You will be prompted for two colors Foreground Color The color of the text Background Color The background color 3 Selecta display color for each button display Normal Unavailable and Bright You can toggle through the color options by clicking on the buttons Each time the button is clicked it changes to the next color 310 Tracking Preferences Setu
193. creen Hauler Truck Information The Hauler Truck Information screen allows you to specify a cartage table for a hauler truck or driver Haulers trucks and drivers are defined during the initial COMMANDseries system setup This information must be set up for hauler pay To enter hauler truck information 1 Go to the Hauler Truck Information Files gt Cartage Information gt Hauler Truck Information 2 Enter a Hauler Code Truck Code Driver Code or any combination thereof If for example you only enter a Hauler Code then the cartage tble selected below will be applied to all trucks and drivers hauling for the specified company 254 8 9 05 6 Hauler Truck Information EDTCTHT m Hauler Truck Information Oix Hauler Code 100 Li l ggner Truck Code 19 Volvo 1993 Driver Code 17 Dale Earnhardt Name Dale aha Address S a City Birmingham State Country Postal Code Phone Number 1 205 364 7851 Phone Number 2 Phone Number 3 Phone Number 4 Vendor Code sl Payroll Cartage Rate Table sl Enter the Name Address and Phone Number information associated with the Hauler Truck and or Driver Enter a Vendor Code associated with the vendor or truck for use in an external accounts payable system If desired enter a Payroll code In the Cartage Rate Table field assign a cartage code to the hauler or truck to define a rate for all cartage transaction
194. cremental haul charge 8 Mark the Separate Invoices by Product Line checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox causes each product included on the invoice to be displayed as a separate line 9 Proceed to the next tab or accept the screen to save the customer information 8 9 05 269 Customer Distribution Setup The Distribution tab allows access to miscellaneous dispatching information for the customer This information is used as a default to the corresponding fields on projects orders and tickets subsequently created for the customer To define customer distribution information 1 From the Customers screen select the Distribution tab Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers gt Distribution Customers Distribution Tab EDTCUSTI Main Addresses Sales Taxing Pricing Charges Accounting Invoicing Distribution User Fields Products Concrete Copy to All Tracking Order Color F rm Print Mix Weights on Ticket 2 3 Select a Product Line against which specified charges apply for this customer If you want the same selections for all product lines select the Copy to All checkbox Select the Tracking Order Color This field designates the color code to be used when displaying orders for this customer on the Tracking and Scheduling screen Mark the Print Mix Weights on Tickets checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox causes the weight of each com
195. ct This allows for each product to be discounted at a unique rate which can vary by plant as well Mark the Store and Report Sales Tax By Shipping Plant checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox causes tax to be computed according to the tax at the plant shipping the materials Mark the Book Sales Tax Payable to G L By Shipping Plant checkbox if necessary only available if the Compute Tax By Shipping Plant checkbox is marked When marked this checkbox causes sales tax payable to be recorded to the General Ledger by shipping plant instead of pricing plant Select a Tax Location Non Taxable Reason If a reason code is entered here it will be the default reason code for any applicable non taxable sales Select Concrete or Aggregate from the Product Line field s list Mark the Copy To All checkbox to copy these configuration settings to all other product lines Select a Credit Debit Memo Reason Code The reason code allows you to more effectively track credit and debit memos Proceed to the Inventory tab Inventory Configuration The Inventory Configuration option allows the privileged user access to fields in the configuration file that deal with the COMMANDinventory application These fields provide a means of customizing COMMANDinventory without requiring changes to the program 148 To enter inventory configuration information 1 From the Configuration screen select the Inventory tab Files gt General Info
196. cument Tags screen Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Tags Document Tags EDTDOCT lookup m Document Tags Document Type Ticket Print amp Data In Out Tag CUSTID Tag Description TagType File Field Name CUSTID Customer Tax D fLooku ORDR setup A 2 Select a Document Type from the field s list This setting determines how the tag will be used Statement Print Invoice Print etc 3 Inthe Tag field enter a six character alphanumeric tag If you tab the system lists all tags associated with the specified Document Type 4 Enter a Description for the tag 5 Select Lookup as the Tag Type 6 Select the File from which you want to pull data The drop down list will display all files tables available to the specified Document Type Note If the File field does not appear then you have selected a Document Type for which you cannot create new tags 7 Click the Setup button to further define the document tag The Document Field Tag Setup screen displays Document Field Tag Setup EDTDOCT2 W Document Lookup Tag Setup CUSTID x From File ORDR To File CUST Customer File x j Field Name TAx_ID_CODE Multitoccurrence Field From Field To Field fCUST_CODE ge CUST_CODE AR 8 The From File field will display the file selected on the previous screen 9 The To File field lists all files available to the From File Select the File you want to access 10 The Field Name specifies a fiel
197. cument tags Most users will be able to address their needs with this initial tag set However new tags can be created for certain functions There are two features of the document tag that you must understand prior to creating a new tag Document Type and Tag Type Document Type allows you to group tags by function Any given group type such as Statement Print or Item Data I O can directly access a specific set of tables An Order Print tag for example can access order related tables but cannot access customer balances A tag can only be used in document formats with the same document type Consequently you will see duplication of tags between document types Every document type contains a current date tag DATLAB Tag Type determines how the tag will access data The four tag types are e Field The tag will access a specific field in one of the tables associated with the selected Document Type The Ticket Print tag CUSNAM for example prints the Customer Name from the Ticket table TICK Lookup In some cases the needed information is not in an available table For a ticket level tag for instance the Customer s Tax ID code is not contained in the Order table ORDR However the Order table itself contains a reference to the Customer file CUST which contains the Tax ID For links that are one link from a specific table use a Lookup tag e Calculation A Calculation tag can be one of two things A straightfor
198. d formatting Minimum Load Cartage Zone and Cartage Range Table Bringing data in from the various COMMANDseries tables requires special formatting considerations Remember these rules 1 Each table requires a minimum of 2 rows 2 The first row contains the name of the table in the first column Sample Min Load table format with generic column headers MinLoadTable YMCH_Load_Size YMCH_ Price Because no column headers have been supplied Quote Print will automatically insert column headers based on the table field descriptions Sample Min Load table format with custom column headers MinLoadTable Load SizePrice YMCH_ Load_Size YMCH_ Price Row 1 Column 1 contains the table name This row will be deleted during the population of the template This is required to populate the table If there are only 2 rows in the table then the table will be populated with column headers before the data is inserted into the table See above sample Setup Troubleshooting Tips General e If you encounter problems running QuotePrint after updating MDAC you may need to re register Microsoft Word From a dos window type the following 8 9 05 C WINNT REGTLIB EXE C Program Files Microsoft Office Office MSWORD9 OLB The above path is for Microsoft Word 2000 The path and number on the MSWORD OLB may be slightly different for more recent versions SQL Server Setup REGTOO
199. d Command Alkon has provided a Setting Up the System document to assist you as you enter the information that will make your system unique to your business As the size of the Setting Up the System document shows there is a great deal of information to enter However once this initial information exists in the system the only products projects customers etc that you will have to enter are new ones Properly built files make COMMANDseries extremely easy to use The information you need is either already in place or just a mouse click or keystroke away Caution Before attempting to use COMMANDseries make sure you have entered the information described in the Setting Up the System document Starting COMMANDseries There are several ways to start your COMMANDseries applications e Select the COMMANDseries Program from the Windows Start button e Select the application module icon from the COMMANDseries Program group in Windows Explorer e Select the COMMANDseries shortcut on your Desktop e Implement the COMMANDstart feature which starts COMMANDseries automatically upon start up of your computer After entering a COMMANDseries program you can switch to another COMMANDseries application by selecting the program from the Alternate Menu list in the Misc drop down menu of all COMMANDseries applications Topics in this section Logging into COMMANDseries Exiting COMMANDseries Entering File Information Logging into COMMANDseri
200. d from the To File 11 If the field has occurrences for each product line for example the Customer file contains separate Discount Terms for concrete and aggregate select Multi occurrence Field to ensure that the program determines the applicable product line before retrieving the field value 12 When extracting data from a secondary table you must specify how the system should select a given record within that table The From Field specifies what primary key to use in the From File when looking up the data The To Field specifies the corresponding field in the To File 13 Accept the Document Field Tag Setup and the Document Tags screens Document Formats Document formats specify page layouts for forms i e tickets orders invoices statements and quotes that are printed with COMMANDseries applications Also document formats are used to identify record layouts for data out files created by the COMMANDseries applications for exporting information to an external application and for data in files created by an external system for importing into the COMMANDseries application Your Command Alkon Representative currently designs document formats Document format codes are assigned to records on the following screens for the indicated use Topics in this section Tickets plant copy and dispatch copy Data Out and Data In Invoices Statements Quotes Entering Document Formats Adjusting Formats Using the Display Screen Adj
201. d of an order form Note Because the Shipping Address form unlike the standard Delivery Address field employs fixed width fields it is more appropriate for certain data export needs Command Alkon recommends that all users activate this setting Customers using the MapPoint interface must activate this flag Select Tax FOB Shipments based on the Shipping Plant s Tax Code to tax FOB orders as origination taxing even if your tax codes are configured for destination taxing If Use Shipping Address is selected Require Postal Code will be enabled If this flag is set then orders cannot be saved without a valid entry in the Postal Code field Enable Update Scheduled Qty Based on Ordered Qty if you want Order Entry to update associated Schedule Quantities whenever the Order Quantity is reduced Note If a newly entered Order Quantity is greater than the Schedule quantity the Schedule Quantity will always be increased regardless of this setting The next three fields configure Automatic Travel Time Posting see page 102 for a detailed explanation 140 15 Enter the Travel Time Post Tolerance 16 Enter the Acceptable Travel Time Load Percentage 17 Enter the Total Travel Time Loads 18 If you will be using Order level Mix Design select the Allow Order Level Mix Design checkbox Two additional fields will appear 19 Default Mix Design Approval Status either Mix Design Not Approved or Mix Design Approved This identifies
202. ddress City State and Zip information if applicable This information prints on trailer listings only 4 On the Hauler tab select a Hauler Code to assign a hauler to the trailer If this is a company trailer assign the hauler code setup for company trucks Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Haulers 5 Enter the License Number found on the trailer s license plate 6 Enter the License Expiration Date found on the trailer s license plate Trailers Scheduling Setup To enter hauler scheduling information 1 Select the Scheduling tab on the Trailers screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Trailers gt Scheduling 8 9 05 179 Trailers EDTTRLR2 Hauler gulir Tare Overhead Load Dut Minimum Load Size ell 500 tons Scheduled Load Size ell 3 00 tons Maximum Gross ell 10 00 tons 2 Specify Minimum Load Size Scheduled Load Size and Maximum Gross information for use in the Scheduling screen 3 In an Overhead Loadout environment enter the Number of Drops normally required to fill the truck Trailer Tare Setup To enter trailer tare information 1 Select the Tare tab on the Trailers screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Trailers gt Tare Trailers Tare Tab EDTTRLR3 Hauler Scheduling Ja Overhead Load Out Tare Weight gt 12 00 tons Tare Date 30 Oct 2004 Tare Time E 4 00 Days Tare is Valid J 10 Tare Type Manual z 2 Enter the Tare Wei
203. defined periods that dictate time periods used as a grouping segment for information stored in the Data Warehouse tables In addition Sales Data Periods are used during the Compress Sales Data operation creating one record for each period compressed The Sales Data Periods setting is a one time initial setting that should not be changed following the implementation of COMMANDexecutive Sales Data Periods are completely independent of A R and G L Accounting Periods The Sales Data Periods screen allows users to control the sales data posting routine To post sales data to the data warehouse the sales data period must be marked as open To set sales data periods 1 Go to the Sales Data Periods screen Reporting gt Sales Data Periods Sales Data Periods EDTSLSP A Sales Data Periods Biel x Accounting Year 2005 Number of Periods hz Period Dates Start Date End Date Start Date End Date 01 Jan 2005 31 Jan 2005 M Open 01 Jul 2005 31 Jul 2005 Iv Open 01 Feb 2005 28 Feb 2005 M Open By 01 Aug 2005 31 Aug 2005 M Open 01 Mar 2005 31 Mar 2005 M Open 01 Sep 2005 30 Sep 2005 M Open Im Aer 2006 30 Apr 2005 M Open BY 01 Oct 2005 37 Oct 2005 M Open 01 May 2005 E 31 May 2005 IV Open 01 Nov 2005 20 Nov 2005 MV Open m 0un 2005 m f30Jun 2005 M Open BY 01 Dec 2005 31 Dec 2005 M Open Defaults 2 Enter the Accounting Year associated with the sales data periods you are defining 3 At this time
204. ders and Tickets screen to determine the effective purge date Value here range from 180 720 6 months to two years 3 Inthe Number of Days Back To Allow Dispatch field indicate how many days prior to the current date dispatching can take place Dispatching includes entering orders typing tickets etc To allow dispatching only for the current and future days enter zero 0 If you regularly deliver after midnight this value should be set to one 1 4 The Change Signaling Unit Field is used to manage a truck s autosignaling comm manager assignment Select With Inbound Messages to have the system update the truck s comm manager whenever an inbound message is recieved This option is generally used in a central dispatch environment Select With Current Plant to have the system change the signaling unit s comm manager only when it s current plant value changes This option is generally used in local dispatch setting in which each plant has a commmanager located at the plant Select Never to never automatically change the comm assignment This option is generally used if there os only one comm manager 5 Use the Cartage Frequency field to select the frequency that cartage payments are calculated 6 The Default Schedule Adjustment Type field sets a default value for the Schedule Adjustment Type field on the Order Schedule screen This 8 9 05 139 10 11 12 13 14 field establishes if how the system w
205. ders entered for the customer default to a suspended state If no reason code is entered new non project orders should default to a released state This option is useful if the customer s pricing varies substantially from week to week so that you always want to make sure the prices are fully reviewed prior to invoicing Proceed to the next tab or accept the screen to save the customer information Customer Invoicing Setup Customer invoicing information is used when invoices are created to determine the following aspects of invoicing Number of orders and tickets are included on a single invoice Sub totals to be printed on the invoice Level of detail printed for items and tickets Business for single or multiple days on a single invoice Customers included in the invoice run based on assigned frequency code Please keep in mind that for the various formatting options you must both set the option on this screen and create a document group amp format that will support it To enter customer invoicing information 1 From the Customers screen select the Invoicing tab Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers gt Invoicing 268 Customers Invoicing Tab EDTCUSTH Main Addresses Sales Taxing Pricing Charges Accounting Invoicing Distribution User Fields Products Print One Invoice Per Order E Sort and Sub Total By None x j Print Products Tickets Detail D Invoice Freq
206. device that the modem is attempting to disconnect from Up to nine suffix responses may be specified 12 Accept the Modem Codes screen to save the modem and its settings Signaling Units Signaling units identify the signaling system connected to the COMMANDseries system and the unique means of communicating with and understanding each unit You do not enter individual signaling units in this screen Instead you need an entry for each type of signaling unit Before entering information gather technical information about the signaling systems that you connect to COMMANDseries Also determine if automatic signaling is used to move trucks through the system Topics in this section Signaling Units Setup Signaling Unit Options Signaling Unit Incoming Messages Signaling Unit Outgoing Messages Signaling Unit Statuses Signaling Units Setup To set up signaling units 1 Go the Signaling Units screen Files gt General Information gt Signaling Units Signaling Units EDTSIGU f Signaling Units Signaling Unit 10 Description COMMAND signaling Short CMDsig Unit Type COMMAND signal D Default Manager Number E Port Name COM _ Port Attack Delays II 2 Enter a Description of the signaling unit This can include the brand name and any other pertinent information 3 Enter a Short description for use on COMMANDseries screens 4 Select a Unit Type from the possible choices list
207. document It enables you to quickly locate the page that contains the information you need Headings Scan the headings to find the topic you need Procedures Procedures tell you how to perform a task and are indicated by numbered sequences in the body of the document Appendices Appendices provide information that is not necessary for the task at hand but is related to the topic Use appendices to find out more about a particular topic for further documentation or where to go for technical help if necessary Topics in this section Style Before You Begin Setting Up the System Starting COMMANDseries Accessing Help Customer Lookup The Calendar Five Important Functions 8 9 05 23 Style This document uses a style designed to help you identify specific functionality e Button names are capitalized and bold For example Select the Pricing button e Field names are capitalized and bold For example Enter the Order Code in this field Note To enhance the readability of the text the enhanced formatting is only used for the first instance of the name within a section Forms also called screens or windows Menu names and Options are capitalized For example On the Edit menu if you select Volume Calculator the Item Code screen may appear first e Required user input examples use Courier New plain For example Enter 123 Main Street in this field Braces and arrows gt indicate how to navigate to a
208. ds on that tab Assigning a user Read Only access to EDTCNFXB for example will have no impact on the user s access to the fields on that tab Order Printers The User Order Printers tab provides the user access to information regarding order printers that are used by the COMMANDconcrete application When an order is entered in the Orders screen Dispatch gt Orders the user will be prompted for printing the order to one of the printers defined on this screen To assign order printers 1 Select the Order Printers tab from the Users screen Files gt System Information gt Users gt Order Printers 48 Users Order Printers Tab EDTUSNMS5 Preferences Licenses Privileges Order Printers Dptions Plants Cost Centers Description Short HP 1701 PhaserJet Printer HP1701 Setup lt 2 Enter a Description then press lt Tab gt The Short description field and the Setup button will appear 3 Enter a Short Description for the printer in the field that displays 4 Click the Setup button to go to the User Order Printer Setup screen User Order Printer Setup EDTUSNMB m User Order Printer Setup EN Manager Number Port Name Selective Address Document Format om Pot gt Order Print Format Z Auto Dial Flag Modem Phone Number Modem Code EI 5 Enter a Manager Number This specifies the COMMANDcomm manager that will control the printer 6 Enter an
209. e Assign a Hauler Code to the truck If your company owns the truck set the hauler code to Company Truck Enter the Driver Code of the person who usually drives this truck If no employee is the normal driver of this truck leave the field blank Select the Plant Code for the plant to which the truck is assigned or from which it normally operates If the truck does not have a plant from which it typically operates leave this field blank Enter the code s for the trailer s usually associated with this truck in the Trailer Code 1 and 2 fields if necessary Enter the Insurance Carrier Name and the Insurance Expiration Date for this truck Enter t in the Setup Date field to indicate today as the day the truck is added to the file Truck Scheduling Setup To set up truck scheduling 1 On the Trucks screen select the Scheduling tab 8 9 05 175 Trucks EDTTRUC2 sss Main cheduing Tracking Overhead Load Out User Fields Truck Type el JE REAR Product Line Concrete zl Minimum Load Size 7 00 cuyds Tare Weight gt tons Scheduled Load Size w 900 cuyds Tare Date Ej Maximum Load Size gt 10 00 cu yds Tare Time Days Tare is Valid Tare Type Delivery Method x TE Company T F 0 B Only 2 Specify the Truck Type This field assigns a type code to the truck and is used to categorize your trucks This is helpful when choosing a truck to assign to an order or ticket when the order
210. e 3 Customer Code 4 Project Code 5 Product Code There are many different report options with this configuration including a product sales listing sorted by company plant customer and project or a project listing sorted by company plant and customer Available Configuration Fields Accounting Category Code Customer Code Delivery Address Delivery Method Code Delivery Type Driver Employee Code Hauler Code Item Category Item Code Lien Location Code Map Page Pricing Company Code Pricing Plant Code Project Code Quote Code Reference Customer Code Sales Analysis Code Salesman Employee Code Shipping Company Code Shipping Customer Code Shipping Plant Code Truck Code Truck Type Usage Code Zone Code Important Notes e Remember configuration settings allow reports with top down sorting options You cannot create a report from a configuration and skip a setting in the middle a different configuration is required e Configurations may be added at any time but all existing sales data must be re summarized after changing the sales data configuration e All Sales Data Configuration entries for Contribution Reports must have Delivery Type as the first option To set the sales data configuration 1 Goto the Sales Data Configuration screen Reporting gt Sales Data Configuration 318 8 9 05 Sales Configuration Data EDTSLSC W Sales Data
211. e only employees flagged as drivers can be assigned to a truck If needed you may enter Payroll Plant Code Default Truck and Seniority If this employee is a driver assign a Driver Overtime Code Note If Driver Overtime Tables have not yet been entered return to the Employee files after the tables have been entered Accept this screen to add the employee and related information to the employees file Reason Codes Reason codes explain why a field is set to a particular value For instance a non taxable reason code is used on the Customers screen to tell why a particular customer is set to a non taxable status Reason codes can be established to explain the following occurrences 66 Removed Items orders or tickets that have been removed or canceled Suspended Items orders or tickets that have been suspended from invoicing Non taxable Items a customer project order is set to a non taxable status A R Balance Remaining a balance remains for an invoice that has had some A R transaction applied Job Quote Status status changes in a job or quote Job Quote Product status change in a job or quote at the product level Removed Cancelled Purchase Order the customer cancelled the order due to a removed or cancelled purchase order Unapproved Purchase Order your company has rejected the customer s purchase order Inventory Adjustment used in COMMANDinventory when adjusting quantities
212. e Length Number of Budgets Budgets Round To bh Multiple Companies Projects Quotes Configuration The Projects Quotes Configuration option allows the privileged user access to fields in the configuration file that deal with projects and COMMANDquote To enter projects quotes configuration 1 From the Configuration screen select the Projects Quotes tab Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Projects Quotes Configuration Projects Quotes Tab EDTCNFXM Lien User Fields Optimization Receivables Aging j Statements Financials Next Project Sequence Code gt D PROJ Use Project Product Trade Discount Rules to Calculate Suggested Price for Project Products Use Project Zone Zone Charge Rules to Calculate Suggested Price for Project Products Next Job Sequence Code gt Default Quote Document gt Je cmdserie DOC SAMPLE 1 DOT Next Quote Code Sequence Code gt QUOTE Use Quote Product Trade Discount Rules to Calculate Suggested Price for Quote Products Use Quote Zone Zone Charge Rules to Calculate Suggested Price for Quote Products 154 8 9 05 2 If desired enter a Next Project Sequence Code This options allows users to establish a formal next numbers sequence for new project codes 3 Enter a Default Quote Document name This should be the path and filename of the default document template to be used when printing quotes in Microsoft Word 4 Select a Next Quote
213. e Post Tolerance 3 Enter the Acceptable Travel Time Load Percentage 4 Enter the Total Travel Time Loads 5 Accept the screen Time Posting Comm Manager Smaller companies can run the COMMANDcomm manager on their system s COMMANDcomm server However time posting can be a processor intensive task Larger companies may need a dedicated workstation to handle this function 8 9 05 191 To create a COMMANDcomm manager to process time posting 1 Start by creating a Windows shortcut Right click in an empty space on the Windows desktop 2 Select New gt Shortcut 3 The correct path is C cmdserie bin cmdserie exe cmdserie a cx M n t mm cx COMMANDcomm n Any unique manager number mm Polling interval in minutes a good starting point is 60 so that travel times are posted every hour 4 Change the Start in to c CMDSERIE CLIENTS Select OK to save the shortcut 6 Double click the shortcut to start the COMMANDcomm manager You can place the shortcut in the Windows Startup folder so that it will launch automatically ul Process Flow When the comm manager activates it will do the following 1 Identify completed tickets whose trucks have clocked in since the last update or since the comm manager was started 2 Sort tickets by map page 3 Validate the travel times using the Travel Time Post Tolerance value Tickets with excessive times are discarded 4 Validate the number
214. e Regular Per Unit enter the discount amount per unit for the terms code in the Discount Amount Per Unit Is field 5 Accept the Terms Code screen to save the new terms code and its settings If you chose Prox Percent or Prox Per Unit as the terms type 1 This step is dependent upon the terms type If the terms type is Prox Percent Mark the Delivery Exempt checkbox if necessary When marked this field indicates that as defined by the Exemption Type and Exemption Rate fields a portion of the sales amount is exempt from the calculation of a discount Select an Exemption Type from the field s list Enter an Exemption Rate for the exemption type Prox Percent Terms Type Dollar Amount E 8 9 05 If the terms type is Prox Per Unit select the Per Unit VOM that should be applied 2 Enter a value in the field that the follows Discount Date On This Day This value defines the specific day used to compute the discount date for the current terms code 3 Enter the Due Date On This Day of the next month 4 This step is dependent upon terms type If the terms type is Prox Percent enter the percent to discount for the terms code in the Discount Percent Is field If the terms type is Prox Per Unit enter the amount per unit to discount for the terms code in the Discount Amount Per Unit Is field 5 Accept the Terms Code screen to save the new terms code and its settings If you chose Double Pro
215. e assigned to orders for that customer project The table will not show up in a cartage lookup for other customer projects 4 Enter a Description and Short description for the cartage rate 240 Cartage Rate Tables EDTCTRT1 4 Cartage Rate Tables Of x Cartage Rate Table H Customer Code ll Project Code ll Description Per Hour Short Description JHOUR Rate Type JHourly productive D j Mam Default Rate 20 00 Effective S fi 8Jan 2005 Previous Rate 40 00 Rate UOM 80001 each Cartage Type Both D j Item Code gt bo Cartage Minimum Charge Option Minimum Quantity B Minimum Pay Option Minimum Pay Amount Minimum Charge Pay J 30 00 Minimum Quantity 20 00 Additional Per Load Amount J Maximum Quantity J 40 00 Select Hourly productive or Hourly Clock as the Rate Type Enter the Default Rate for the table The date of the change will default If you change an existing rate the old rate will move to the Previous Rate field The Rate UOM will default to 80001 each and cannot be changed Set the Cartage Type as Payment if the cartage fee is directly paid to the hauler Charge if the cartage fee is to be charged to the customer Both if the cartage fee is sometimes paid and sometimes charged Note Setting the cartage type to Both for any rate type does not mean that 10 11 the table will automatically be used for both payment and charge but that it can be used for both payment and charge
216. e product is available at all plants choose the All plants option 4 Click on the Pricing button to go to the Project Product Pricing Information screen Project Product Pricing Information EDTPROJ1 EK Project Product Pricing Information 2500 2500 3 4 3 8 Allow Automatic Price Adjustments Estimated Quantity IT Default Load Quantity L Price 5680 cy Price Extension Per unit zl Effective Bl 03 Aug 2004 Previous Price 65 00 cy Price Extension Per unit sl UOM Extensions JAgaregate D Copy to All Sundry Charge lh SATSUN Pricing _ allal Surcharge Code sl ENV ENVIRON Rate d Si f Override Terms Code Discount Discount Rate Type Amount PE j Discount Rate ei cy Enter the Estimated Quantity of the product that the customer intends to buy Note You can click on the detail button associated with this field to select a unit of measure to assign to the estimated quantity Enter the product Price as well as the Price Extension and Effective date Whenever the price is changed the old price and price extension will be automatically moved into the Previous Price and Price Extension fields 8 9 05 289 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Project prices will override pricing information from the item master file and customer file whenever this product is ordered for this project Mark the Allow Automatic Price Adjustments field you
217. e signaling unit statuses Auto Ticketing Interface COMMANDaggregate s Auto Ticketing Interface is designed to work with several different badge reader systems so that trucks can be automatically dispatched weighed and ticketed without any action from the weighmaster The system provides full integration of COMMANDseries badge readers scales and stop lights Error messages are displayed on the COMMANDcomm message line to prevent dialog boxes from interrupting the process flow If necessary errors may be addressed through manual dispatch without disrupting the auto ticketing interface The business flow described here represents basic functionality Contact your Command Alkon sales representative to determine how your business practices can be best accommodated by the current interface An ID reader is assigned to a scale lane and is identified by a Lane Type The lane type determines the auto ticketing functionality Tare Lane 1 Truck drives on scale 8 9 05 75 Card badge reader identifies truck If the car badge code is not associated with a truck the stop light will flash red and an error message will display in the comm manager If the ID code is associated with a truck the new tare weight is written to truck record The stop light flashes green to indicate that the truck may proceed Note The tare weight is updated regardless of the Days Tare is Valid setting in the truck file Dispatch Lane 1 W
218. e surcharge and for determining where to book GL entries The Product Code must be set up prior to using the surcharge 6 Select a Rate Type to specify the way the surcharge is applied In the example above the environmental surcharge is assigned per load Note The appearance and values of certain fields on this screen may change depending on what Rate Type is selected 7 Enter a Rate to apply as the surcharge amount If the Rate is a Percent of the haul charge mark the checkbox 8 Select the Rate Unit of Measure according to the rate type The UOM for a Per Load or Hourly rate type should be set to Each a Per Quantity or Per Each rate type should be set to a weight UOM Note The Rate Unit of Measure will default for certain Rate Types 10 11 12 13 14 Select the First Load Only checkbox if the charge should only be applied to the first load of the order delivered If this box is left unmarked the surcharge will be applied to each ticket Select the Print Charge Separately checkbox if you wish to print surcharges separately on an invoice and ticket If this box is left unmarked surcharges will be included on the invoice and ticket under Haul Note The ticket and invoice must be formatted accordingly Select the Use scheduled load as minimum checkbox if necessary Note This field only appears if the Rate Type is per quantity Select the Auto Assign checkbox if you want to automatically apply the charge
219. e to indicate the source code to be used when a COMMANDfinancials transaction batch is created for COMMANDreceivables activity and quantity activity respectively Select a Tax on Discount Non tax Reason Code This field indicates the non tax reason code to assign to sales tax adjustments made when a tax on discount is applied on the COMMANDreceivables Payments screen Transactions gt Payments Select a Receipts Format Group Code This field is used to print an AR receipt for payments and void payments Select a Receipts Next Number Sequence Code This field indicates the numbering system to be used for the receipts The options of this field are set up on the Next Numbers screen If you have multiple companies you may want to maintain customer credit ratings by company If the Maintain Credit by Company box is checked then when customer credit information is entered on the Customer Accounting tab you will be able to enter separate Credit Codes for each company Note This option must be activated before any customers are entered Once customer information has been entered in the Customer Credit table CUCO the field will be deactivated 10 11 12 13 14 15 If you are maintaining credit by company you may need to restrict customer lookups by company You can do this by returning to the Users editor and assigned users to companies on the Options tab Mark the Use Cutoff Date for Subtransactions checkbox
220. eaders detail lines footers etc When utilizing the Accounting Category screen you can specify the desired document format group for invoices debit memos and credit memos Accounting categories specify a code that groups customers projects together for invoice creation assigning invoice document formats assigning invoice number ranges accounting for customer project activity 8 9 05 generated by invoicing and accounts receivable and reporting purposes Document format group codes can also be used for the creation of quote documents Topics in this section Document Format Group Setup Invoice Format Codes Setup Statement Format Codes Setup Project Quote Format Codes Setup Receipt Format Codes Setup Invoice Out Format Codes Setup Ticket Overflow Format Codes Setup File Import Export Format Codes Setup Document Format Group Setup Before entering document format groups information gather information about the formats of your invoices statements and quotes To enter document format groups 1 Goto the Document Format Group Codes screen Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Documents Format Groups Document Format Group Codes EDTDOCG m Document Format Group Codes IT Code Description Short Document Format Group Type fi a INVOICE JINY Invoice _Formats d 2 af STATEMENT STMT Statement z _ Formats E B a QUOTE QUOTE Quote z _Fomats JFCINVC aj Finance Charge Invoice FCI
221. eature is used in situations in which multiple COMMANDseries systems are replicating A R batches to a central location Giving each location a different range prevents the A R record of one system from overwriting the A R record from another system Note A R batch numbers will reset at the beginning of each day 11 Accept the Next Numbers screen Document Tags When you print an invoice or perform an export or import there must be some sort of mechanism to extract specific information from the database The initial component of this mechanism is a document tag A document tag is essentially a shortcut to information in the database By placing a tag in a document format you instruct COMMANDseries to insert the data defined by the document tag using the layout defined by the document format A basic document such as a delivery ticket is created by means of a document format containing the required document tags Output Process Delivery Ticket Document Tags ORDR DATLAB 6 13 01 CUSNA Fred Here Here s your DELVQY DELUAB 9cy of concrete of concrete Database Tables Document Format Printed Ticket Document Tag Description Source Field DATLAB Ticket Date Current Date n a CUSNAM Customer Name ORDR CUST_NAME DELVQY Delivered Quantity TKTL ORDER_DELV_QTY DELUAB Delv Qty UOM Abbreviation UOMS DELV_QTY_UOM 8 9 05 COMMANDseries comes with an extensive set of do
222. ect This information is used as a default to the corresponding fields on customers orders and tickets subsequently created for the project To define project distribution information 1 From the Projects screen select the Distribution tab Quotes gt Quotes gt Projects gt New Detail gt Distribution or Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Projects gt Distribution Projects Distribution Tab EDTPROJJ Main Addresses Pricing Accounting Invoicing Distribution User Fields Distances Product Project Type E Stage E Map Page A Estimated Travel Time s Truck Poll Type Do Not Poll Y Update Project Map Coordinates Update Order Map Coordinates Concrete Copy to All Default Order Type Regular Sale Y Scheduled Plant Code lh BHMPLT Truck Type sl Ip REAR Delivery Method gt 2 Company Tracking Order Color Fm Print Mix Weights on Ticket 2 The Project Type and Stage fields are not currently used functionality for these fields will be added in future releases of COMMANDseries 3 If necessary enter the Map Page on which the delivery address is located This code can be printed on the delivery ticket so that the driver can look up the specified page in the map book 4 Enter an Estimated Travel Time to use as a default for scheduling all orders associated with this project Note If a project has both estimated travel times and a map page with travel times then w
223. ect an option from the Aggregate Ticketing Order Copy Option field Do not copy any orders The user must manually specify an order Copy standing orders If the truck last hauled on a standing order and that order is still active that standing order will be copied and the truck ticketed on that copy If there is no active standing order the user will have to manually assign an order code Copy all orders The system will automatically copy the last order the truck hauled and dispatch ticket the truck to that order This field addresses auto ticketing functionality The previous field addresses manual dispatch ticketing 12 If some of your plants are configured for auto ticketing you may want a different order copy rule in place for them Select the option from the same choices in the Auto Ticketing Order Copy Option field 13 If the Enhanced Order Suggestion in Aggregate Ticketing field is set to Disable then the system will copy not copy based on the value of the Aggregate Ticketing Order Copy Option field If the field is set to Enable then the system will display a message box prompting the dispatcher weighmaster to select an appropriate option 14 When an auto ticketing lane is configured as a tare gross lane the system must be able to distinguish between a loaded truck to be ticketed and an empty one to be tared This is accomplished through the Truck Minimum Weight over Tare for Gross field Enter a value
224. ects during order entry 11 Restrict customer lookup to company is useful in a multi region system The field is enabled by selection the Maintain Credit by Comapny option Configuration Receivables Each customer can be assigned a default pricing plant which is itself assigned to a company When a valid company is entered customer lookups will only return customers associated with the specified company Note At this point in the file build process neither system configurations nor companies have been entered To activate this option you must return to the Users screen later in the process 12 Suppress Minimum Load Charge Messages in Tickets will not give the user the option to dismiss a minimum load charge on a load The charge will be applied automatically If this box is left unchecked then when a qualifying load is ticketed box a dialog box will ask the user to confirm the charge 13 Suppress Season Charge Message in Tickets will not give the user the option to dismiss a seasonal charge on a load The charge will be applied automatically If this box is left unchecked then when a qualifying load is ticketed box a dialog box will ask the user to confirm the charge 14 Suppress Display of Pricing Information Messages If an item s price is being drawn from the item file rather than the customer file the system will display the message in the message line instead of in a dialog box 15 Auto Display Instructions
225. ed this checkbox causes the minimum haul charge to be applied to this customer if the calculated haul charge is less than the calculated minimum haul charge A charge table is assigned to each aggregate order each charge table has an associated minimum haul charge Mark the Allow Automatic Price Adjustments checkbox if necessary This checkbox established the default value for the Allow Automatic Price Adjustments field on any items added to the project Changing this field will not effect any items already entered in the project Manage gt Application Management gt Calculate Price Change Click the Quoted Pay button the Quoted Cartage Rates screen appears See the Quoted Cartage Rates section for more information Select a Tax Code for the project Specify if the project is Taxable or Non taxable in the Taxable field If the project is non taxable select the Details button To display the Project Taxing Details screen Project Taxing Detail screen EDTPROJ9 i Project Taxing Details ABC Pick a Non Taxable Reason Enter the Tax Exempt ID to record the tax exempt ID or certificate number for each tax authority level Accept the Project Taxing Details screen 31 Select the Compute Max Tax based on Life of Project if neccessary The system default is to calculate max tax established at the Tax Authority Location by invoice 32 Accept the screen to save the project or proceed to the Distribution
226. ed when invoices are created to determine the following aspects of invoicing Number of orders and tickets included on a single invoice Sub totals to be printed on the invoice Level of detail printed for items and tickets Business for single or multiple days on a single invoice Customers included in the invoice run based on assigned frequency code To enter project invoicing information 1 From the Project screen select the Invoicing tab Quotes gt Quotes gt Projects gt New Detail gt Invoicing or Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Projects gt Invoicing 8 9 05 9 Projects Invoicing Tab EDTPROJI Main Addresses Pricing Accounting Invoicing Distribution Distances Products Forecast Print One Invoice Per Order x j Sort and Sub Total By None M j Print Products Tickets Detail y Invoice Frequency Daily x j Copies to Print 1 Haul Charges Print haul charge as separate line tem x j Minimum Haul Charges Print total minimum haul charge x j Separate Invoices by Product Line From the Print One Invoice Per field s list define the contents of printed invoices This field selects and groups tickets and orders into a single invoice for the project Depending on your selection in the Print One Invoice Per field the following three fields appear or disappear Select the settings based on these values Sort and Sub Total By allows you to select the criteria by whi
227. eductions deductions to be applied to the cartage transactions of a hauler truck or driver over time To enter quoted deductions 1 Go to the Quoted Deductions screen Files gt Cartage Information gt Quoted Deductions Quoted Deductions EDTCTDT FA Quoted Deductions Enter a Hauler Code Truck Code Driver Code or any combination thereof Select a Deduction Code for the transaction The Rate Period defaults from the Default Amount field in the deduction record The Maximum Amt also defaults from the deduction record Both fields can be adjusted as needed 8 9 05 If you are editing a deduction rate and want to enter it as a percentage of the balance mark the Percent checkbox Enter the total Balance to deduct from the hauler truck or driver This is the target amount for the quoted deduction In the Current Balance field enter the total amount of deductions remaining for the hauler truck or driver This field will be updated as cartage charges and payments are processed Select the Add Occurrence button to add another row of deduction information When finished accept the Quoted Deductions screen 8 9 05 Customers and Projects This section provides information on entering customer and project information Topics in this section Sales Analysis Codes Customers Projects Fixed Delivery Pricing Payment Forms Sales Analysis Codes The sales analysis codes give you a means of clas
228. eduled Load Size amount the truck usually carries for this type of truck If necessary use the detail button to select a unit of measure 8 9 05 173 6 Enter an average Job Wash Time for this type of truck This value determines the amount of time after the end unloading time status and the to plant time status 7 Enter the Truck Tarp Time specifying the default job washdown time in minutes for this truck type This estimate is used when scheduling an order using this truck type It determines the amount of time after the end unloading time status and the to plant time status 8 Enter the Unload Time This field specifies the default unload time fora full load in minutes for this truck type This estimate is used when scheduling an order using this truck type if an unloading rate is not specified 9 If the truck is an aggregate truck in an overhead loadout environment you can use the Number of Drops field to achieve greater control over truck loading Enter the number of drops maximum of 6 necessary to fully load the truck An equal number of Percent Drop fields will activate immediately below Spread the lad across the loads as necessary These values will be sent to the loading interface when the truck is ticketed 10 Accept this screen to store the Truck Type data Trucks Information regarding trucks including assigned drivers assigned plants and truck tracking defaults etc is assigned to trucks in the Truc
229. eduling screen to create default scheduling information for orders and tickets use the information in Times 4 From the Load Time Usage field s list select how the load status is to be treated in all scheduling functions for this plant Loading indicates that the load status time is from when the loading was started Loaded indicates that the load status time is from when the loading was finished 5 Enter the On Job Wash Time to indicate the average time in minutes required to wash the truck 6 Enter the Default Number of Trucks This field designates the number of trucks or fleet size assigned to this plant It is used to default the fleet size on a daily basis for scheduling purposes on the Orders and Tracking amp Scheduling screens for orders and tickets 7 Enter the Specified Plant Capacity to indicate the maximum cubic meters that can be batched per hour 8 Enter the Current Plant Capacity to indicate the number of cubic meters actually being batched per hour Plant Costs Setup Plant costs information is used by the COMMANDexecutive reporting module to generate contribution and gross margin reports 166 8 9 05 To set up plant costs information From the Plants screen select the Costs tab Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants gt Costs Plants Costs Tab EDTPLNT5 Main Communication Batching Scheduling Costs Cost Per Quantities Administration 349 Sales 142 Dispatch
230. een select the Batching tab Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants gt Batching Plants Batching Tab EDTPLNT3 Maximum Batch Size 10 00 cuyds Mixer Time 3 Seconds Batch Interface Polling Sleep Time 1 Minutes Upload Weights from Batch Interface 7 Update Batchwatcher IV Adjust Mix by Ticket TI Weighed Water Trim Percent Accelerator 100 000 Z Hot Water 100 000 Air 100 000 Super Plasticizer 100 000 Z 2 Select a Maximum Batch Size This is the maximum size allowed for any single batch of ready mix concrete product at the plant 3 Enter the Mixer Time This is the time in seconds to allow for the plant s mixer drum operation per one yard or meter of ready mix concrete 4 Enter the Batch Interface Polling Sleep Time in minutes which the COMMANDcomm process sleeps or waits before polling the batching computer for actual weight information 5 Mark the Upload Weights From Batch Interface checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox causes the batching system to update or send back actual weights for each ticket produced You must have a two way batch interface in order to use this feature 6 Mark the Update Batchwatch to enable coping batch weight information to ConAd This field will not be active unless ConAd is in the system license 7 Mark the Adjust Mix by Ticket checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox causes weights for constituent products to be sent w
231. elds in COMMANDseries These fields provide a means of customizing COMMANDseries without requiring changes to the program To enter user defined fields configuration 1 From the Configuration screen select the User Fields tab Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt User Fields 8 9 05 155 Configuration User Fields Tab EDTCNFXO Receivables Aging Statements Financials Projects Quotes Lien Optimization j Field Prompt Field Types 01 Usage Code Orders D Ir ickets D Customers D D Al 02 Customer Spec Orders Tickets Customers gt H Al ale 03 OC Approval Items Y v D D Al 04 Maintenance Contact Plants zl El ES E LE Ad 05 Biling Contact Customers Projects z J z Hae 2 Inthe Field Prompt fields enter the desired title of the prompt This is the label that will display next to the field 3 Associate the field with a file group in the Field Types fields When the screens in the Field Types field are accepted during every day use of the application the question in the Field Prompt field is asked of Orders user For example in the screen capture example above when the Orders screen is accessed fields for Usage Code and Customer Spec are added to the Other Order Information screen The third question QC Approval does not display because it is not set at the Items level 4 Accept the User Fields Configuration screen to save the new user fields Optimizat
232. elds in the configuration file that deal with the COMMANDreceivables application These fields provide a means of customizing COMMANDreceivables without requiring changes to the program To enter receivables configuration information 1 From the Configuration screen select the Receivables tab Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Receivables 8 9 05 149 Configuration Receivables Tab EDTCNFXI WW Configuration m F Statements Financials Projects Quotes Lien User Fields System Defaults Distribution Dispatch Agaregate Invoicing Inventory Receivables Discount Grace Days 5 4 Discount Method jaooo Chargeback Discount Adjustment Code gt Jia INVADY G L Source Code JGL GAL Quantity G L Source Code sl Pu Pu Tax on Discount Non tax Reason Code gt ER Gov t Receipts Format Group Code RECEIPT RECEIPT Receipts Next Number Sequence Code gt D cM Maintain Credit by Company V Use Cutoff Date for Subtransactions Trial Balance Options Net Revenue Options Summary Report Line Spacing Post Date Code JAgingDate zl bh Print Discount Available IV Invoice a Print Zero Items MV Balance Forward Z Finance Charge x Enter the number of Discount Grace Days and select a default Discount Method The discount method can be changed at the customer project and order level Enter a Chargeback Adjustment Code for invalid discounts Select a G L Source Code and Quantity G L Source Cod
233. elve is recommended 4 Edit the Short description of the condition This description will generally be the same as the Condition Code or an abbreviation of the Description This short description is used in reports in areas where the full description will not fit 5 The Estimated Minutes field is currently unused In future releases of COMMANDseries it will enable users to link default time values to certain conditions and tasks For example when a driver punches his Lunch Out button on the signaling unit not only would the truck token change color to reflect that the driver is on lunch but the token s timer will automatically be set to the number of minutes allowed for lunch making it easier for the dispatcher to predict when the driver should be available again For the default conditions only Lunch allows the user to enter an Estimated Minutes value That field will be available on all user created conditions 6 Select a Color code or press lt Enter gt in the Color field to get a list of available colors Select the color you wish to be associated with a condition The Tracking amp Scheduling screen is limited to sixteen colors Be judicious 8 9 05 195 in selecting conditions for color tagging Moreover very dark colors result in truck tokens that are illegible 7 If so desired enter a Flag for the condition The selected flag will be displayed on the Tracking and Scheduling screen at the far right of the tru
234. en to store this minimum load charge table Seasonal Charges The Seasonal Charges screen allows users to assign price increases according to a season Seasons are defined by specific dates and the price increase associated with the season can be applied to single products or all products After defining a seasonal charge the Orders screen allows users to apply the charge according to the order Dispatch gt Orders gt Pricing Also customers can be set up with default seasonal charges as a default by marking the Apply Seasonal Charge checkbox in the Customer File Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers gt Pricing Seasonal charges can also be assigned using Sundry Charges To enter a new seasonal charge 1 Go to the Seasonal Charges screen Files gt Item Information gt Seasonal Charges Seasonal Charges EDTSCHG m Seasonal Charges EN Seasonal Charge T able 2 Description winter summer service US ss Short Descr rte S Active Range Dua thu Blo Item Code x j2 winter Svc cy Unit of Measure sl 40003 Eubie Ya Price 600 2 Enter a Seasonal Charge Table code to identify the new seasonal charge table 3 Enter information in the Description and Short description fields to describe the seasonal charge table 4 Enter a range of dates for this seasonal charge to apply in the Active Range fields 5 Select a Product Code to which the seasonal charge applies If appl
235. eneral ledger at the chosen level of summarization Without a summarization the account records and prints all of the details of each transaction Caution If you are using the COMMANDseries G L Distribution Data Out routine make sure that your summarization option is relfected in your Data Out document format Select an Account Type see Account Types for more information Enter either a plus sign or a minus sign in the Normal Sign field based on whether the account normally has a debit or a credit balance In the Source Codes fields enter the sources that can be used to post transactions to this general ledger account Press lt Enter gt in each field to open a list of possible source codes Note This field restricts the COMMANDseries functions that can post to a given account Select a summarization code for each source code that you enter Press lt Enter gt in the field that appears beside the source code field to open a list of possible summarization codes Mark the Limit Cost Centers checkbox if you want only specific cost centers to enter and post transactions to this account When the box is marked fields appear below allowing entry of applicable cost center numbers Add new cost center fields by selecting on the Add Occurrence button at the end of each line Accept the Account Code screen to record the current data and clear the form allowing entry of another account code 8 9 05 G L Booking Codes
236. er a new cartage rate equation 1 Go to the Cartage Rate Tables screen 2 Enter a Cartage Rate Code to identify the new cartage rate 3 Enter a Description and Short description for the cartage rate 4 Select Custom user defined from the Rate Type field s pull down menu Custom Setup EDTCTRT1 Main Range Equation Default Rate J Effective J Previous Rate Rate UOM gt Cartage Type z Item Code gt J Minimum Pay Option X j Additional Per Load Amount 5 Enter the Default Rate for the table The date of the change will default If you change an existing rate the old rate will move to the Previous Rate field The rate can be incorporated into the equation 6 Enter the Rate UOM for the rate table 7 Set the Cartage Type as Payment A Caution While other options are present custom cartage rates are only supported for hauler pay 8 Select a haul charge Item Code This code will appear on the customer invoice it is used to define the taxability of the cartage rate table and for determining where to book GL entries The Item Code must be set up prior to setting up the Cartage Rate Table 9 Ifthe Cartage Type is either Payment or Both the Minimum Pay Option field will display This field gives you a number of options to establish a minimum payment regardless of load size or clock time The options are 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 No Minimum Charge Minimum Pay Amount
237. ercent this is the same as Prox Percent but there are two date ranges i e for invoices dated ist 15th or 16th 31st Regular Per Unit this is the same as Regular Percent but two discount amounts i e per yard meter ton etc not percents are available These two terms calculate the due date and discount date as a number of days past the invoice date Prox Per Unit this is the same as Prox Percent but one discount amount i e per yard meter ton etc not percent is available These two terms calculate the discount date as a specific day of the month following the invoice month Double Prox Per Unit this is the same as Double Prox Percent but a discount amount not a percent is available NEOM Percent Non End of Month NEOM Percent allows a prox term due date for non end of the month closing This permits computing a due date for next month or the month after next depending on the range 1 or 2 in which the invoice date falls A discount percent is available NEOM Per Unit Non End of Month NEOM Per Unit is the same as NEOM but with a discount amount instead of percent Double Prox Percent Double Prox Per Unit NEOM Percent and NEOM Per Unit all calculate two discount dates based on the invoice date falling into two ranges If the invoice date falls into the first date range the discount date is set as a specific date in the same month as the invoice months If the invoice date falls into the second date ran
238. ercent for this tax location Note If the Current Rate field is left blank or is set to 0 00 then a non tax reason code must be entered Enter an Effective Date to specify when this tax rate takes effect If you are setting up a new tax authority enter a t to set the effective date for today If desired enter the tax s Previous Rate If the Current Rate is subsequently changes that value will automatically transfer to the Previous Rate field Some states and their related counties and cities have a maximum tax rule The rule states that taxes are applied on amounts up to a ceiling of taxable sales If this rule applies in your area enter the Max Tax Amount Note This amount is assigned to individual tax authority locations and is applied to orders for CODs and invoices for non CODs If a Max Tax Amount is entered a Non Taxable Reason code field will appear This field must be populated if a Max Tax is to be accepted by the system If the tax rate applies to all areas of the items including delivery accept this screen If not set the location as exempt from delivery taxes To set a tax location as exempt from delivery taxes 1 Mark the Delivery Exempt checkbox If selected this checkbox indicates that some portion of the taxable sales amount related specifically to ready mix concrete sold may be considered non taxable because it represents the portion of the price related to the delivery of the product In t
239. erif 8 Regular Message Line Font gt MS Sans Serif 8 Regular Tracking S cheduling Font gt CMDtracking 10 Port 8 Regular Edit Window Font gt Lucida Console 7 Regular Report Screen Font gt Lucida Console 9 Regular Large Button Font sl MS Sans Serif 20 Bold Case Manipulation on Edit Fields Uppercase on Short Fields Only l Data Manipulation on Edit Fields Auto Select Text When Focusing Field z 2 Select each font detail button to define the user specific font preferences 3 From the Case Manipulation on Edit Fields drop down list select one of the following options Case Accepted as Entered Uppercase on Short Fields Only Uppercase All Fields 4 From the Data Manipulation on Edit Fields drop down list select one of the following Auto Select Text when Focusing Fields Erase on First Input in Field 312 5 Proceed to the next tab or accept the screen Note To reset font defaults go to the Options menu from this screen and select Defaults Keys Preferences Setup The Keys preferences function allows you to assign forms within the COMMANDseries applications to lt Alt gt or lt Alt Shift gt function key combinations so that the form runs by entering the assigned keystroke This functionality exists even when you are in another form Thus the speed by which the desired form can be accessed is greatly increased To define key preferences 1 Goto the Keys tab on the Preferences screen Misc gt P
240. es Effective with version 5 57 7 COMMANDseries provides two different options for user verification Windows Security This options integrates COMMANDseries security with Windows security When a user launches COMMANDseries the program retrieves the current Windows username and validates it against the COMMANDseries User list If the Windows username matches a COMMANDseries user that user is automatically logged onto COMMANDseries No username password entry is required 8 9 05 COMMANDseries Standard Security After launching COMMANDseries you are prompted to enter a username and password Log In Screen Log In to COMMAND concrete SM User SYSTEM gt XXXXXX Password To log into COMMANDseries 1 Enter the assigned username in the User field the name is initially set by your CA service team and press lt Tab gt 2 Enter the assigned Password the password is initially set by your CA service team and press lt Tab gt The COMMANDseries application module opens Exiting COMMANDseries To exit a COMMANDseries application e Click the Exit button in the upper right portion of the screen gt x Or Press lt AIt F4 gt A screen appears which asks you to confirm that you want to close COMMANDseries click Yes Exit Window EI Are you sure you want to Close the application C Restart the application Close all forms and log on as another user Lal J Entering File In
241. es EDTTRUC Trucks EDTTRUC1 Main Tab EDTTRUC2 Scheduling Tab EDTTRUC3 Tracking Tab EDTTRUC4 User Defined Fields Tab EDTTRUC5 Truck Unavailable Tab EDTTRUC6 Truck Optimizer Tab EDTTSHD Tracking amp Scheduling Setup N A EDTTSHD1 Tracking Setup N A EDTTSHD2 Scheduling Setup N A EDTTSHD3 Rostering Setup N A EDTTSHDA Plant Setup N A EDTTSHDB Truck Type Setup N A EDTTSHDC Product Line Setup N A EDTTTYP Truck Types EDTUCHG Unloading Charges EDTUFIL Files Listing N A EDTUFLD Fields Function N A EDTUOMS Standard Units of Measure EDTUOMS1 Unit of Measure Options EDTUOMS2 Unit of Measure Conversions EDTUPRT Print Models EDTUSAG Usages EDTUSGE Usage Codes EDTUSNM User Names EDTUSNM1 Preferences Tab EDTUSNM2 Licenses Tab EDTUSNM3 Privileges Tab EDTUSNM4 Cost Centers Tab EDTUSNMS5 Order Printers Tab EDTUSNM6 Options Tab Form Name Screen Name Configuration EDTUSNM7 Plants Tab N A EDTUSNM8 GIM Manager Tab N A EDTUSNMA User Privilege Field List N A EDTUSNMB User Order Printer Setup N A EDTUSNMC User Confirm N A EDTUSNMD Communications Port Setup N A EDTVDPH Void Payments Batch Information N A EDTVDPH1 Void Payment Transactions Detail N A EDTVNDR Vendors EDTVNTY Vendor Types EDTZONE Zones N A Find or Lookup Forms FND Form Name Screen Name FNDBPRC Bid Price Calculator FND
242. es and their related counties and cities have a maximum tax rule Such a rule states that taxes are applied on amounts up to a ceiling of taxable sales The rules differ from state to state for calculating this total To set up tax authority locations 1 Select Files gt Sales Tax Information gt Tax Authority Locations Tax Authorize Locations EDTTAXL F Tax Authority Locations Bisi x Tax Authority xih STATE Tax Location 1 Description Alabama Short AL Tax Calculation Current Rate Effective Previous Rate Tax Rate 6 000 By 01 Jan 2000 J 5 500 Maximum Taxable Amount 5000 00 Non Taxable Reason gt 37 NTP k Calculate Tax on Discount Ready Mix Delivery Exemption JV Delivery Exempt Non Taxable Reason x 32 Dee Exm Exemption Type Dollar Amount X Exemption Rate ell 200 cuyds 2 Select a Tax Authority for the tax location The tax authority is set up on the Tax Authorities screen 3 Enter a Tax Location for the new tax location The tax location code uniquely identifies each tax location for the specified tax authority This code combined with the tax authority is used to access tax authority 8 9 05 10 location information in other programs It is also used to sort reports that contain tax authority related information Enter a long Description and Short description for the tax location In the Tax Calculation section enter a Current Rate from 0 000 percent to 100 000 p
243. es COMMANDseries security with Windows security has been developed to address the requirements of the U S Public Company Accounting Reform and Investor Protection Act of 2002 known as the Sarbanes Oxley Act SOx Process Flow This option allows COMMANDseries to use Windows security to provide seamless access to COMMANDseries 1 A User logs into Windows with a Username and Password 2 The user subsequently launches COMMANDseries No Username or Password entry is required COMMANDseries automatically tests the Windows Username against the COMMANDseries User file 3 If the Windows Username and COMMANDseries Username are identical COMMANDseries starts and the user is logged in If the Windows username does not exist as a COMMANDseries user an error is displayed Windows Username is not a valid COMMANDseries Username COMMANDseries will then close Note The user will not have the option to enter a COMMANDseries username amp password manually 4 Once in COMMANDseries the user has the privileges that are set up in the COMMANDseries Username for all COMMANDseries features Implementation The new password system is activated by a new form User Security Management Files System Information Users User Security Management Please note that the menu option for the Users editor has been moved into the new Users sub menu The new User Security screen EDTUSMG E User Security Management EES System Password Security
244. escription of the job source Click the Insert Occurrence button if necessary to add another job source 6 Accept the screen to save the job sources SE R Contacts Contacts are people that are associated with a job or a quote in some fashion they may be architects contractors owners even bank loan managers The primary reason to enter anyone in the system as a contact is because he or she may be able to provide that little bit of additional information that will allow you to make the most attractive bid possible Setting Up Contact Types Contact Types are categories of contacts Establishing Contact Type Codes allows you to save time during Contact entry by simply entering a contact code on the Contacts tab Contact Types should be established at the time of installation Note Contacts and Contact Types are available through the Files gt Contact Information menu This menu is only available if you are in the COMMANDgquote module To enter contact types 1 Goto the Contact Type Codes screen Files gt Contact Information gt Contact Types 8 9 05 5 Contact Type Codes EDTCTTY ii Contact Type Codes Subcontractor Ri The screen displays all contact types entered in your system You can enter new codes or edit codes already in existence Enter a Code to represent the contact type Enter a Description for the contact type Click the Add Occurrence button if necessa
245. ess on the Tracking screen If the field is left blank an asterisk will default 3 The Map Interface Type field has three options MapPoint 2001 2002 Thomas Bros Generic The generic interface was initially identical to the MapPoint interface As additional features are added to the MapPoint interface the generic interface will be left unchanged to provide map support for additional map programs Currently only the Tracer NET map program has been tested with the generic interface Note While COMMANDseries does nominally support MapPoint 2001 the most recent version of COMMANDmap was written specifically for MapPoint 2002 The remaining fields address the issue of updating job coordinates When a GPS enabled truck sends a Pour status back to base COMMANDseries will automatically poll the unit for updated coordinates This feature is initially configured using the following fields 4 Truck Poll Type This drop down setting determines what trucks will be polled The options are Do Not Poll Poll First Truck Poll Every Truck 146 879705 Note A corresponding field in order and project records is set based on this value allowing you to modify these values on a smaller scale Once polling returns updated coordinates information is updated based on three checkbox settings 5 Update Coordinates for Trucks in Progress Updates trucks en route to the site Updated coordinates are sent to the t
246. etermine if a period is open for transaction entry When a period is closed no further transactions can be made for dates within the period Also the periods define how data is collected and updated in the Customer History Table To set accounting periods within a year 1 Open the A R Accounting Periods screen Files gt General Information gt A R Accounting Periods 2 Inthe Accounting Year field enter the year for which you want to create accounting periods 8 9 05 109 A R Accounting Periods EDTARPD 3 A R Accounting Periods OR x Accounting Year 2005 Number of Periods hz Period Dates Start Date End Date Start Date End Date 01 Jan 2005 J3ivan 2005 M Open m 02005 31Ju 2005 M Open 01 Feb 2005 28 Feb 2005 M Open m 01 Aug 2005 31 Aug 2005 M Open 01 Mar 2005 31 Mar 2005 M Open fO1 Sep 2005 20 Sep 2005 M Open 01 Apr 2005 30 Apr 2005 M Open fov Oct 2005 Sinne M Open 01 May 2005 31 May 2005 M Open m 01 Nov 2005 30 Nov 2005 M Open 0T Jun 2005 f30Jun 2005 M Open BY 01 Dec 2005 m 31 Dec 2005 M Open Defaults 3 6 Enter the number of accounting periods you want for the specified accounting year in the Number of Periods field That number of Period Dates fields opens below Enter a start date and end date in the corresponding fields for each accounting period Note Select the Defaults button to automatically establish twelve accounting periods that
247. fine constituents information 1 Select the Constituents tab 2 The Cost Display Option drop down field defaults to Cost to This Product As each constituent is added the system will calculate the cost of that constituent based on the entered quantity The system maintains a running total of the cost of all constituents in the Total Mix Cost field The other cost display option changes the column to display the cost per order quantity Items Constituents Tab EDTIMSTE Main UOM Conversions Sales Tax Override Mix User Fields Locations Costs Prices Inventory Batching Batch Codes Constituents Location Code 1 SHELBY Cost to This Product mf S Constituent Product Quantity Cost CEMENT Cement T II Lbs 47000 b 18 33 Ad a FLYASH Fly Ash Lbs ll 7500 b 1 80 tta WATER Water G gt 34 00 ga 0 03 SAND Sand Lbs 119000 b 5 07 AA gt Total Mix Cost 33 5 fel El Cop Toal 3 In the field at the top right of the screen indicate whether this is a Constituent Product or a Cost to This Product 4 Under the Constituent Product field enter a code for the product or press lt Enter gt to select a code from the Possible Items screen 5 Enter the Quantity held in inventory at the indicated location 6 Select the Copy to All button if you want to copy this information to all locations 7 Accept the screen or proceed to the next tab as Caution Copying constituent information to all locations wi
248. for the Primary Secondary and Temporary Ticketing Device from the fields list 13 Click the Primary Ticketing Device Setup button to go to the Plant Communication Setup screen Plant Communication Setup EDTPLNTA W Plant Communication Setup 1 Plant Copy Manager Number 2 Port Name LPT1 Selective Address 2 Auto Dial Flag 14 Enter a Manager Number to represent the manager number that COMMANDcomm will use to communicate The manager number can be 8 9 05 169 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 found in the properties file of COMMANDcomm highlight the COMMANDcomm icon and press lt Alt Enter gt Enter an LPT or COM Port Name or select the proper printer from the field s list If a COM port is entered in the first field the second field becomes the Port button Select the button to setup the printer or modem that COMMANDcomm will use to print orders Communication Port Setup EDTPLNTD m Communcation Port Setup 00005 EN Baud Rate I m d Data Bits fj r Y H Parity None Stop Bits fr j Flow Control Xon Xoff E Note The Communication Port Setup screen requires that the settings match the configuration of the printer or modem If you wish to print orders to a device that has already been set up within Windows select that device from the pull down menu The Prompt option can also be selected if you wish to allow the user to select the device at each print command Enter a Select
249. formation Once inside the application you will find that most of the screens used to enter information are located in the Files menu The Files Menu Dispatch Invoicing Files Manage Misc Help Customer amp Project Information gt ltem Information Plant amp Delivery Information Sales Tax Information General Information System Information wp s p sp s Master File Data In Master File Data Out Automated Data In Out Note The menu options under the Files menu vary from module to module If for example you want to create or modify A R accounting periods you need to be in either COMMANDinvoicing or COMMANDreceivables A R Accounting Periods will not be an option if you are in COMMANDconcrete Accessing Help There are several ways to access the online Help while working in COMMANDseries e For help specific to the screen in which you are currently working press lt Ctrl F1 gt or click the Screen Help icon on the toolbar e For help with the functions of the keyboard press lt Shift F1 gt or click the Keyboard Help icon on the toolbar e From any COMMANDseries application click on the Help menu located on the far right of the COMMANDseries menu bar Select a specific help function such as Screen Help Keyboard Help Contents How to Use Help or the About window From the COMMANDseries Program Group in the Windows menu select the COMMANDseries Help icon Customer Lookup Many COMMANDseries proced
250. g Inventory Receivables Aging Statements Financials Projects Quotes Lien User Fields Company Code Length Cost Center Lenath Account Code Length Sub Account Code Length Number of Budgets Budgets Round To passa Z Multiple Companies 2 Enter a Company Code Length between 1 4 3 Enter a Cost Center Length between 4 12 Cost Center codes must begin with their associated Company Code Therefore the Cost Center Length must be greater than the Company Code Length 4 Enter an Account Code Length between 1 6 5 Enter a Sub Account Code Length between 1 6 6 If you will be using Multiple Companies in your account structure mark the checkbox 7 Accept the screen Note The Number of Budgets and Budgets Round To Fields are artifacts of an older COMMANDseries module and are not required Caution These settings can be entered on this screen only once After initial entry code lengths can only be changed by using the Realign Accounts and Cost Centers function Companies Companies represent business entities and are used to group plants for various reports in all applications Large clients may want to use the Companies function to group and organize their plants and operations but smaller clients may want to enter just one company If hauling companies deliver your items for you enter those companies here for use in COMMANDcartage Topics in this section Company Setup Company Cost Centers Setup Comp
251. g field to be displayed on the Tracking and Scheduling screen when this inbound message is received Dw 8 9 05 73 7 Click on the Sound button if you want a sound to be played upon reception of this inbound message If you select this button the Sound window displays Sound Sound GIS File name Folders x way c windows Cancel a E cs Ceci Ss WINDOWS All Users Application Data CATROOT COMMAND List files of type Drives Ja Files D c HARD DRIVE D Network 8 Locate and select the file with a wav extension then click the Open button to accept and return to the Incoming tab 9 Accept the screen to save incoming messages information Signaling Unit Outgoing Messages The Outgoing tab on the Signaling Units screen allows you to define messages for certain events The signaling unit will receive these messages To set up outgoing messages for the signaling unit 1 Select the Outgoing tab from the Signaling Units screen Files gt General Information gt Signaling Units gt Outgoing 2 Enter a Code and the Outbound Message Text to accompany it Signaling Units EDTSIGU3 Options Incoming Outgoing Statuses EI a bi SESE Lelelelelele Outbound Message Text Return Plant Event Format Name Press Button gt z E d JRetum Same Plant gt z E d Call Dispatch gt E x Call when Loaded gt El d wash Truck gt
252. ge the discount date is set as a specific date in the month following the invoice month Entering Terms Codes Examples The following three procedures walk you through the remaining steps involved in setting up a terms code Locate the procedure for the type you chose in the Terms Type field and follow its steps to successfully complete the process If you chose Regular Percent or Regular Per Unit as the terms type 1 This step is dependent upon the term s type If the terms type is Regular Percent Mark the Delivery Exempt checkbox if necessary When marked this field indicates that as defined by the Exemption Type and Exemption Rate fields a portion of the sales amount is exempt from the calculation of a discount Select an Exemption Type from the field s list Enter an Exemption Rate for the exemption type 8 9 05 T21 Regular Percent Terms Type Regular Percent EZ Dollar Amount E ll 3300 If the terms type is Regular Per Unit select the Per Unit UOM that should be applied 2 Enter the number of days or day of month used to compute the discount date for this terms code in the Discount Date To Be field 3 Enter the Due Date To Be the number of days from the invoice date to be used to compute the due date 4 This step is dependent upon terms type If the terms type is Regular Percent enter the percent to discount for the terms code in the Discount Percent Is field For terms typ
253. ght of the trailer If necessary use the detail button to select the appropriate unit of measure 3 Enter the date and time the tare weight was taken in the Tare Date and Time fields 4 Enter the Days Tare Valid 5 Select the Tare Type Apply Manually or Apply Automatically 6 Accept the Trailers screen to save the new trailer information Trailer Overhead Loadout Setup To enter trailer overhead loadout information 1 Select the Overhead Loadout tab on the Trailers screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Trailers gt Overhead Loadout 180 Trailers Overhead Loadout tab EDTTRLR4 Hauler Scheduling Tare Overhead Load Out Number of Drops E Percent Drop 1 J 33 000 Percent Drop 2 34 000 Percent Drop 3 J 33 000 Percent Drop 4 Percent Drop 5 Percent Drop 6 2 Enter the Number of Drops generally needed to fill the trailer 3 The corresponding number of Percent Drop fields will become active By default the percentage for each will be roughly the same the distribution can be edited manually 4 Accept the screen Delivery Methods The Delivery Methods function allows users to define multiple methods of aggregate product delivery for use in the COMMANDaggregate Ticketing functions Aggregate companies typically support F O B orders when the customer picks up the aggregate product s The Delivery Methods function allows user defined detail for variations of these two scenarios To set
254. gory fs INDUST E Pricing Plant Code lh SHELBY Trade Discount Percent _ Cartage Rate T able Trade DiscountAmount 000 Override Charge Rate Terms Code 2 2 A0th Override Charge Effective Date mp 7 Zone Code noo z1o00 Previous Rate pooo Surcharge Code ll d Z Apply Zone Charges Restrict Orders to Customer Products Print Prices on Ticket Iw Apply Minimum Haul Charges Allow Price Change in 0 E x IV Allow Automatic Price Adjustments Quoted Cartage 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 Select a Terms Code The terms code dictates the discount date due date and discount amount assigned to invoices Select a Zone Code This field identifies the zone where deliveries are normally made to the customer If the majority of the customer s deliveries are not made to a single zone leave this field blank Select a Cartage Rate Table and a Surcharge Code if the product line for this item is aggregate Enter an Override Charge Rate This charge will be used instead of the normal charge Enter the date this charge will be effective in the Override Charge Effective Date field When the Override Charge Rate is changed the old rate is automatically transferred to the Previous Rate field Select a code from the list in the Surcharge Code field In the Rate field enter the rate for the surcharge Mark the Apply Zone Charges checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox causes the selected zone charge t
255. gregate Ticketing screen 13 Proceed to the next tab or accept the screen Sound Preferences Setup This tab allows users to configure COMMANDseries to play Windows sound files WAV files at certain COMMANDseries events To define sound preferences 1 Click Misc gt Preferences gt Sounds Preferences Sounds Tab SYSPREF3 m Preferences lel E General User Sounds Colors Tracking Fonts Keys Toolbar Forms Startup File sl C wINDOWS SYSTEM PITONGUN WAV A Shutdown Fie Jp Help File gt Message File v Mail File CR 2 Select a sound file for all desired COMMANDseries events Available events are as follows Startup File the sound that plays when COMMANDseries initiates Shutdown File the sound that plays when COMMANDseries is exited Help File the sound that plays when COMMANDseries On line Help is activated Message File the sound that plays when a message dialog box appears Mail File the sound that plays when a message is received from another COMMANDseries application 3 Click on the Test button to listen to the selected sound 8 9 05 309 Color Preferences Setup The Colors Preferences tab allows you to change the colors that are used to display the various parts of the screen in your COMMANDseries applications such as windows available and unavailable screen fields bright fields and invisible fields Also user defined colors tracking colors and scheduling
256. gs associated with the specified Document Type 4 Enter a Description for the tag 5 Select Field as the Tag Type 6 Select the File from which you want to pull data The drop down list will display all files tables available to the specified Document Type 7 Select the Field Name that corresponds to that data that the tag will represent The drop down list displays a list of fields contained in the selected File Note If the File and Field Name fields do not appear then you have selected a Document Type for which you cannot create new tags 8 Click the Setup button to further define the document tag The Document Field Tag Setup screen displays Document Field Tag Setup EDTDOCT1 9 If the field has occurrences for each product line for example the Customer file contains separate Discount Terms for concrete and aggregate select Multi occurrence Field to ensure that the program determines the applicable product line before retrieving the field value 10 If the field will be used for sorting results such as Customer Codes select Key Formatted Value to ensure proper sorting Key Formatted Values are formatted as follows Numeric values will be right justified unless the value contains leading zeros Alphanumeric values and numeric values with leading zeroes will be left justified 11 Accept the Document Field Tag Setup and the Document Tags screens 8 9 05 To enter a lookup document tag 1 Go to the Do
257. gt Item Information gt Locations Plants To set up the plants to be used to price products and to schedule and ship deliveries Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants Haulers To establish external people companies that perform deliveries Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Haulers Truck Types To establish the types of trucks represented in the fleet Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Truck Types Trucks To set up the actual trucks in the d d d d d fleet Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Trucks Trailers JY JY To set up trailers that may be loaded and weighed separate from trucks Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Trailers Delivery V S To set up delivery methods to be Methods assigned to orders Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Delivery Methods Auto S To set up auto ticketing units Ticketing and characteristics for interfaces Units Files gt General Information gt Auto Ticketing Units 8 9 05 15 System Information aa PO lt Qm AD gt lt m 0 CO ar Purpose Map Page Time Periods To establish the intervals of time to be used to record estimated and actual travel times between plants and map page locations Files gt General Information gt Map Page Time Periods Map Pages To set u
258. h to specify more search criteria place your cursor in the next field to the right of the number 2 If not accept the screen and proceed to step 6 5 You can specify up to 10 criteria When you are finished accept the data you have selected 6 The Choices screen will display the customers that match your criteria 7 When you have located the customer either double click or highlight the desired customer and press lt Enter gt to accept The Choices screen will close and the selected customer code will be entered into the form The Calendar Use the Calendar feature in COMMANDseries to simplify date entries You can use it whenever you see the Calendar button The Calendar button will usually be found next to the Date field You can also invoke the calendar by pressing lt Enter gt when the cursor is in a Date field Keystroke Function lt Tab gt Advances one day lt Shift Tab gt Backs up one day Left Right Arrow Previous Week Next Week lt PgUp gt lt PgDn gt Previous Month Next Month lt Ctrl R gt Invokes the Calendar Keystroke Function lt F11 gt Searching toggle lt F2 gt Closes the Calendar File gt Search Searches for a month Five Important Functions COMMANDseries has a wide variety of tools and commands and new users can easily find themselves overwhelmed by the different options Despite the large number of options four commands will serve you in most situations The lt Tab gt Key Accept
259. haracters in each code Following these simple guidelines will ensure that your files are properly organized and can be readily accessed Caution It is highly advisable to work out coding conventions prior to data entry Doing so helps ensure the usability of your codes Comm Managers COMMANDseries uses a program called COMMANDcomm to monitor various tyes of comminications ticket printing at a plant automated data out routines etc Different instances of COMMANDcomm are needed to manage different processes A single instance of COMMANDcomm is referred to as a Comm Manager Each comm manager is assigned an identifying number that number allows COMMANDseries to know what comm manager is used for a given routine The number is specified at the process autoticketing setup for example and the comm manager command line It is possible to have a lot of comm managers running on a single system As a result it is critical to maintain a master list of all comm managers running on your system Each Comm manager should be documented as follows e Computer Name what computer is running the comm manager e Manager Number Manager Function Ticket printer for plant 2 for example This list will greatly aid troubleshooting and maintenance How to Use This Document Locating What You Need This section provides guidance for you to more easily locate information within our manuals Contents Use the Contents as an outline for the
260. he bottom of the screen Two other functions are affected by the Use Multiple Customer Codes option in COMMANDseries The customer information in both the Orders screen and Tickets screen is automatically associated with the shipping customer that has been defined in the Projects file On the Edit Orders and Tickets screen the customer information is associated with the billing customer defined in the Projects file Specify whether the system is to Use Standard Pricing or Use Content Pricing Sack Pricing in the Pricing Method field If you select the Use Standard Pricing option for the pricing method prices are assigned to each individual product by pricing plant and or pricing category If you select Use Content Pricing option for the pricing method concrete prices are calculated from a base product s price based on the difference in the content factor for the specific product and the base product This field will eventually specify which item to use for customary content in the Customary Content Item Code field and which item to use for metric content in the Metric Content Item Code field Note These two item code fields are not filled in at this time as items have not yet been created Please see Appendix E for a complete description of configuring content pricing Accept the screen to save the system information 130 Defaults Configuration The information entered on the Defaults Configuration screen standardizes your CO
261. he field Therefore the specific length can be provided for as opposed to the total length of the field e String fields that contain alpha numeric characters can be formatted with the length of the largest number of characters that might be stored in the field or just the number needed in the data out as opposed to the total length of the field e Numeric fields can be formatted with a standard adequate numeric mask i e e Boolean fields can be formatted with a length of one 1 X is input if the field is true and a space if it is false e Date fields can be formatted with a standard date mask i e DD MM YYYY e Time fields can be formatted with a standard time mask i e HH NN Ticket Printing and Ticket Data Out formatting Codes A single document format record determines the print format for tickets generated in the COMMANDconcrete application Multiple document formats can be maintained when individual and unique formatting is required for a single plant or for a group of plants The ticket format can be designed for a pre printed form or to print on plain paper Document formats allow for two types of information to be printed Literal fields text that remains constant on all forms printed Data fields information from the appropriate data files that varies from one form to the next Since tickets do not continue onto multiple forms all literal fields and data fields for the ticket are recorded on a s
262. he modem itself and not from the remote device these commands must also be included in this list if used as prefix codes ATH always returns OK unless there is a hardware problem with the modem so you would need to specify OK as the prefix response to the ATH prefix code 8 Use the Suffixes area to enter modem control code sequences that perform a shutdown action such as hanging up the phone line These sequences vary from modem to modem Consult your modem user s guide for more information 9 Inthe Timeout field enter the maximum allowed amount of time between the modem s transmission of any suffix control code sequence and the modem s reception of the correct answering control sequence from the device from which the modem is attempting to disconnect from The default is 0 indicating that no timeout is set so the modem waits indefinitely for a response Note The prefix information controls modem connection activity while the suffix information controls modem disconnection activity 10 In the Code field enter a specific modem control code sequence of alphanumeric characters that perform a particular shutdown action such as hanging up the phone line Up to nine suffix control codes may be specified for a particular modem 11 In the Response field enter a sequence of alphanumeric characters that COMMANDcomm expects to receive to indicate that the corresponding suffix code was successfully received and acknowledged by the
263. he new zone 3 Enter along Description and Short description for the zone 4 Select a plant to use as the default Scheduled Plant Code for non project orders using this zone 5 Select a Tax Code associated with this zone Select the Price Adjustment UOM for all price adjustment amounts 7 Enter a Plant Code to identify standard price adjustment amounts for this zone and associate price category adjustments for deliveries to this zone Entering sets the price adjustment s for all plants p 8 9 05 185 8 Enter the Price Category for this zone The default blank field is A11 9 Enter your zone travelling charge in the Price Adjust field 10 Use the Effective Date to set a time for the new rate to apply or enter t for today to immediately apply the price adjustment 11 Enter the Previous Price Adjustment for reference purposes if desired 12 Continue setting price adjustments for a specific plant s Set price adjustments for the price categories you have defined Files gt Item Information gt Price Categories 13 Repeat Steps 7 12 as necessary for other plants from which you deliver 14 Accept the Zone screen to save the zone and any price adjustments Note When entering zones for cartage you do not need to enter plant and rate information Just create the zones The rates will be set in the cartage tables Map Pages Map pages provide a travel time system that incorporates locations dictated b
264. hen an order is entered the Order Schedule Information screen will use the Map Page travel times The next three fields relate to Mobile Signaling 5 Select a Truck Polling Type The options are Do Not Poll The system will not ask for updated coordinates from GPS enabled trucks Poll First Truck When the first truck on an order signals Pouring status the system will poll the truck for updated GPS coordinates Poll Every Truck Every truck will be polled when it enters Pouring status 8 9 05 285 6 If Update Project Map Coordinates is selected the project will be updated with new coordinates 7 If Update Order Map Coordinates is selected the order will be updated with new coordinates The rest of the screen has information for different project lines Use the Product Line drop down field or the scroll bar to select individual product lines or select Copy to All to have the settings for one product line copied to the others 8 Enter the Scheduled Plant Code This will become the default plant from which materials for the project are delivered 9 If the customer needs a specific Truck Type enter the appropriate code 10 Indicate the default Delivery Method to be used for this project 11 If desired select the Tracking Order Color This field designates the color code to be used to display orders for this project on the Tracking and Scheduling screen Note In practical terms it is best not to assign a
265. hese fields required If no specific fields are configured the system still logs any changes made to new or changed orders For example if you record telephone conversations for records you may want to set up a required field such as phone station to log where the recorded conversation can be found The Purge Orders and Tickets function removes the information in the Order Change Log The Archiving Control checkboxes provide the ability to archive paid transactions for a period of time instead of purging the paid transactions and never being able to reference them again The Purge Archive A R Transactions function Receivables gt Manage gt Application Management gt Purge Archive A R Transactions is controlled by these settings Archive Paid Transactions option enables basic archive functionality When it is selected two additional options display Archive Sales Tax Distributions for Paid Transactions archives the STXD table Archive General Ledger Distributions for Paid Transactions archives the GLDT table The archive routine creates an identical set of tables for the information to be archived decreasing the size of the main tables that are constantly being accessed For example the ITRN table Invoice Transactions the STXD table Sales Tax Distribution and the GLDT table General Ledger Distributions are the tables you access on a daily basis The ITRN_9 STXD_9 and GLDT_9 tables store the archived information and a
266. his case the Non Taxable Exemption Type and Exemption Rate fields specify why and how much of the delivery price is non taxed Once the Delivery Exempt field is selected additional fields will display Select a Non Taxable Reason to define the tax exemption Select the Exemption Type Dollar Amount or Percentage for the tax exemption If you are exempting the delivery charge from taxation select Dollar Amount If the exemption type is Dollar Amount enter the dollar amount to exempt from taxation per measured amount the unit of measure should match the item If the exemption type is Percentage enter the percentage of the charge to exempt from taxation Accept this screen 116 Tax Codes The tax code unites all of the tax locations and their related authorities and allows them to be applied together to sales amounts Tax codes provide a single code associated with every possible taxation point Before entering tax code information gather information about the combinations of tax authority locations needed to handle your customers Note If interfacing to a batch panel numeric tax codes should be utilized using alphanumeric codes may cause a problem in batching To define a tax code 1 Goto the Tax Codes screen Files gt Sales Tax Information gt Tax Codes Tax Codes EDTTAXC m Tax Codes Oix Tas Code 3 Description Jefferson County Short J EFFCO Tax Authority Tax Location 1 STATE fi Alabama
267. i LTLMet Create Separate Invoice Seasonal Charge T able gt DH WINTRME Create Separate Invoice Unloading Charge Table gt 2 UNLD CY Create Separate Invoice Automatic Sundry Charges Create Separate Invoice Sundry Charge lb ENV M3 Create Separate Invoice Pricing lt Sundry Charge lf ENV CY Create Separate Invoice Pricin d 2 Select a Product Line against which specified charges apply for this customer 3 If you want your selections for one product line to be copied to the other product lines set the Copy to All flag 4 Enter Minimum Load Seasonal and or Unloading Charge Table codes if necessary to specify the table s to be used in each situation to calculate total charges Note The Minimum Load Charge line will only display if the product line is Concrete 5 Mark the Create Separate Invoice for each charge table to indicate that a separate invoice should be created for each table 6 There is a single Create Separate Invoice flag for all automatic Sundry charges that you may have configured 7 If you wish to add additional charges detail on a Sundry Charge field and select from the list of available charges 8 If you wish to use a different sundry charge rate than that specified in the sundry charge table press the Pricing button to display the Customer Sundry Charge Pricing screen Customer Sundry Charge Pricing screen EDTCUST5 D Customer Sundry Charge Pricing 2 AFTHR F
268. ields to enter a project specific phone number and any other related numbers such as fax or cellular Append a single letter suffix to each number to indicate what type of number it is for example you might enter 205 234 5436 F to indicate a fax number 10 The date the project was created will default into the Setup Date field 11 Enter a Begin Date and an Expiration Date to establish a time frame for the project The system will not accept project orders outside an established date range If no dates are entered the system will accept orders on the project regardless of the date 12 Accept the screen to save the project or proceed to the Addresses tab Entering Project Address Information The Addresses tab allows you to enter address information related to the customer s invoices and statements for this project The system allows for four different project addresses Delivery Address on the Main tab The default address for the project The system will use this address if more specific addresses are not available Invoice Prints out on all invoices for this project Statement Prints out on all statements printed for this project Shipping The shipping delivery address for all project orders The data is populated from the Job Address information from the Quote file To define project address information 1 From the Projects screen select the Addresses tab Quotes gt Quotes gt Projects gt New Detail
269. ies system or click on the field to reveal a drop down list with the following options English Dutch French German Greek Italian Spanish Canadian French Norwegian 5 Enter the Date Format to be used to display dates throughout the COMMANDseries system or click on the field to select from a list of acceptable date formats 6 Enter a Date Order or click on the field to select from a list of acceptable date orders 7 Enter a Century Date Cutoff or scroll to select a number The number entered in this field determines whether the system recognizes a two digit year as 19xx or 20xx For example if the number 70 is entered the system will recognize a year entry of 69 as 2069 and it recognizes a year entry of 71 as 1971 8 If you are using GPS tracking you may need to select a Coordinate Format Consult with your Command Alkon project manager to determine of what setting is appropriate for your needs 9 If necessary select a default Print Model This feature is particularly useful in systems witha large number of print models 308 10 Select the Only Allow This Print Model to restrict the user to the default model 11 The Dispatching Assigns Truck to Loading Status flag determines whether dispatching a truck will change its status 12 The Limit Aggregate Ticketing to Dispatch Only flag enables an aggregate operation to restrict a dispatcher to dispatch functions only This option allows the company to use just the Ag
270. ies the salesman assigned to the customer Sales reports and some COMMANDreceivables reports can be grouped by salesman 6 Proceed to the next tab or accept the screen to save the customer information 8 9 05 Customer Taxing Setup The Taxing tab allows you to enter the customer s tax information To define customer tax information 1 From the Customers screen select the Taxing tab Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers gt Taxing Customers Taxing Tab EDTCUSTD Main Addresses Sales Taxing Pricing Charges Accounting Invoicing Distribution User Fields Produc_4 Tax Code Taxable gt fi BHAM Non taxable j Non Taxable Reason gt Tas ID Code Tax Exempt ID Clint o 6 moo COUNTY STATE Select a Tax Code for the customer Specify if the customer is Taxable or Non taxable in the Taxable field If the customer is non taxable select a Non Taxable Reason The field will not display if the customer is taxable Enter the Tax ID Code and use the Tax Exempt ID to record the tax exempt ID or certificate number for each tax authority level Accept the screen Customer Pricing Setup The Pricing tab includes information related to trade discounting terms code assignment for payment discounts plant and price category assignment that control aspects of pricing and flags that control automatic pricing charges Customer pricing can be set by pr
271. if necessary When checked and a date is entered in the Ending Cutoff Date field only those subtransactions payments adjustments credit debit memos etc that are dated on or before the cutoff date are considered when computing the invoice s outstanding balance for the payment being entered Enter the Summary Report Line Spacing This field indicates the number of blank lines to be printed between each customer on the Summary Report option when running the Aged Trial Balance Reports gt Aged Trial Balance Mark the Print Discount Available checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox causes the total discount available to be printed when running the Detail Report Option on the Aged Trial Balance Reports gt Aged Trial Balance Mark the Print Zero Items checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox causes transactions with a zero balance to be printed when running the Detail Report Option on the Aged Trial Balance Reports gt Aged Trial Balance Otherwise they will be excluded from the report In the Net Revenue section select Transaction Date or Aging Date as the Post Date Code Using the checkboxes select which transaction types update the Net Revenue field in the customer history file If selected the amount of the transaction for the transaction type is posted to the Net Revenue field when the Post Transactions routine is performed The Net Revenue field is used on the Percentage Outstanding Report option when
272. ify the new minimum load charge table Enter a Description and Short description for the table as desired 4 Enter the Item Code for the small load charge item or detail on the field to select from a list Minimum load charges are added to a order ticket just like any other associated item Adding this item code to an order ticket attaches this minimum load charge table 5 Select a Unit of Measure for the table This dictates the unit of measure for the Load Qty fields The next three fields allow you to set up parameters to provide exmptions for large orders LA 6 Enter the Minimum Quantity based on the Order Delivered Quantity required to be shipped before any minimum load charge exempt loads are allowed on an order 7 Enter the Minimum Loads required to be shipped before any minimum load charge exempt loads are allowed on an order 8 Inthe Price Exempt Loads field enter the number of loads to be exempt from minimum load charges after the targets in either the Minimum Quantity or Minimum Loads fields have been met The rest of the form allows you to specify the various charges As the image shows you can break the charges down to small increments Most people however have a much smaller number of charge ranges 9 Enter a Load Qty and a corresponding monetary Charge This amount is added to loads that fall on the load amount or between the load amount and the previous amount 10 Accept the Minimum Load Charges scre
273. iguration X uuu s ENK sssssssamasanananaunasamaqapawawasuniasmansiwanwwamswa 127 Initial Systemi COnMQUPATION Q as ENKER SAAR ENNEN AANEREN aaa 128 Defaults Configuration AER 131 Defaults Config ration S tUP uuu ed en EE eet EM DEE 131 e RE E EE 132 Customer Sales Defaults Setup 133 Customer Taxing Defaults Setup NENNEN ENEE EEN 133 Customers Pricing Defaults Setup 134 8 9 05 5 Customer Charges Defaults Setup r 135 Customer Accounting Defaults Setup 136 Customer Invoicing Defaults Setup ENEE ENEE EEN 137 Customer Distribution Defaults Setup ENEE EEN 137 Distribution Configuration eer 138 Dispatch Configuration E 142 Aggregate Configuration EE 143 Signaling Configuration EE 146 nette ia Lee eut die CC e NEE 147 Inventory Configuration eet eet 148 Receivables Configuration ex A ECKER SEKR SKER NENNEN ENNEN ENKEN NEES EN REES 149 Receivables Aging Configuration ENEE EE 151 Receivables Statements Configuration NEEN EEN 152 Financials e aide TC e In SE 153 Projects Quotes Configuration rrsrsssssssssssssssssasaa 154 R scht Ur 155 User Fields Config rati n usus lur sasan asas usuakayuqaqkuywayayuy cqa qu apayaq anh ay wk uM CE 155 Optimization Configuration ieren 156 Plant amp Deli
274. iling displays a list of non printable characters CR LF etc which can be acknowledged as part the truck identification received from the mobile signaling system Mark the Automatic Signaling checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox causes that this truck to be moved automatically from one time status to the next based on the time factors in the appropriate order and plant records Accept the Trucks Information screen to save the new truck information Overhead Loadout To configure a truck for Overhead Loadout 1 Select the Tracking tab on the Trucks screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Trucks gt Tracking 8 9 05 177 Overhead Loadout EDTTRUC7 Main Scheduling Tracking Overhead Load Out User Fields Number of Drops D Percent Drop 1 33 000 Percent Drop 2 34 000 Percent Drop 3 33 000 Percent Drop 4 Percent Drop 5 Percent Drop 6 2 Enter the Number of Drops it should take to load the truck 3 The corresponding number of Percent Drop fields will become active By default the percentage for each will be roughly the same the distribution can be edited manually 4 Accept the screen Note The Overhead LoadOut tab will only appear if Overhead Load Out is in the system license Truck User Fields If your system has been configured for truck specific user fields you may edit those fields on the User Field tab For information about user fields see the syste
275. ill be charged the rate per hour that you specify for unloading the truck A rate hour field will appear when the checkbox is checked Select the Zones tab to specify prices according to the destination zone and plant of origin Cartage rates can be assigned to a zone from a plant or to a zone from a specific plant Cartage Rate Tables EDTCTRT3 Main Zones 001 001 001 001 Zone Code E E J2 J2 2002 j2 E 003 004 Plant Truck Charge Effective Previous Minimum Pay Effective Previous Minimum Code Type Rate Date Charge Charge Rate Date Pay Pay Gi bb ft ka 29 May 2004 4 25 Le 29 May 2001 4 45 alal CI bp f Jemp 29 May 2004 4 75 Lan 29 May 2001 4 50 a z be J 5 25 29 May 2004 5 00 515 29 May 2001 4 75 a CI be T J550 29 May 2004 0 00 5 40 29 May 2001 0 00 EI 22 E E Loop 29 May 2004 0 00 2 50 29 May 2001 0 00 d 23 E E J450 29 May 2004 0 00 J4 00 29 May 2001 0 00 A CA fe ft Jop 29May 2004 0 00 aso 29 May 2007 0 00 lt gt 8 9 05 16 Select a destination Zone to which a cartage rate should be assigned 17 Select an origin plant to which a cartage rate should be assigned Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants To apply the rate to all plants lt Tab gt through this field a will appear in the field this is a wildcard indicating all plants 18 Select the truck type to which this rate should
276. ill be subject to at least the minimum charge specified in the cartage table Enter an Override Charge Rate if necessary This rate will supplant the rate specified in the selected charge table If necessary select a Surcharge Code field Aggregate only If additional sundry charges are needed select the Add Occurrence button to the immediate right of the Surcharge Code field Mark the Apply Zone Charges checkbox if necessary Concrete only When marked this checkbox causes the selected zone s charge table to be levied against the customer s orders Mark the Allow Price Change in O E field if necessary This field determines access to non COD prices during Order Entry See Non COD Price Changes for additional information Mark the Print Prices on Tickets checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox causes prices to be printed on all delivery tickets for the customer Prices for C O D or cash delivery tickets are always printed Prices for charge delivery tickets are only printed when this checkbox is selected This field is also used to determine access to non COD prices during Order Entry See Non COD Price Changes for additional information Mark the Restrict Orders to Project Products checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox causes the Orders screen to allow only those products that are entered on the Project Products tab Mark the Apply Minimum Haul Charges checkbox if necessary Aggregate only When mark
277. ill recalculate a delivery schedule when a ticket is printed early or late The Require Order Qty on Non primary Products for Orders allows you to prohibit zero order quantities on extra and associated products The Default Schedule Adjustment Type determines what happens to the schedule for the remaining loads for an order It has no impact on the current ticket however The soon to be renamed Apply Schedule Adjustment Type determines what happens to the ticket times for the current ticket Use Schedule Adjustment Type if a ticket is printed early the ticket time sent to batch panel is the current time Depending on the batch panel configuration this setting can cause problems for customers who pre ticket because the ticket time reflects an updated schedule the ticket is going to be batched at the originally scheduled time you re just stacking it in advance Don t Use Schedule Adjustment Type The relevant ticket times that print on the ticket will reflect the original schedule not an updated one Select Dynamic Fleet Size to allow for changed in the fleet size during the course of business day Allow Dispatch to Activate Quotes enables users running the dispatch software to activate and ship based on quote records They system will generate a corresponding project Select the Use Shipping Address checkbox if you want to get a Shipping Address form instead of a generic zoom box when detailing on the Delivery Address fiel
278. ils of the overflow These lines are positioned directly below the Header 3 Enter the Number of lines in body of form View and adjust the form by clicking the Display button 5 Accept the Ticket Overflow Format Codes and the Document Format Group Codes screens File Import Export Format Codes Setup This screen is used to specify the various elements document formats that make up a file import export document Each of the elements must already be defined using the Document Format screen Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Format Groups gt Formats When setting up an invoice out document consider the type of printer the size of the type style font and the length of the form on which the statement will be printed to ensure that all desired information will fit in the space allowed on the statement 8 9 05 103 The information shown in the various elements of the file import export document is dependent upon the user defined setup of these documents in the Document Formats screen The Document Format Group Type field on the Document Format Group Codes screen should display one of the following Master File In Master File Out Order Out Ticket Out Order Ticket In Mix Design In Out Materials Mix Design In Out To set up file import export format codes 1 Select the Formats button on the Document Format Group Codes screen Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document
279. imum Quantity Additional Per Load Amount Maximum Quantity 5 Enter Rate UOM for the rate table The rates are entered on the Range tab 6 Setthe Cartage Type as Payment if the cartage fee is directly paid to the hauler Charge if the cartage fee is to be charged to the customer Both if the cartage fee is sometimes paid and sometimes charged 7 Select a haul charge Item Code This code will appear on the customer invoice it is used to define the taxability of the cartage rate table and to 244 8 9 05 determine where to book GL entries The Item Code must be set up prior to setting up the Cartage Rate Table 8 Select a Minimum Charge Option This field gives you a number of options to establish a minimum haul charge regardless of load size or clock time The options are No Minimum Charge Minimum Charge Amount Truck s Minimum Load Size times Charge Rate Truck s Schedule Load Size times Charge Rate Minimum Quantity 9 If the Minimum Charge Option is Minimum Charge Amount the Minimum Charge Pay field displays This value will be used to calculate minimum charges and payments based on the above two settings 10 If either of the minimum charge pay option fields is set to Minimum Quantity the Minimum Quanitity and Maximum Quantity fields display The Minimum Quantity indicates the smallest cartage chage that will be calculated 11 If desired you can also enter a Maximum Quantity to set a cap on cartage ch
280. in lookup windows and reports always follow the guidelines described below 3 Make ALL account types either all numbers all letters or all numbers and letters don t make some codes all numbers and other codes all letters etc 4 If your codes contain any letters make ALL codes the same length that is put the same number of characters in each code 298 Account Types EDTACTY m Account Types X Account ype Description Account Class E Meneses tC Loss IC fliabiities BalanceSheet d Is Saes petite sl sl ST Statistical Data Statistical Data d ja Assets Balance Sheet gt d 5 Enter a brief Description of the account type This field fully describes or names the account type Where space permits it is used on screens and reports when the account type is referenced 6 The Account Class field is used to specify one of the three account classes that can be assigned to account types The account class can be one of the three following choices Balance Sheet Profit amp Loss Statistical Account classes define how the account codes belonging to an account type are treated with respect to the following functions Recording the Net Profit effect of a journal entry for accounts belonging to an account type with a Profit amp Loss account class all journal entries are recorded in the company s Net Profit account and cost center as designated by the Net Profit Account field in the Comp
281. inate Latitude 4 3119N Longitude fo OOF Radius E 2 Accept the Map Pages screen to save the new map page information Automatic Travel Time Posting The initial travel times are generally estimates Once map page travel times have been entered and the trucks start rolling COMMANDseries can monitor the travel times and update them based on the actual travel times Establishing this functionality takes two steps e Configure COMMANDseries with rules for time posting and processing e Create a COMMANDcomm manager to process the time posting 8 9 05 189 Travel Time Posting Configuration COMMANDseries averages the travel times based on three fields in the Configuration file Note These fields are discussed in reverse order compared to their order on the screen Total Travel Time Loads This value represents the maximum number of loads to be used in calculating the travel time for any given map page travel time date range plant combination Each Map Page Travel Time record has fields to maintain a running total for travel time total travel time and number of loads When the update routine runs it scans tickets created during a specified interval for any that are assigned to a map page When such a ticket is found the travel times are added to the totals and the load count is increased by one The system then averages to the travel time totals and uses the result to update the travel time The Total Travel Time Loads field
282. ing Saving Screens Detailing Add Occurrence Smart Lookup The lt Tab gt Key COMMANDseries is a form based program This means that most screens are essentially entry forms with a number of fields in which information is entered To move from field to field press lt Tab gt Doing so will move the flashing cursor which may also be referred to as the focus through the entire form There are a couple of additional things to remember about lt Tab gt lt Shift Tab gt takes you back one field which can be useful if you overshoot your target e The cursor not only moves from field to field but also moves across the buttons on the screen If the cursor is resting on a button a faint box appears inside it The cursor is on this button If you can t find the cursor in a field look at the buttons If the cursor is on a button you can access the button by pressing lt Enter gt e Fora standard keyboard COMMANDseries remaps the numeric keypad lt Enter gt key to function as a lt Tab gt key This mapping allows for more efficient data entry This remapping is only for COMMANDseries in most other programs the key functions as a standard lt Enter gt key e If you are directed to press lt Enter gt make sure that you press the main lt Enter gt key the one that is equivalent to lt Return gt on a typewriter This enter key is frequently referred to as the Center Enter key Accepting Saving Screens
283. ing periods correspond to the frequency with which you pay your haulers and should not be confused with your regular A R accounting periods Cartage Accounting Periods are required for hauler pay To set cartage accounting periods within a year 1 Inthe Accounting Year field enter the year for which you want to create accounting periods 238 Cartage Accounting Periods EDTCTPQ F Cartage Accounting Periods Biel EZ Accounting Year 2005 Number of Periods hz Period Dates Defaults Start Date End Date 1 JOiJan 2005 8 3iJan 2005 Iv Open aj 2 m orFeb 2005 Rote M Open 3 m 0Ma205 E 31 Mar 2005 M Open 4 Im An 2006 m 30 Apr 2005 M Open 5 01 May 2005 8 31 May 2005 M Open 6 JO1Jun 2005 30 Jun 2005 IY Open 7 JO1Jul 2005 E 31Ju2005 M Open 8 01 Aug 2005 31 Aug 2005 M Open 9 J01 Sep 2005 30 Sep 2005 IV Open 10 J01 Oct 2005 mj 31 Oct 2005 M Open 11 01 Nov 2005 30 Nov 2005 MM Open 12 Im Dec 2006 m 31 Dec 2005 MM Open 2 To create an accounting period for each month press the Defaults button Otherwise rnter the number of accounting periods you want for the specified accounting year in the Number of Periods field That number of Period Dates fields appears below 3 Enter a start date and end date in the corresponding fields for each accounting period 4 Ifa period is open mark the Period Open box beside that period This allows entry of transactions for that period If the checkbox is not mar
284. ingle document format A list of the data fields that can be used for formatting orders is stored in the document tags table and can be viewed through the screen s detail button Order Printing and Order Data Out Formatting Codes A single document format record determines the print format for orders generated in the COMMANDconcrete application Multiple document formats can be maintained when individual and unique formatting is required for a single plant or for a group of plants The order format can be designed for a pre printed form or to print on plain paper Document formats allow for two types of information to be printed Literal fields text that remains constant on all forms printed Data fields information from the appropriate data files that varies from one form to the next Since orders do not continue onto multiple forms all literal fields and data fields for the order are recorded on a single document format A list of the data fields that can be used for formatting orders is stored in the document tags table and can be viewed through the screen s detail button 8 9 05 105 GL Distribution Data Out formatting Codes The following table identifies the field codes to use when formatting data out records based on the GL distribution data file Field Name Description ACCLAB Account Code BATDAT Batch Date BATNUM Batch Number BATSEQ Batch Sequence CHKNUM Check Number for Cash Re
285. ion lt Co To enter the first screen in the Configuration file To set up customer defaults to serve as a template for entering customers To set up parameters in all appropriate windows based on applications being used Files gt General Information gt Configuration Customers To set up customers and customer specific products for special pricing if applicable Appropriate fields will be defaulted from the configuration customer defaults record Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers Projects To set up projects for customers and project specific products for special pricing if applicable Appropriate fields will be defaulted from the customer record Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Projects Cartage Accounting Periods To establish the beginning and ending dates for accounting periods within an accounting year Files gt Cartage Information gt Cartage Accounting Periods Quoted Cartage Rates To assign cartage rates along with associated information such as waiting charge and a premium charge to customers projects quotes haulers trucks and drivers Files gt Cartage Information gt Quoted Cartage Rates Account Types To set up account types that are assigned to account codes to broadly define and group the account codes Files gt G L Information gt Account Types 8
286. ion 317 Sales Data Periods 316 Scale Types 81 Seasonal Charges 228 Security Field Level Worksheet 338 Setting Up Quote Printing 323 Signaling Unit Incoming Messages 73 Signaling Unit Options 72 Signaling Unit Outgoing Messages 74 Signaling Unit Statuses 75 8 9 05 Signaling Units 70 Signaling Units Setup 71 Source Codes 300 Sundry Charges 231 T Task Codes 193 Tax Authorities 113 Tax Authority Locations 114 Tax Codes 117 Terms Codes 120 Testing Ticket Printers in COMMANDseries 59 Trailers 178 Trailer Overhead Loadout Setup 180 Trailer Scheduling Setup 179 Trailer Setup 179 Trailer Tare Setup 180 Truck Types 173 Trucks 174 Entering a New Truck 174 Truck Scheduling Setup 175 Truck Tracking Setup 176 u Unloading Charges 229 UOM Batch Quantity 204 Delivered Quantity 203 Inventory Cost Quantity 205 Ordered Quantity 203 Price Quantity 204 Purchase Quantity 205 Reporting Quantity 205 Units of Measure 201 UOM Related Fields 202 Usage Codes 200 User Preferences 306 Users Communications Port Setup 50 Cost Centers 53 Licenses 45 Options 50 Order Printers 48 Plants 52 Privileges 46 User Preferences 44 Users Configuration 41 v Vendors 234 Vendor Setup 235 Vendor Types Setup 234 Z Zones 185
287. ion Configuration Concrete Optimization is a licensed option in COMMANDseries that interfaces with the ORTEC s Conactive Management Optimizer through the creation of XML records for orders tickets truck statuses and the truck and plant s availability The Optimization Configuration fields are used to configure system defaults for the COMMANDseries Optimization system These defaults can then be modified as needed at the Customer Project or Order level To enter optimization configuration 1 From the Configuration screen select the Optimization tab Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Optimization Configuration Optimization screen EDTCNFXR Receivables Aging j Statements Financials Projects Quotes Lien User Fields Optimization R Default Maximum Load Size Default Priority 2 Enter the Default Maximum Load Size This value will be used as a default during order entry 3 Enter the Default Priority This value establishes a default scheduling priority for orders 1 is the lowest priority 9 is the highest O or null will be interpreted as 9 4 Accept the screen 8 9 05 157 Plant amp Delivery Information The following section address entry of basic plant and delivery information By entering this information you are in effect laying the foundation for your company s dispatching operations Topics in this section Locations
288. iprocation d B County JCNTY Taxable sales plus previous authorities tax Point of Taxation Destination z Allow Reciprocation d 2 Enter a Code to identify the tax authority 3 Enter a Description for the tax authority 4 Enter a Short description of the tax authority in the Prompt field 5 Inthe Tax Based on field indicate whether the tax is based on Taxable sales plus previous authorities tax or Taxable sales Select whether the Point of Taxation is the Origination which is the tax location of the plant or Destination which is the tax location of the site 7 Mark the Allow Reciprocation checkbox if you want to allow reciprocal taxing Reciprocal taxing means that if the point of taxation is non taxable the other location determines the tax authority location Point of Is point of Taxes determined by tax taxation taxation taxable authority location of Origination Yes Origination Destination Yes Destination Origination No Destination if this checkbox is checked and destination point is taxable otherwise not taxed Destination No Origination if this checkbox is checked and origination point is taxable otherwise not taxed 8 Click the Add Occurrence button to add another tax authority 9 Accept this screen Tax Authority Locations The Tax Authority Locations function allows access to location specific tax authority information Tax authority locations represent
289. is to be charged to the customer Both if the cartage fee is sometimes paid and sometimes charged 9 Select a haul charge Item Code This code will appear on the customer invoice it is used to define the taxability of the cartage rate table and for determining where to book GL entries The Item Code must be set up prior to setting up the Cartage Rate Table 10 Accept this screen to save the cartage rate and related information Quantity Distance Cartage Rates Cartage may be charged to the customer based on the quantity and or quantity distance of the materials hauled or based on the distance the materials will be hauled Cartage charges on a quantity distance cartage rate table are based on the quantity or distance of the haul and include ranges that are summed or not summed meaning that the rate can be calculated four different ways Each example is based on the delivery of 10 tons toa location 24 miles away using the following rate range table Note Your last range should extend to 9999 to be certain to cover all distances e Quantity Based ranges are not summed BASE RATE DISTANCE RATE RATE PER UOM RATE PER TON x UNITS HAULED TOTAL CARTAGE Example 2 00 0 20 2 20 ton 2 20 ton x 10 tons 22 00 e Quantity Based ranges are summed BASE RATE DISTANCE RATE ABOVE RANGE RATES RATE PER UOM RATE PER UOM x UNITS HAULED TOTAL CARTAGE Example
290. iscount amount and discount date are calculated Any number of terms codes can be established and maintained in the system The Terms Type field controls the nature of the terms code and the rules for calculating the dates and discount amount Before entering terms code information gather information about the terms you assign to your customers for invoicing and statements Topics in this section Entering Terms Codes Basic Definitions Entering Terms Codes Examples Entering Terms Codes Basic Definitions Enter descriptions and a type 1 Goto the Terms Codes screen Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Terms Codes Terms Codes EDTTRMS m Terms Codes lel F Terms Code 1 Description Net30 Days O Short Net30 Terms Type s Pe Un Ej 2 Enter an alphanumeric Terms Code to identify payment terms associated with this code 3 Enter a Description and a Short description for the terms code The short description will be used on reports in situations where there is insufficient room for the full description 4 From the field s list select a Terms Type for the new terms code Valid options are Regular Percent the invoice is due x number of days after the invoice date Two discount percents are available 120 Prox Percent the invoice is due on a specific day of the month following the invoicing month One discount percent is available on the specified due date Double Prox P
291. it Person This field is used to assign one of your employees as the person responsible for credit matters with the customer Mark the Purchase Order checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox causes a customer purchase order number to be required on the Orders screen Dispatch gt Orders This information is required for an order to be taken for this customer Some customers or your company may require that a P O number be associated with any work done for the customer Mark the Customer Job checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox causes a customer job number to be required on the Orders screen Dispatch gt Orders This job number is assigned and used by the customer to track and account for the business Some customers or your company may require that a job number be associated with any work done for the customer Note The following two steps are only needed if you are licensed for COMMANDIlien Select a Pre Lien Calculation method from the drop down list The options are Number of Days After Pre Lien Compare Date default Specific Day of 1st Month Following Pre Lien Compare Date Specific Day of 2nd Month Following Pre Lien Compare Date Specific Day of 3rd Month Following Pre Lien Compare Date The first option is by far the most common The other options allow for prox dates which are required in certain states This setting is used in conjunction with the Days Day of Month for Prelimin
292. ith each ticket that is sent to the batching system 8 Enter the default Trim Percent information for the Accelerator Hot Water Air and Super Plasticizer Each field specifies the trim percentage for each category of admixtures for the plant when interfacing to a batching computer Plant Scheduling Setup To set up plant scheduling information 1 From the Plants screen select the Scheduling tab Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants gt Scheduling 8 9 05 165 Plants Scheduling Tab EDTPLNT4 Main Communication Batching Scheduling Costs Plants Scales Bins Constituent Order User Fields Driver Lead Time 15 Minutes Pre Load Time 6 Minutes Load Time 5 Minutes Post Load Time 10 Minutes Load Time Usage Loading Y On Job wash Time s Default Number of Trucks 60 Specified Plant Capacity 12 Current Plant Capacity 10 2 Enter the plant s Times The times specify the following Driver Lead Time the average time in minutes a driver needs prior to loading the first ticket of the day at this plant Pre Load Time the average time in minutes that the driver needs to get his truck into loading position Load Time the average time in minutes required to load a truck and be ready to load the next truck Post Load Time the average time in minutes needed by a driver after the truck is loaded before leaving the plant 3 The Orders screen and the Tracking and Sch
293. ive Address specifying the selective address code to use when printing an order through a multi drop phone line where more than one output device exists Enter a Document Format specifying the format in which the document will print Mark the Auto Dial Flag checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox specifies that COMMANDcomm will use the information in the Modem Phone Number and Modem Code fields to send data to a remote printer Accept the Plant Communication Setup screen Repeat steps 14 through 20 for the Secondary Ticketing and Temporary Ticketing devices as needed Accept the Scale Communication Information screens Plant Bins Setup Depending on your plant setup you may need to create and configure loading bins To configure bins 1 From the Plants screen select the Bins tab Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants gt Bins Plants Bins Tab EDTPLNT7 Main Communication Batching Scheduling Costs Plants Scales Bins Constituent Order User Fields Bin Dispensing Type Description Short fi Cement Bin Cement bin 1 Ra d l IS CemetBn zl Cement bin 2 En2 d 2 Aggregate Dn Ez agregate JAGG lt s fCementBin E Cement bin 3 Ea d ja Admixture Bottle zl Admix nv d 4 Cement Bin Flyash Bin 4 FLH d 4 Water Meter Bin r Water WATER 2 Enter a Bin code 3 Select a Dispensing Type The options are Cement Aggregate Admixture Bottle
294. iven point will be comprised of the current day s hours along with the previous six days Enter the appropriate Alert Hours and Overtime Hours Note Rolling Overtime is based on time values flagged as DOT Time in the Tasks file Daily and weekly overtime are based on time values flagged as Clock Time 8 9 05 197 9 Accept the screen to save the table Users can create multiple overtime tables as needed A driver s assigned overtime table is specified in the Driver s Employee file 198 Items and Pricing The following section addresses entry of basic Item information This information controls item entry pricing and additional charges Of particular note is the information on Units of Measure UOM Units of Measure determine how material is measured for ordering pricing reporting etc accordingly establishing UOMs may well be the most critical part of the File Build process Please read the introductory UOM material carefully before attempting to enter items or item categories Topics in this section Price Categories Usage Codes Units of Measure UOM UOM Related Fields Item Categories Items Minimum Load Charge Tables Seasonal Charges Unloading Charges Sundry Charges Vendors Freight Methods Price Categories Price categories provide for tiers or groups of prices that are assigned at the item level This provides greater flexibility in pricing An Item can be priced at the Project or Custo
295. ivileges tab So EDTORDR will control access for not just the main order screen EDTORDR but all secondary screens associated with that screen Order Pricing Information Other Order Information etc To enable field level access for the form delete the Select the Fields button The Fields screen for the specified screen will display 8 9 05 47 Fields EDTUSNMA E Fields ES Access Field Name Description Ful x j ASSOC_BUTTON Associated Products Button a Full COD_BUTTON COD Button J Full CUST_CODE_DISP Customer Code Full y CUST_JOB_NUM Customer Job Full z CUST_NAME Customer Name Full y DELY ADDR Delivery Address Full y DEN MEIH CODE Delivery Method Full sl EXPIR_DATE_DISP Expiration Date sl 4 Select an Access level for the listed fields The options are Full Read Only None Note Not all fields are available for field level security In addition Field names that correspond to screen buttons such as COD_BUTTON in the above image have only two access options Full and None 5 Accept the Fields screen You can then proceed to setting field level access to another screen or accept the User screen to save the changes for the selected user or group If you assign a user an access level of None to a tab for example the Configuration Defaults tab EDTCNFXB then that tab will not display for the user That is the only situation in which security for a tab extends to the fiel
296. k the Exceed Ordered Quantities checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox allows aggregate orders to exceed the quantity specified by the customer 7 Inthe Overhead Load Out Prompt for Load Deviation field enter the maximum percentage by which the target net weight can differ from the actual net weight If the value is exceeded the dispatcher will be prompted for confirmation 8 In the Overhead Load Out Drop Information select how you wish to control individual drops The options are Edit Tons Per Drop and Edit Percent Drop 9 If the Show Truck Underloaded Prompt option is enabled then the system will display a confirmation prompt if you attempt to ticket a truck with a load size less than the minimum load size specified in the Truck file 10 Mark the Display PO Number Zone and or Cartage Rate on Front Screen of Aggregate Ticketing checkboxes if necessary These 144 checkboxes allow you to remove unwanted fields from the Ticketing screen When a truck comes in to be dispatched the system tries to determine the last order the truck hauled If that order date is outside the range permitted by the Days Back to Allow Dispatch field the system can resolve the conflict by useing the old order or copying the old order to a new one The next three fields address how certain dispatch and ticketing functions handle information Note These fields are discusses in a different order from their on screen order 11 Sel
297. kbox If a customer who has a standard discount orders an item that is not discountable the system will not discount the item 5 Inthe Usage Code field enter the code that represents the primary usage for the item If you do not know the code detail on the field to select from a list 6 If this item will be available for a limited time only enter the Expiration Date The system will not allow a customer to order an expired item If you do not want the item to expire leave the field blank Item Tax Override Setup Tax laws can get complex In some cases certain types of items get taxed differently than others The Tax Override tab is used to further define the taxability information entered on the Sales tab To define tax override information 1 Select the Tax Override tab Items Tax Override Tab EDTIMST5 Main UOM Conversions Sales Tax Override Locations Costs Prices Inventory Batching Batch Codes Tax Authority Tax Location af STATE E Georgia E Override Taxable Status Taxable B Override Tax Rate Location sl d 2 Inthe Tax Authority field enter a code that represents the tax authority for which taxable status is being changed If you do not know the code SS 215 press lt Enter gt to select a code from the Choices Tax Authorities Locations File screen 3 The location code associated with the tax authority automatically displays in the Tax Location field 4 Inthe Override Taxable Stat
298. ked that period is considered closed and will not accept any new transactions Cartage Rate Codes Users define cartage rate codes for haul charges and hauler pay using the Cartage Rate Tables screen Cartage rates are later applied to orders along with the detailed information specified during the cartage rate setup A cartage rate code may be assigned to an order when the order is taken it may also be assigned at the Customer or Project level so that the appropriate cartage rate table is used whenever a specific Customer places an order The system currently supports seven types of cartage rates Hourly Productive Cartage rate is calculated at an hourly rate for the time the truck driver is productive Hourly Clock Cartage rate is calculated at an hourly rate for the time the truck driver is punched in The table is available for hauler pay only 8 9 05 Load Driver is paid a flat cartage rate per load Quantity Distance Quantity and Distance are calculated with a base rate and additional charges based on the distance traveled Rates may be multiplied by the quantity or quantity distance Plant Zone Cartage rate is determined by a rate table using the plant zone and truck type Quantity Cartage rate is calculated according to the rate multiplied by the quantity of the load or load size Custom The user constructs the calculation equation to use with a set of pre defined variables This table is available for h
299. kground color 3 Select colors for each item on the Tracking screen 4 Select colors for each item on the Scheduling screen 5 Proceed to the next tab or accept this screen 8 9 05 311 Font Preferences Setup The Font Preferences tab allows the fonts type styles used in various portions of the system to be changed including the following e The font used in workspace areas of the system e The font used to display labels for buttons Note For the previoius two groups be very careful when changing fonts particularly font sizes If a font is set too large it will not display properly e The font used on Tracking and Scheduling screens Only the CMDtracking fonts should be used e The font used to display reports on screen The default Lucida Console Regular 7 point will enable an etire report page to fir on the screen But unless that screen is a 20 inch monitor it s won t be very legible Font sizes around 9 work well Note To reset font defaults go to the Options menu from this screen and select Defaults To define font preferences 1 Go to the Fonts tab on the Preferences screen Misc gt Preferences gt Fonts Preferences Fonts Tab SYSPREF6 m Preferences ME x General User Sounds Colors Tracking Fonts Keys Toolbar Forms Workspace Font gt Courier New 8 Regular Label Font sl MS Sans Serif 8 Regular Field Font sl MS Sans Serif 8 Regular Button Font sl MS Sans S
300. ks editor These assignments act as defaults for tickets using this truck Before entering truck information gather information about the size and type of trucks you use You will also need to know who is driving each truck and which plant each is scheduled out of at the beginning of each day Topics in this section Entering a New Truck Truck Scheduling Setup Truck Tracking Setup Overhead Load Out User Fields Entering a New Truck To enter a new truck 1 Goto the Trucks screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Trucks 174 8 9 05 10 11 Trucks EDTTRUC1 Truck Code 1 Owner Name Description Mach 1999 Short JMACK98 Main Scheduling Tracking Overhead Load Out User Fields License Number E BR549 License Expiration Date Bl E 1 Dec 2099 Hauler Code RR CDI Redi Mix Trucks Driver Code 23 Randy Odoms Plant Code aif Main Plant Trailer Code 1 v Trailer Code 2 gt Insurance Carrier Name Insurance Expiration Date m Setup Date BI 71 Jan 2000 Enter a Truck Code to identify the new truck Note If using an Eagle interface numeric truck codes should be used The Eagle ignores alphanumeric truck codes If the truck has a unique owner assign an Owner Name to the truck Enter a Description and Short description of the truck Include for example the make model and year of the truck On the Main tab enter the License Number of the truck and the license s Expiration Dat
301. lating this field allows the system to automatically append to an order the employee code of the person who took the order Select the Plant Code from the drop down list The value can do two different things based on the system s license If the system is licensed for the Product Sales Option this field specifies the Point of Sale plant If the system is licensed for aggregate the field specifies the user s default plant for aggregate ticketing and overhead loadout The field can be left blank If a plant is specified the Scale Code field will appear Entering a valid scale code establishes a default scale code for aggregate dispatch and ticketing screens If the Materials Manager is in the license the Default Location for Mix Conversion field appears If you are deploying the Materials Manager in a multi region environment this field allows you to override the system level lab location specified on the Configuration Distribution Materials Manager screen User level Licenses The Licenses function allows you to specify what COMMANDseries modules the user can access By default all users have access to all modules in the system license To restrict a user s access to a module or modules specify the module s on this tab By entering CC as in the screenshot below you can quickly restrict a dispatcher to the COMMANDconcrete module License level restrictions are the broadest level of security control you can a
302. ld Enter an abbreviated description in the Short field If a specific company within your organization uses the bank enter the Company code in this field Click on the detail button associated with this field to select from a list of valid companies The Federal Routing Number field is used to specify the Bank s ID number Enter the Bank Account Number Accept the Bank Codes screen Adjustment Codes The Adjustment Codes function allows a user to define the codes that represent the various types of A R adjustments that your organization uses Adjustment Codes are assigned to each A R adjustment transaction It defines the nature of the adjustment and the G L Booking Code for the transaction To set up adjustment codes 1 2 Open the Adjustment Codes screen File gt General Information gt Adjustment Codes Enter an Adjustment Code This code can be up to three alphanumeric characters Note Use an abbreviation that is easy to recognize and remember For example BDW for Bad Debt Write off or NSF for Insufficient Funds 112 Adjustment Codes EDTAJCD m Adjustment Codes Oe x Adjustment Code OVC Description JOvercharges Short OverChra Prepayment Adjustment V Write off Adjustment 3 Enter a Description of the Adjustment Code Enter an abbreviated version of this description in the Short field 4 Select the Write off Adjustment box if the code will be used for write off adj
303. ld The full name of the cost center will display in the Description field 879 05 53 4 Accept the screen to save the cost center s information Groups Groups allow you to define a standard set of user level privileges Once a group is created you can make assign a user to the group using the Group Name field on the Users editor Once a user has been assigned to a group specific privileges can still be assigned to the user Note In the event that a user level privilege conflicts with a group level privilege the user level pivilege will take precedent Non COD Price Change COMMANDseries by default allows price changes on COD orders When an order is flagged as COD the Item Price field displays on the order form where the price can be entered For non COD orders the Item Price does not display Displaying the price for COD orders is a business necessity otherwise the order taker would not be able to give the customer a total for the order It is possible that a user may need access pricing information for non COD orders as well COMMANDseries allows you to grant privileged users the ability to view or edit prices for non COD orders This feature is dependent on three configuration settings User Field level privileges A user must have certain privileges for the Order field PRICE_DISP Print Price on Ticket This flag is found on both the customer and project pricing tabs Allow Price Change in Order
304. ld be rounded if necessary from the Round Delivered Quantity field s list The quantity can be rounded up down or left as the actual amount If desired enter an amount of time in the Writeoff Per Charge field This field represents a grace period during which excess charges will not 230 be applied If the grace period is exceeded though the customer is charged for the full amount 11 Specify the number of minutes that make one unit for charging purposes in the Unloading Charge Increment field 12 Determine how the unloading charge should be rounded if necessary from the Round Unloading Charge field s list The charge can be rounded up down or left as the actual amount 13 Enter the unloading charge item code in the Item Code field Use this code to print descriptions on invoices reports and general ledger entries Select the detail button to list unloading charge item codes New items can be entered on the Items screen Files gt Item Information gt Items Possible Items FNDIMST m Possible Items sl LA Product code Product description Short product description Pricing plant code 25004 3 4 limestone air 25004 3 41 6 30656 3000 psi 3 4 6 AEA 3000 pat 244 6 207 3 4 Gravel 3 4 Gravel 202 3 4 Gravel 3 4 Gravel 30656 3000 psi 3 4 6 AEA 3000 pat 244 6 SUPERP Superplasticizer oz EE gt From Project From Customer C From Item 14 From the Create Unloading Cha
305. lication MSG_QORADO are for the Oracle scripts MSG_QMSSO for the MSS SQL Certain quotes don t show some information in the Quote document A reason is missing records in the view Make sure that the tables referenced in the create view script have information needed to populate the view Example create or replace view yqpc as select qprd quote_code qprd rev_num gprd unique_line_num qprd item_code qprd prod_descr item_description decode qprd price_plant_code Any qprd price_plant_code plant to_char qprd matl_price 999 99 item_price to_char qprd price 999 99 delivered_price qprd est_qty uoms short_descr uom_desc qpct truck_type to_char qpct chrg_cart_rate 999 99 Cartage_Rate from qprd qpct uoms where qprd quote_code qpct quote_code and qprd rev_num qpct rev_num and qprd unique_line_num qpct unique_line_num and qprd order_qty_uom uoms uom If QPCT or UOMS that satisfy the where clause are missing the occurrence of YQPC for the quote_code qprd will not be created e Method error A reason for the error is a mistake in the Quote Print template Make sure that all tables in the template have around their names and fields have the following structure viewname_fieldname 8 9 05 8 9 05 1X91 sbessay 1x91 abessayp 1x9 ess w al abessay 901 spe Juawns0q sdnoib ewo sdnoib yu uunooq yewo JUBLUNDOG G6 S eWIOS S EWIOs s
306. ling the left most characters with asterisks Prints a US currency symbol in a fixed position based on the mask i e 123456 78 using a mask of n 4 would result in 123 456 78 Prints a US currency symbol in a floating position to the left of the last significant digit printed within the mask i e 123456 78 using a mask of would result in 123 456 78 Represents the thousands and decimal point separators The comma is used as the thousands separator and the period as the decimal separator regardless of the characters specified by the currency in use as assigned in the Configuration file Represents the thousands and decimal point separators as dictated by the currency in use as assigned in the Configuration file For example using a US currency code a comma would be the thousand separator and a period would be the decimal separator 94 n Numeric When at the end of a numeric mask and n is a number multiplies the numeric field times n and applies the mask to the resulting product This would be used when a number with decimal places must be printed or stored in a file with an implied decimal point i e 123456 78 using a mask of 100 would result in 12345678 MM Date Represents the month portion of a date field expressed numerically DD Date Represents the day portion of the date field expressed numerically YY YYYY Date Represents
307. list The charge types to be applied to this sundry charge are Per Unit e Flat Amount e Percent of Ticket Minimum Ticket Minimum Product You can control whether the charge appears as a separate line item on anticket invoice or if the charge is to be added to another price Selecta Combine with Material option from the field s list Valid options follow Do not Include default the sundry charge and the material price appear separately on the ticket invoice and data out Combine on Ticket Invoice and Data Out combines the extended material price and the sundry charge on the ticket invoice and data out if customers wish to combine charges this is the most common choice Combine on Ticket and Invoice combines the extended material price and the sundry charge on the ticket and invoice they are separated on the data out Combine on Ticket and Data Out combines the extended material price and the sundry charge on the ticket and data out they are separated on the invoice Combine on Invoice and Data Out combines the extended material price and the sundry charge on the invoice and data out they are separated on the ticket Combine on Ticket combines the extended material price and the sundry charge on the ticket they are separated on the invoice and data out Combine on Invoice combines the extended material price and the sundry charge on the invoice they are separated on the ticket and data out
308. liveries are made Characteristics can be assigned to a zone such as its tax code for destination based taxing its assigned pricing plant code and its scheduled plant code Also you can establish relationships between a zone and plants for computing and applying price adjustment amounts by price category for deliveries from the plant to the zone Zones are assigned to customers projects and eventually to orders to identify the zone to which deliveries are made The geographical layout of zones is wholely up to a customer Some customers match zones to map pages and others divide the delivery area into very broad regions Customers with a single plant or two plants close together may set up the zones as a series of concentric circles surrounding the plant Before entering zone information gather geographical information about your company s delivery area Also you need to determine how this area is divided for tax and plant purposes To enter a zone 1 Goto the Zones screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Zones Zones EDTZONE m Zones it x Zone Code 2 Description Shelby County East Short JESHELBY Scheduled Plant Code gt E River Road Tax Code gt E Jefferson County Price Adjustment UOM sl 40003 Cubic Ya Price Previous Price Plant Code Price Category Adjustment Effective Adjustment be fi SHELBY fi 44 00 BY 23Jul 2001 22 00 z Al v lt 2 Enter a Zone Code to identify t
309. ll overwrite the information currently stored in the other locations Note If any of the constituents are not available at every location you are notified of the relevant constituent s and which location s Automatic Products The Automatic Products function allows you to configure items to be added automatically Previously this functionality was accomplished through customer or project level associated products This feature extends that ability to the Item Level You can have an admixture automatically added to a given mix or have a delivery charge automatically attach to an item In each case the automatic item will be displayed separately on the order and ticket 8 9 05 225 The Automatic Products tab will only display for primary products and extra charges To add an automatic product to an item 1 Select the Auto Products tab Automatic Products EDTIMSTH Main UOM Conversions Sales Tax Override Mix User Fields Locations Costs Prices Inventoy Batching Batch Codes Constituents Automatic Products Location Code 1 BHAMPLT F Auto Product Description Quantity gt 55 Superplasticizer US per cubic yard gt J du d aj ba Ba Copy To All 1 Select the required Location or select the Copy to All button Enter the Auto Product code or detail on the field to select from a list 3 The Description will default from the Item file This description can be edited If it is edited the
310. locations from which you ship items including the batching capabilities of the plants and item availability at each plant Topics in this section Plant Setup Plant Main Tab Setup Plant Communication Setup Communications Port Setup Plant Batching Setup Plant Scheduling Setup Plant Costs Setup Plant Plants Setup Plant Scale Setup Plant Bins Setup Constituent Order Setup Plant User Fields Plant Setup To set up a new plant 1 Goto the Plants screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants Plant header f Plants Ill Plant Code 1 Name Birmingham Plant Short Name JBHMPLT Main Communication Batching Scheduling Costs Plants Scales Bins Constituent Order 2 Enter a code to define the new Plant 3 Enter a Name and Short Name to identify the plant 4 Select the tab that represents the type of information that you want to set up 160 Plant Main Tab Setup The Main tab is used to set up basic information about the plant such as address tax code zone code inventory location etc To set up main information 1 Select the Main tab on the Plants screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants Plants Main Tab EDTPLNT1 Main Communication Batching Scheduling Costs Plants Scales Bins Constituent Drder Address aj ID 21st North Bitmingham AL 35210 Phone Number 205 288 8733 Next Number Sequences Company fi Comm
311. lso restrict access by scree level and field level security To configure user level licenses Select the Licenses tab from the Users screen Files gt System Information gt Users gt Licenses Users Licenses Tab EDTUSNM2 Preferences Licenses Privileges Order Printers Options Plants Cost Centers Applications foc JConoee Dech zl ig moci Z 8 9 05 45 2 In the short Application field enter the two letter abbreviation for the application s that should be available to the user or select an application from the drop down list in the longer field Only applications that are licensed will be available 3 To enter multiple applications click on the Add Occurrence button Note If nothing is entered on this tab the system will grant full access to all modules in the system license Privileges The Licenses tab provides broad module level control over user access in COMMANDseries The Privileges tab provides screen and field level control allowing you to define which forms the user will have access to and the type of access add inquire etc they will have To configure privileges 1 Select the Privileges tab from the Users screen Files gt System Information gt Users gt Privileges Users Privileges Tab EDTUSNM3 Preferences Licenses Privileges Order Printers Options Plants Cost Centers Form Privilege E All ada y Price Suppress Cost Suppress lt JEDTO
312. m Configuration section Trailers The Trailers screen allows users to enter codes and important information for the trailers they use to deliver aggregate products Trailers are used in the COMMANDaggregate system as attachments to trucks or independently with a hauling truck Before entering trailer information gather information about the trailer including owner hauler and license information Topics in this section Trailer Setup Trailers Scheduling Setup Trailer Tare Setup Trailer Setup To enter a new trailer 1 Go to the Trailers screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Trailers Trailers EDTTRLR1 F Trailers Oe x Trailer Code 101PUP Owner Name 101 PUP Owner Address mo Owner City H Owner State Owner Country Owner Zip Hauler Scheduling Tare Overhead Load Out Hauler Code xih License Number License Expiration Date 224 ul 2006 2 Enter a Trailer Code to uniquely identify the new trailer This code is used to access truck information in other programs It is also used to sort reports that contain truck related information Note To insure that proper sorting takes place in lookup windows and reports make ALL trailer codes either all numbers all letters or all numbers and letters do not make some codes all numbers and other codes all letters etc Make all codes the same length that is put the same number of characters in each code 3 Enter the Owner Name A
313. mation gt Scale Types Next JY JS S S e To establish numbering sequence Numbers groups for orders tickets and invoices Files gt General Information gt Next Numbers Document S Z JS Z V S S To establish information about Formats the preferred style of tickets orders invoices statements and quotes Also to determine if you will be importing or exporting any information to other systems for processing Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Formats Document S S To set up the group codes for Format combining document formats to Groups make up an invoice statement or quote Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Format Groups Message JS J To establish messages that can Text be printed on invoices and statements for all customers or aging sensitive messages that can be printed on applicable statements Files gt General Information gt Message Text 8 9 05 13 System Information DO PO lt Qm AD gt lt m 0 ar Purpose A R Accounting Periods lt Co To set up the beginning and ending dates for each accounting period in the current accounting year to control the invoicing and receivables transactions Files gt General Information gt A R Accounting Periods G L Accounting Periods Bank Codes To set up the beginning and ending dates for each company for each accounting period in the curren
314. me Starting KT EE 21 Entering KEIER tele deeg 22 GENERA geneet 22 Comm Ma ag erS Age tee Ehe eege ER How to Use This Document 23 EE 24 Before You Begin tte Eege 24 Setting Up the System EE 24 Starting COMMANDSCNGS sescccsteacacsdncnadastatunstamcraiteeteneeatesbersdevecutexentecess 25 Logging Into COMMANDseries rr 25 Exiting COMMANDSEFIEGS eebe rtt taie tent EAA EERIE EE KATENE ANETA NEERA 26 Entering File Information eege 26 PCCOSSING KC e EE 27 Customer LOOKUP EE 27 The e EEN 28 Five Important FUNCUONS adedscsesawesunvevrenndannrnaianderiaun ech UEREENEEEEE MSN wes 29 Th E EE 29 Accepting Saving Screen Jsu dti kna kuspaqa uuu aaa d aaa aku Yus a EN 29 RT ne NEE 20 Add OGC rrencg _ Eeer A A aaa ee EEN 31 Smart Be EE 32 Initial System Files 34 COMMANDSENEGS LICENSING ite ege AE AEE 35 Making a Backup of the Existing License 35 Entering a New License uuu yau ttis oinor a ED AEE TEETER NEEE 36 Temporary LICenSeS sire eeh SEKR qaa NEEN EENS SEAN EENS NEN EEDEN qaku 38 Restoring an Old License scene dxcennsvcennixs tise etiaadreannbe went usdavs aes wseeeeaenbes 39 License e EE A0 User Configuration eier 41 Password Security eege 42 Process ET 42 Implementation uyu ua usai ee eege 42 COMMANDSseries User
315. me to complete several preliminary tasks to ultimately make entering information and setting up your system much easier Review the checklist on the following pages for the information required to set up your system The checklist is organized with the following codes for each of the Command Alkon applications CC COMMAND concrete EX COMMANDexecutive CA COMMANDaggregate CT COMMAND cartage IY COMMANDinventory QU COMMANDqauote IG COMMANDinvoicing LN COMMANDIlien AR COMMANDreceivables 8 9 05 T1 System Information DO PO lt m Qm AD gt lt m sl OH zr Purpose Licenses lt Ce Gives the privileged user access to COMMANDseries product licensing information Files gt System Information gt Licenses Users To set lifetime on installation username to set up other users for getting started process Files gt System Information gt Users Print Models To set up print models for the printers and other types of output required Files gt System Information gt Print Model Currency To set up currency code and its display characteristics Files gt System Information gt Currency Companies To set up companies to be represented on the system Files gt General Information gt Companies Employees Weigh masters and Drivers To establish the employees who function as weighmasters at plants or as truck drivers Files gt
316. mer level or they can be priced at the Item level based on Price Category Price categories are also used as a sorting option for many reports Before entering price category information gather information about how you will categorize prices for reporting purposes To enter a new price category 1 Go to the Price Categories screen Files gt Item Information gt Price Categories 8 9 05 199 Price Categories EDTPRCC W Price Categories Biel Es Code Description Short bh Cash Retail CASHA d f ID Cash Commercial CASH C d DN Residential RESID D Light Commerical COMMER d IS Industrial JINDUST L je Goverment Contract GOVT d 2 Enter a Code for the new price category Enter a Description and Short description for the price category 4 To enter another price category click on the Insert Occurrence button or press lt Shift F6 gt 5 Accept this screen to save the price categories a Usage Codes Usage codes indicate how the type of construction for which a given concrete mix was designed Usage code are assigned to mixes at the Item level but the usage code assigned to an item can be overridden in the Orders screen Dispatch gt Orders The usage code helps make sure that the proper item is sold for the requirement It is also used as part of the sales and profit analysis reporting system Before entering usage code information gather information about the uses of the
317. mer sales configuration to all available product lines 4 Enter a Sales Analysis Code This field provides the default value for the Sales Analysis Code field on the Customers screen when adding a new customer Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers 5 Enter a Salesman code This field provides the default value for the Salesman field on the Customers screen when adding a new customer Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers Customer Taxing Defaults Setup The Customers Taxing configuration tab allows you to enter the values that will serve as defaults in the customer files To enter customer taxing defaults 1 From the Customers Defaults section at the bottom of the Defaults tab select the Taxing button Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Defaults gt Taxing Customer Taxing Defaults EDTCNFX4 m Customer Taxing Defaults ES Tax Code f Birmingham Taxable Taxable x Hon Taxable Reason sl z Location not taxable 2 Select a Tax Code that best represents the majority of your customers tax location This code is the default tax code for the customer s file 3 From the Taxable field s list indicate whether the customer file s default is Taxable or Non taxable 879 05 133 4 Select a Non Taxable Reason This should best represent the majority of your customers who are non taxable Customers Pricing Defaults Setup The Customers
318. n they are assigned to orders where they receive credit for a sale Weighmasters assigned to plants Credit Persons assigned to customers and projects Batchers assigned to plants At this point in the system setup it is only necessary to enter employees who are drivers weighmasters and batchers But if you have the information on your other employees go ahead and enter them as well Employee Files Before entering employee information gather information about the employees within your company and the duties they perform To enter a new employee 1 Go to the Employees screen Files gt General Information gt Employees 8 9 05 Employees EDTEMPL m Employees id x Employee Code 17 Name Dale Earnhardt Address e City Birmingham State Country Postal Code Phone Number 205 364 7851 Phone Extension Assigned VV Driver Salesman Weighmaster Credit Person Batcher Payroll Plant Code af SHELBY Default Truck gt Mercedes Seniority Driver Overtime Code Calculate Times for this Driver 2 E a 2 Enter an Employee Code to identify the employee 3 Enter the employee Name for the assigned employee code 4 If desired enter employee information such as Address Phone Number etc Specify the employee s job function by marking the checkbox next to the appropriate job Note These flags determine how an employee can be used within COMMANDseries For exampl
319. n notices To enter lien location information for this project select the Lien Locations button to access the Lien Location Manager screen This screen is available only if you have a COMMANDIlien license For instructions on how to use the screen see the COMMANDIlien User s Manual 10 11 12 13 Mark the Allow Multiple Lien Locations checkbox to allow more than one lien location for this project Mark the External Liens checkbox to allow externally managed liens Mark the Purchase Order and or Customer Job checkbox if these items are required in order entry for this project If selected the system will not accept an order against the project unless the required information has been entered The system will shade the field to indicate that the field is required When a valid reason code is entered in the Suspend Order Reason Code field and saved all new entered for the project default to a suspended state If no reason code is entered new project orders default to a released state When an order is suspended it is essentially removed from the invoicing process thus providing an opportunity to review the order and make sure that all information is correct Please consult the COMMANDinvoicing manual for additional information regarding suspending and releasing orders Accept the screen to save the project or proceed to the Invoicing tab Entering Project Invoicing Information Project invoicing information is us
320. n of the screen 10 Enter the Extra Products item code or detail on the field to select from a list 11 Select a Plant from the drop down menu 12 The extra product Description and Category will default from the Product file 13 The Price will default from the product file Edit the price for the project as needed 14 Press the Pricing button to display the Project Product Pricing screen Edit the information as necessary 15 Press Add Occurrence to add another mix or accept the screen Because the third product entry screen Aggregate Products is linked to an aggregate specific pricing option that screen is discussed in the next section Fixed Delivery Pricing COMMANDaggregate users need the ability to quote a fixed delivered price to customers Once the price is fixed either the cartage rate or the material price is adjusted to achieve the quoted price You have three pricing options for aggregate products These options are selected with the Price Type field FOB Pricing The material price plus the cartage rate equals the delivered price The delivered price can vary from load to load Fixed Cartage Delivered Pricing The delivered price minus the cartage calculated or specified equals the material price Fixed Material Delivered Pricing The delivered price minus the material price equals the cartage Fixed delivered pricing can be established as the Job Quote or Project level When you go to the Products tab
321. nce command to add a new line or accept the screen to save your changes 8 9 05 General Ledger Setup This sections covers the setup of your General Ledger GL information The information will control how COMMANDseries sorts records and balances all financial and inventory transactions in the system It is important to have clean and current printouts of your current GL information before entering this information If you are considering making changes to your account structure it is best to do so before entering the information in the system While you can modify your account structure from within COMMANDseries it will be much easier if changes are made before business activity begins in COMMANDseries Topics in this section Account Types Source Codes Cost Centers Account Codes G L Booking Codes Account Types The Account Types screen records account types which are used to organize account codes into logical groups For each group you can classify the account type and all account codes assigned to it This classification can be balance sheet profit amp loss or statistical To enter a new account type 1 Select Files gt GL Information gt Account Types 2 Enter an alphanumeric account code in the Account Type field This code is used to access account type information in other programs It is also used to sort various reports that contain account type information To insure that proper sorting takes place
322. nd Tickets N A 338 Form Name Screen Name Configuration DBAPDWN Mix Design Interface N A DBAPROJ Purge Expired Projects N A DBAQUEF Queue Entries N A DBAQUOT Quote N A DBAREAL Realign Accounts amp Cost Centers N A DBARSSD Resummarize Sales Data N A DBASIGM Signaling Operations N A DBASLSF Sales Forecast Display N A DBASLSP Compress Sales Data N A DBASLSS Post Sales Data N A DBASQLW Database SQL Worksheet N A DBASSPQ Database Stored Procedure Interface N A DBATSOP Tracking amp Scheduling Operations N A DBATSOPA Change Truck Status Tab DBATSOPB Change Truck Info Tab DBATSOPC Change Order Status Tab DBATSOPD Change Plant Info Tab DBATSOPE Punch In Out Truck Tab DBATSOPF Punch In Out Driver Tab DBATSOPG Reset Trucks Tab N A DBATSOPH Display Trucks Tab N A DBATSOPI Display Loads Tab N A DBATSOPJ Display Trip Profile Tab DBATSOPK Change Task Tab N A DBATSOPL Driver Overtime Tab N A DBAUFLD Data Maintenance N A DBAVOUT G L Distribution Data Out N A Edit Forms EDT Master file editors order or transaction entry Form Name Screen Name Configuration EDTACAT Accounting Categories EDTACCT Accounts Codes EDTACTY Account Types EDTADIO Automated Data In Out EDTADIC Cost Adjustments EDTADJH Adjustments Batch Information N A EDTADJH1 Adjustment Transactions Detail N A
323. ndix E Content Pricing To specify the base mix in Configuration 9 Return to the Configuration System screen 10 Enter the base mixes in the appropriate Content Item Code field E Caution The system will return an error if you attempt to enter an item that does not exist is not a mix or that does not have a Pricing Cement Content value 11 Accept the screen To set the up down modifiers in the Base mix 12 Open the base item in the Items editor 13 Go to the Mix tab Two additional fields will display Content Pricing Base Mix Main UOM Conversions Sales Tax Override Mix User Fields Locations Costs Prices j Strength gt Agaregate Size Slump Cement Type Water Cement Ratio Days to Strength Pricing Information Price Up Price Down Iv Pricing Cement Content 5 000 6 000 4 000 14 Enter Price Up amp Price Down modifiers 15 Accept the screen To set content for subsequent mixes Enter the Pricing Cement Content for the mix COMMANDseries will use that value to calculate the price of the mix A Caution Do not enter a standard mix price for any mix that is to be subject to content pricing An entered price will be added to content pricing Base Mix Pricing Cement Content 5 Base Mix Price 65 Base Mix Price Up modifier 6 Base Mix Price Down modifier 4 If you have a mix with a cement content of 6 the price will be 65 1 6 71 If you have a mix with a cement conten
324. ng information for the other locations Item Inventory Setup The Inventory tab is used to enter inventory information for a specific location These fields do not contain the current inventory amount for an item but specify the parameters needed to track and manage the inventory To define inventory information 1 Select the Inventory tab 8 9 05 221 Items Inventory Tab EDTIMSTC Main UOM Conversions Sales Tax Override User Fields Locations Costs Prices Inventory Batching Batch Codes 1 SHELBY Storage Location Reorder Quantity to Maximum Quantity to Reorder Point Minimum Quantity to Lead Time in Days 2 N SUBUF Storage Location Reorder Quantity to Maximum Quantity to Reorder Point Minimum Quantity to Lead Time in Days s M Copy to All 2 In the Storage Location field enter the plant where the item is stored In some cases the item may be sold from one location and stored at another 3 Enter the Maximum Quantity of the item that can be stored at this location 4 Enter the Minimum Quantity of the item that should be stored 5 Inthe Reorder Quantity field enter the amount that should be reordered when the reorder point is reached 6 Enter the minimum quantity of the item that can be reached before reordering in the Reorder Point field 7 Indicate the number of days in advance of expected need that the item should be ordered in the Lead Time in Days field 8 Mark the Copy
325. ng screen A low value keeps the on screen data to a minimum while a higher value keeps more orders on the Tracking screen allowing for easier access Typical values are 120 to 240 2 4 hours Specify the type s of Truck Tracking Messages Allowed to display in the Message Area of the Truck Tracking screen from the field s list The options are Messages Only Statuses Only Messages and Statues 142 In the Earliest pre ticket status field select a status from the list This status is the earliest status from which a truck can be pre ticketed Mark the Allow P O Change on Ticket checkbox if necessary If marked this checkbox allows the Purchase Order field as entered on the Orders screen to be changed on the Tickets screen The feature allows tickets to have different purchase order numbers than their orders Mark the Default Pricing Plant from Scheduled Plant checkbox if necessary If you do not use delivery methods zone codes or map pages you can elect to eliminate them from the Order screens to prevent confusion 10 11 12 13 14 15 Mark the Show Delivery Methods in Orders Tickets checkbox if necessary Many concrete companies do not use delivery methods and eliminating the field form the order form simplifies order entry Select an option in the Show Map Page in Orders Tickets field The options are No The field will not be displayed Yes The field will be displayed Required
326. ng to this company will be treated with respect to finance charges To set up company finance charges 1 Click on the Finance Charges tab to enter company based finance charge information that can be assessed against customer balances in COMMANDreceivables Companies EDTCOMP2 Cost Centers Finance Charges Annual Percentage f 19 000 Calculation Method By Due Date r MinimumAmount bm Calculation Level Customer Plant zl Waiver Amount 2 bh Calculate on Finance Charges 2 Select the Calculate on Finance Charges checkbox if the company applies finance charges 3 Enter the Annual Percentage rate to be charged the company 4 Select the Calculation Method and Calculation Level for tabulating the finance charges 5 Enter the Minimum Amount of a finance charge This field identifies the minimum amount to be used as a finance charge Any finance charge calculation that falls below this amount is automatically raised to this amount 64 T Enter the Waiver Amount of a finance charge This field identifies the amount that will cause the finance charge to be waived not charged Any finance charge calculation that falls below this amount will be waived Accept the Companies screen Employees Your employees perform one or more of the following functions Drivers assigned to truck records and confirmed as the driver when trucks are assigned to tickets Salesmen first assigned to customers and projects the
327. ngle field line below the Mix Products line This code uniquely identifies each associated product assigned to each project specific mix product Note If an admixture is entered as an associated product in a project file then whenever the relevant mix is placed on a product order 290 8 9 05 20 21 22 23 24 25 the associated product s will automatically be added to the order To simply give the customer a specific price for an inconsistently used admixture then enter the admixture in the project as an extra product doing so will give the customer the preferential pricing but will not automatically put the admixture into a mix Press the associated product Pricing button to enter pricing information for this item on this project If necessary press Add Occurrence to add more associated products Enter any necessary Extra Products This code uniquely identifies each extra product assigned to a customer More than one extra product can be assigned to a customer Extra products are not specific to any one mix product assigned to a customer and can be added to any order for the customer Select a Plant from which the extra product may be ordered Enter project specific pricing for the extra product by pressing the Pricing button Accept the screen to save the project or proceed to the Forecast tab To enter products using the Ready Mix Summary Products screen 1 Select Summary Ready Mix Produc
328. noo35o5e A4 1u o Au d L uonmoesue _ L 1Ip 4O9 Mad qns 1soo 3815 nuno55v OG SOD piepuess ney OO TO pue jenazew 00 S OT p A 952 9 sajdurex s dr 3 y yso5 psepuejs SuelpA y pue 1so2 p AI 2 31 e1o1 BY u BDUBIAJJIP 00 SZ IECH pold 1U El ddd jelaey Aue pio2 1 OL WAI SOD puepueys Duer jNeH Jel4azeW JSOD PaAladay Je uonoesue1 00 OOT Auedwo7 Auedwoy eso AlojJUsAUT AJOJUSAU BY 0 JOSJJO BY p109 1 OL Sjee wW 3SOD puepuejs 00 SZ IECH pold 1U El Mey AIOUUSAUT ye AJOJUSAU 0 BSECSIOU BY p102 1 OL JUNOWY JUNOWIY yunoo5o5e A4 1u o Anuga d L uonmo5esue L 1Ip 49 Mad qns 1soo 3815 n3uno55v Oe 1so2 piepue3s 00 01 OT Donan sajdurex s dr 3 y pouni m uonenjea AIOIUSAUT ISO piepue31sS y uo p seg Sau 15 A10 UZAUIGNYWWOD 363 8 9 05 SIUSPSUO 00 SZ 3 amp 3 pold yue q s Besn Auioju AuI p sn AsO USAU JO 1sSo2 BY Dio3al OL Sjee wW 00 SZ 3 amp 2 poid 1U El Mey AJOIUSAUT AJOJUDAU 0 se 12 p BY P4OD94 OL JUNOWY yunouiyv yunoo5o5e A4 1u o Au d L uonmo5esue _ L 1ip o 1yiq dqd qns 1Soo 3815 nuno55v OS Z SO9 piepues3ss SUN OT 1u ni1iisuo2 e se p sn sajdurex sasesy sajes 00 SZ IECH poid yjue q s Besn Aiolju Aul pjos AJOJUSAU Jo JSOD au P4ODII OL Sjee w 00 SZ 3 amp 2 pold 1U El Mey AIOUUSAUT AJOJUDAU 0 se 12 p BY P4OD94 OL yunouuyv yunouiyv
329. nother one of these use the Add Occurrence button The hooked arrow on the button is taken from the symbol on a typewriter s lt Return gt key the key you pressed whenever you needed a new line Anytime you see it you can select it to create another line for data entry For example if you are entering Task Codes and need to enter a new one press the Add Occurrence button Example of the Add Occurrence button m Contact Type Codes ma E r key Pecie EY f 2 Upper Managemert UPPER EI J E WE The Add Occurrence button appears throughout COMMANDseries 8 9 05 31 Example of many types of Add Occurrence buttons Main Addresses Pricing Accounting Invoicing Distribution User Fields Distances H Forecast Plant al x j Ready Mix Products H j Mix Products Product Description Category Plant gt 30656 3000 Ga 244 6 MIx 1 SHELBY z Pricing JACCEL Accelerator 02 Accel o Pricing _ gt 40074 4000 psi 3 8 6 MIX Ready Mix d Pricing d Ready Mix This Add Occurrence Extra Products button lets you add an Zi additional admixture to Mix 30656 This Add Occurrence button lets you add an additional mix to this This Add Occurrence project list button lets you add an additional extra product to the project list You can also press lt F6 gt to execute the Add Occurrence command Smart Lookup Many functions in COMMA
330. nter the preferred Truck Type or detail on the field to select from a list To select all truck types enter The function of the next four fields depends upon the Default Price Type The image below illustrates the different options Project Product Pricing Fixed Delivery EDTPROJO detail Truck Material Cartage Delivered Type Price Table Bate Price i 4 15 fi 1 50 415 gt da iT 425 f2 050 425 d 2 32 j f sof 312 d m 10 80 f 2 00 7280 sl d FOB Standard Enter the Material Price or accept the default from the Pricing Item file and assign a Cartage Table and Rate If the cartage table is a straight per quantity charge the Delivered Price will be calculated as the Material Price plus the Cartage Rate If cartage is charged using another method the Material Price will default as the Delivered Price Fixed Material Enter the Cartage Table and the quoted Delivered Price The cartage Rate will be calculated and displayed Fixed Cartage Enter the Cartage Table and the quoted Delivered Price The Material Price will be calculated and displayed Note Pricing calculations can only be done on this screen if the Cartage Rate Type is quantity based If another type of cartage such as per load or per hour is being used then the default values will display Pricing adjustments for the fixed delivered price will be made during ticketing Press the Add Occur
331. ntitious materials in the mix product divided by the divisor indicated in the adjacent field Note that this extension code will include all cement and cementitious fly ash products in the mix The adjacent divisor field is only displayed if a per weight type extension code is selected If the Ordered Quantity unit of measure is set to Dosage a separate field will be displayed which allows the user to define the dosage quantity per weight This extension should only be used for items associated to a mix product i e associated products Delivered Quantity This value based on the Order Quantity Extension Code is calculated at the time of ticketing The calculated value is stored in the DELV_QTY field of the TKTL or TLAP tables This value is also accumulated in the DELV_QTY field of the ORDL or OLAP tables The value in these fields from the ticket tables is printed on the delivery ticket using the document format tag LOADQY The delivered quantity will be subsequently used to for calculating cost and for 8 9 05 203 posting to inventory The delivered quantity may be converted to a different inventory unit of measure The Delivered Quantity has a Ticket Quantity Extension Code that determines how the Ticket Quantity value will be printed The ticket quantity value is stored in the TKT_QTY field of the TKTL or TLAP tables The value in these fields is printed using the document format tag TKTQTY The ticket quantity is only used for
332. nts gt Document Format Groups gt Formats The Invoice Out Format Codes screen displays Invoice Out Format Codes EDTDOC5G W Invoice Out Format Codes INVCPL1 Standard Invoice Plain 17 pitch File Header gt INPL1 701 Std Invoice Header Plain 17 pitch Display File Detail Invoice Header gt INPL1 702 Std Invoice Detail Header Plain 17 pitch File Detail Invoice Detail gt INPL1 703 Stdlnvoice Detail Line Plain 17 pitch 2 Enter the document format codes for each desired field Header The Header of an invoice out document is generally printed at the beginning of each page and typically consists of information such as the customer name and address and date File Detail Invoice Header The Fine Detail Invoice Header of an invoice out document is generally positioned directly below the Header of each page File Detail Invoice Detail The Fine Detail Invoice Detail of an invoice out document is generally printed between the Header and Footer of each page and typically consists of information such as product category price project code and product code 3 View and adjust the form by clicking the Display button 4 Accept the Invoice Out Format Codes and the Document Format Group Codes screens Ticket Overflow Format Codes Setup This screen is used to specify the various elements document formats that make up a ticket overflow document Each of the elements must 102 already be defined using the Documen
333. nve Invoice v Formats d JINVCFO12 Stl Standard Invoice Form 12 pi StinFo12 Invoice z Formats A JINVCNFT2 St Standard Invoice New Form 12cpi StinNAi2 Invoice z Formats A IMC AJ Standard Invoice Plain 17 pitch StinP Invoice _Formats d QUOTE af Standard Project Quote Quote Quote z Formats d 2 Click on the Add Occurrence button to insert a new code Enter a document format code in the Code field Enter a Description and a Short description Select a Document Format Group Type from the field s list Click on the Formats button to format the codes See the next section Invoice Format Codes Setup 7 Accept the screen to save document format group information GAR E Invoice Format Codes Setup This screen is used to specify codes for the elements of the invoice document formats Each of the elements must already be defined on the Document Format Fields screen function Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Format Groups gt Formats When setting up a format consider the type of printer the size of the type style font and the length of the form on which the statement will be printed to ensure that all desired information will fit in the space allowed on the form The Document Format Group Type field on the Document Format Group Codes screen should display Invoice To set up invoice format codes 1 Select the Formats button on the Document Format Group Codes
334. nverting the value the user enters in the Ordered Quantity field on the Item Units of Measure screen Files gt Item Information gt Items gt UOM The Ordered Quantity value which may differ depending upon the user s needs is extended to three fields Delivered Quantity Ticket Quantity Pricing Quantity To define UOM information 1 Select the UOM tab Item Category concrete UOM EDTICAT1 UOM Mix Defaults Tax Override Ordered Quantity Ordered Quantity Extension Code 40003 cu yds Per Unit Delivered Quantity Ticket Quantity Extension Code 40003 cuyds Delivered Quantity Batch 40003 cu yds Inventory Cost gt 40003 cuyds Price Quantity Price Quantity Extension Code Purchase gt 40003 cuyds 40003 cu yds Delivered Quantity z 2 Inthe Ordered Quantity field enter the code that represents the unit of measure for an ordered quantity of the item You can detail on the field to call the UOM Selection screen 3 Select an Ordered Quantity Extension Code from the list This field determines how the delivered quantity is calculated Possible choices preset within the application are as follows Per Unit Per Mix Cubic Quantity Per Load Per Weight of Cement Per Weight of Cementitious Materials Percent of Weight of Cement Percent of Weight of Cementitious Materials Per Weighted Item s Quantity 4 Inthe Delivered Quantity field enter the code that repre
335. o keep better track of drivers on clock time particularly as they approach the necessary number of hours for different times of overtime pay It does so through the use of conditions discussed earlier and Driver Overtime Tables As a driver accrues on road hours the system compares the amounts with values in the driver s assigned overtime table If a certain plateau has been reached the driver is set to an appropriate condition Daily Warning for example is the condition that denotes that the driver is approaching the number of hours necessary for daily overtime pay The condition can also trigger a change in the appearance of the driver s assigned truck token on the Tracking amp Scheduling screen The change in appearance alerts the dispatcher as to the driver s overtime status and can make a note to avoid using the driver for the remainder of that day if at all possible Because of the differences in state and federal transportation regulations along with union rules COMMANDseries supports track for three different types of overtime Daily Weekly Rolling 196 Rolling overtime totals the time for a specified number of previous days and is used to an extent as a safety device to help prevent a driver from logging too many hours during a seven day period To set up a new Driver Overtime Table 1 Open the Driver Overtime Table screen Files gt General Information gt Driver Overtime Driver Overtime EDTDROT
336. o want the Credit Code Description to display for Charge only customers check this flag When an order is created for a custoemr project with this credit code a dialog box will appear displaying the credit code description It s highly unlikely that you will ever need to set this flag 118 To check a customers credit 1 If you wish to continue to sell to customers with this credit code despite exceeding the credit limit enter an Exceed Authorization Code If an order is entered for a customer with this credit code a dialog box will display in which an authorized credit officer can enter the authorization code Note As with all passwords the Credit Code editor encrypts the Exceed Authorization Code password The system asks you to Confirm the password Type in the password again and accept the screen When a new Credit Code is entered with an authorization code it is also encrypted on the Data Maintenance screen when the Credit Table is retrieved The Exceed Authorization Code is known as the Credit Override Authorization on the Data Maintenance screen This ensures that only users with the proper authorization may access the Exceed Authorization Code Data Maintenance DBAUFLD m Data Maintenance View of CUST PROJ GC Tables 2 Views Field Key T pe Current Value 0 YCAT i CUST CODE 1 String 10 Aj E YCPC 2 PRO CODE 2 Stingi2 i YGDA 4
337. oduct line Certain options available to one product line may not be available for others To define customer pricing information 1 From the Customers screen select the Pricing tab Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers gt Pricing Select a Product Line from the field s list Mark the Copy To All checkbox if necessary to copy the selected product type to all files associated with the customer Select a Price Category This field designates a price category for the customer It is used in the COMMANDconcrete pricing procedure when a price is derived from the product record Prices are assigned to products on a plant and price category basis Select a Pricing Plant Code This field designates a pricing plant for the customer The pricing plant is used in COMMANDconcrete pricing logic 8 9 05 when a price is derived from the product record not the customer or project record Select a Trade Discount Percent or a Trade Discount Amount if necessary These fields establish a trade discount percent amount for the customer A Trade Discount is a discount that will always be applied to the customer s orders It differs from a Terms Discount which is dependent on the customer paying in a timely manner Customers Pricing Tab EDTCUSTE Main Addresses Sales Taxing Pricing Charges Accounting Invoicing Distribution User Fields Products Concrete Copy to All Price Cate
338. ok Sales Tax Payable To G L By Shipping Plant Tax Location Non Taxable Reason gt 34 Governmental Concrete Copy to All Credit Debit Memo Reason Code gt JAH Trucking Deduction 2 Enter the Invoice Format Group Code This field is used to specify the code that represents the desired document layout for generating invoices 8 9 05 147 10 11 12 13 14 From the Invoice by Order or Ticket Date field s list select Order Date or Ticket Date Indicate whether the Terms Discount Calculation Method should be to Compute pre tax discountable amount or Compute pre tax discountable amount plus tax amount If the Terms Discount Calculations field is set to Compute pre tax discountable amount the Compute Tax on Discount Amount checkbox will be activated When marked this checkbox causes the tax effect of any discount offered on an invoice to be calculated and stored for the invoice Mark the Separate Suspend Credit and Debit Memos checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox allows the authorization of credit memos before they are posted to Accounts Receivable Mark the Use Plant Level Terms Code checkbox if necessary Mark the Use Product Level Terms Code Discount Overrides checkbox if necessary The terms code determines the discount date The actual discount amount or percent is assigned at the item product level as a default which can be overridden by either a customer product or project produ
339. on the charge table Customer Pricing Project level price for the sundry charge item Project Products Customer level price for the sundry charge Item Customer Products The Item Master File Only here are Price Categories considered If no pricing exists at any of the prior levels then the price is set from the charge table itself e ee ae Note No price means that the field must be null empty the system will process a zero price as a valid price To enter a new sundry charge 1 Goto the Sundry Charges screen Files gt Item Information gt Sundry Charges Sundry Charges EDTPCHG m Sundry Charges EN Sundry Charge 3 Description Weekend Delivery Charge m3 Short WKND M3 Item Code iss Weekend Charge ld Charge Type Per Unit x Combine with Material Price Do not Include z Target Unit of Measure gt 4001 3 cu meter Time To Use ScheduledLoad From Date iJanuay ThuDate m 31 December Start End Time Time Days to Apply Charge Joo 23 59 L All T Mon Tue Wed T Thu Fi M Sat T Sun Current Amount Effective Previous Amount 2000 m 17 ua200 f 1900 lt gt First load only bh Apply Automatically to all Orders Z Concrete Aggregate 2 Inthe Sundry Charge field enter the sundry charge table code Ce Enter a Description and Short description Enter the Item Code to which you are assigning this sundry charge Select a Charge Type from the
340. onfiguration Financials Configuration Projects Quotes Configuration Lien Configuration User Fields Configuration 8 9 05 127 Initial System Configuration At this point in your COMMANDseries setup it is not necessary to complete the entire system configuration However an initial configuration is necessary to define some of the main system settings To enter the initial configuration 1 Select Files gt General Information gt Configuration Configuration System Tab EDTCNFXA Receivables Aging Statements Financials Projects Quotes Lien User Fields Optimization System Defaults Distribution Dispatch Aggregate Signaling Invoicing Inventory System Name JCRT Industries Auditing Control Archiving Control Auditing Method No audits x JW Archive Paid Invoice Transactions Perform During Posting Archive Sales Tax Distributions for Paid Transactions Order Audit Log Fields Archive General Ledger Distributions for Paid Currency Control Measurement System u S Customary E j Currency Code USA United States Tracking Plant Quantities Do Not Convert Use Multiple Customer Codes Pricing Method Use Content Pricing z Customary Content Item Code E J Metric Content Item Code ll 2 Enter the System Name as you want it to appear on reports This name should be your company name corporation name or the name that best represents the COMMANDseries data The System Name will al
341. or Admix Charges Zone Charge Discount Setting Up Content Pricing The initial setup for content pricing has several steps Because of certain database triggers that must be set you must move back and forth between the Configuration and Item editors to complete the configuration e Set Configuration flag e Create Base mix item e Specify Base mix in Configuration e Set up down modifiers in Base mix e Configure other mixes To set the Configuration flag 1 Open the Configuration System screen The Configuration screen displays Files gt General Information gt Configuration Appendix E Content Pricing 369 Configuration System EDCNFXA U S Customary Do Not Convert 2 In the Pricing Method field select Use Content Pricing Two additional fields will display Customary Content Item Code and Metric Content Item Code You will come back to these fields later 3 Save the configuration screen To create the base item 4 Open the Items editor Files gt Item Information gt Items Enter an Item Code Enter the rest of the mix information including price On the Mix tab enter the base cement content in the Pricing Cement Content field oy ou gi 8 Save the new mix If you do work on two measurement systems you will need to create two separate mixes Note The checkbox under Pricing Information is a Version 4 artifact and should be ignored 370 Appe
342. or orders the pricing plant assigned to the order is used to determine the next number sequence code For tickets the shipping plant assigned to the ticket is used More than one plant can be assigned the same next number sequence code so that they would share in a single sequential assignment of numbers Quote next numbers are determined by the next sequence code assigned in the Next Quote Code Sequence Code field on the Quotes tab of the Configuration screen Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Quotes Invoice next numbers are determined by the sequence code assigned to an accounting category if such is in use or a plant record If using accounting categories credit memos and debit memos generated through the invoicing process an independent sequence code can be used to determine the next number The accounting category used would be the one assigned to the project if any or the customer for which the invoice is generated The plant used would be the first pricing plant encountered for the invoice being generated If you want the orders tickets and invoice numbers to indicate the plant for which each was generated you could assign a unique sequence code to each plant The sequence could start with the plant number and be large enough to support an appropriate range of numbers for each document To employ this concept the starting codes to set up for plant 12 would be as follows Orders 1200 Starts over each day
343. or ticket requires a specific type of truck Truck types are uniquely identified by a truck type code This code is set up on the Truck Types screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Truck Types 3 Select a Product Line from the field s list 4 Enter a Minimum Load Size This field represents the smallest load size that the truck normally carries Trucks that carry a load below this size may be assessed a minimum load charge depending on how the customer project order and or ticket are flagged for minimum load charges 5 Enter a Scheduled Load Size to represent the optimum load size for the truck When truck based scheduling is used such as for aggregate scheduling this load size is defaulted for scheduling this truck 6 Enter a Maximum Gross to represent the largest load size that the truck should carry The maximum load size is used in ticketing to display a warning message when a load size is entered that exceeds the maximum load size 7 Enter Tare Weight information including the Date Time Days Tare is Valid and the Tare Type 8 Enter a Delivery Method to indicate whether the truck is a company truck a hauler truck an F O B truck etc 9 Mark the F O B Truck checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox marks this as a freight on board truck and haul charges do not apply Truck Tracking Setup To set up truck tracking information 1 Select the Tracking tab on the Trucks screen Files g
344. orary license will display automatically 4 Use the Add Occurrence button to add additional applications 5 Ifa temporary feature appears to be affecting how your system runs use the Disable button to turn the feature on and off for testing purposes Note Disabling a feature has not impact on the 30 day trial period 6 Select additional Batch Console functions and enter Counts as neccessary 7 Select additional Signaling Unit functions and enter Counts as neccessary 8 Accept the Temporary License Options screen and accept the Licenses screen to activate the temporary license s Restoring an Old License Sometimes it is necessary to restore an old license either because of database problems or because of problems with a new license An old license can restored in one of two ways e Enter the license manually see directions above e Import the license if you have made a backup copy To make it easier to import licenses as well as other data a shortcut to the Data Import function is placed in the Windows Start menu Start gt Programs gt COMMANDseries gt Import COMMANDseries Data 8 9 05 39 To import an old license 1 Ensure everyone is logged off and open the Import Data screen Manage gt Data Management gt Import Data Import Data scren DBAIMPR Wi Import Data lolx _ JPRD RE License File Al JSCH JSTA Ju VD eet LMCC Delete Existing Records Before Import 1 LNCO M
345. ormation about the individuals who will be using the system Also you need to determine if you are going to use groups Using groups makes maintaining user information easier by allowing you to set up the same information for a large number of people To create a user and password 1 Open the Users screen Files gt System Information gt Users gt Users Users EDTUSNM m Users User SYSTEM Group Owner Name Command Alkon Group Name gt Last Changed 13Jul 2001 16 26 16 Password senn Lifetime LastAccessed 16 Jul 2001 12 06 204 879 05 43 2 Assign the User a name using uppercase or lowercase characters Unmark the Group checkbox 4 Enter an Owner Name This required field is a description of the user name 5 Select a Group Name for the user This will specify the user record if any to which this user will belong A list of group names can be accessed by clicking on the field s detail button 6 Enter a Password for the user Re enter the password when prompted for confirmation 7 Inthe Lifetime field specify the number of days that the password for this user is valid starting from the day the current password is assigned to the user If the field is blank no limit is set on the lifetime of the password na Note If Windows Security is enabled the Password and Lifetime fields will be suppressed To assign a group 1 Goto the Users screen Files gt System Information
346. ory Replication Services QU Quotations Aggregate Dispatch FS Flat Scale Interfaces COMMANDwriter CB Block amp Building Material Dispatch Cartage CE Eagle Batching Credit Checking LN Liens Asphalt IN Inform Interface Map Order Entry RO Rostering Pricing amp Prep MT Map Truck Tracking Auto ticketing AL Auto loadout COMMANDexecutive GP Graphic Performance Monitor Product Sales Option OL Overhead Loadout Mix Proportioner DI Document Imaging COMMANDperformance GM Windows Tracking amp Scheduling Auto Statusing MM Material Manager User Configuration The Users screen defines the user records that allow individuals access to all COMMANDseries applications The user record controls certain aspects of an individual s use of the COMMANDseries applications When the application is installed a temporary user is set up At the minimum you need to extend the life of the temporary user by changing its Lifetime field Eventually you will need to set up permanent user records for each individual or group before allowing them access to the applications Topics in this section Password Security Assigning a User and Password Preferences User level Licenses Privileges Field level Security Order Printers Order Printers Communications Port Setup Options Plants 8 9 05 41 Password Security Effective in 5 57 7 COMMANDseries is implementing a new method of password security This new option which integrat
347. ous Standard Cost 2850 to Cost Extension Per unit Previous Cost Extension Per unit D Standard Cost Effective 20 Sep 2000 x x Copy to All 8 9 05 219 2 Enter the Standard Cost for the item at the plant specified in the Location field 3 Inthe Cost Extension field select the quantity for which the standard cost is applied from the drop down list 4 Enter the Standard Cost Effective date This date represents when the standard cost becomes effective 5 If you change the standard cost the original value will be automatically transferred to the Previous Standard Cost field 6 If you change the cost extension the original value will be automatically transferred to the Previous Cost Extension field 7 If you want the cost or extension change to be applied to all locations mark the Copy to All checkbox If the item is a mix then cost information will be calculated based on the entered cost information of the constituents Cost information is displayed but cannot be edited Items Costs Tab mix EDTIMSTA mix Man UOM Conversions Sales Tax Overide Mie UserFields Locations Item Prices Setup The Prices tab is used to enter price information about the item such as current and previous price and current and previous price extension To define price information 1 Select the Prices tab Items Prices Tab EDTIMSTB 8 9 05 2 Enter a code for the Price Category o
348. ow the individual orders for the customer or product The detail lines may include such information as product code product description quantity price and extended price The Detail Lines are positioned directly below the Line Header 879 05 Line Footer The Line Footer typically shows the subtotals It is positioned directly below the Detail Line Summary Ticket Header This field contains a header for the display of the tickets that were shipped for a particular plant It may contain such text as Ticket numbers shipped for plant 12 It is positioned directly below the Line Footer Summary Ticket Detail This field contains detail for tickets that were shipped for a particular plant The Summary Ticket Detail is positioned directly below the Summary Ticket Header Message Lines This field contains user defined text This may be for example Please note the price increase effective on dd mm yyyy The Message Lines are positioned directly below the Line Footer Footer The footer typically contains totals information It may show such information as total sales amount total sales tax and total quantity The Footer is positioned directly below the Message Lines 3 Enter the Number of lines in body of form View and adjust the form by clicking the Display button 5 Accept the Invoice Format Codes and the Document Format Group Codes screens Statement Format Codes Setup This screen is used to specify the elements
349. p The Truck Tracking Preferences tab allows you to distinguish trucks from each other by assigning a specific color to each truck in Tracking and Scheduling Note To reset color defaults go to the Options menu from this screen and select Defaults To define tracking preferences 1 Goto the Tracking preferences tab Misc gt Preferences gt Tracking Preferences Tracking Tab SYSPREF5 W Preferences Bisi x General User Sounds Colors Tracking Fonts Keys Toolbar Forms Screen Background gt lt Scheduling Information Truck Report Line EZA Tracking Information Quantity Report Line xxx Clock Display Bea Full Display Header Line _Xx Message Header Line xxx Full Display Grid Title Line xxx Order Header Line _Xxx Grid Border Tags Esa Truck Status Header Line _Xxx Total Fleet Lines _Xxx Load Sequence Header Line Xxx Plant Fleet Lines _Xxx Trucks Returning Header Line _Xxx Plant Truck Demand Graph Xxx Plant Lines sel Plant Willcall Demand Graph ac Trucks on Break _Xxx Total Truck Demand Graph Xx Trucks on Overtime xxx Total Willcall Demand Graph _ Xxx Late Time Display _Xxx Special Display Graph _Xxx Willcall Order Display Xxx Fleet Adjustment Graph x On Hold Order Display Xxx Preload Demand Graph z 2 Select a Screen Background color to be used for the Tracking and Scheduling screens When you select an item you are prompted to select both a foreground and bac
350. p areas related to map page books to which deliveries can be made Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Map Pages Price Categories To establish the groups to which customers can be assigned that allow for assigning prices for products purchased Files gt Item Information gt Price Categories Usage Codes To establish the ways that customers ultimately use ready mixed concrete Files gt Item Information gt Usage Codes Item Categories To set up the categories that represent the groups of products sold or used in the process of making products for sale or items that are maintained in inventory Files gt Item Information gt Item Categories Items To set up all products those for resale as well those that are constituents for salable products also services and intangibles charges minimum load seasonal unloading etc also those items that while not related to products sold are simply maintained in inventory Files gt Item Information gt Items 16 System Information DC PO lt Qm GE gt lt m 0 ar Purpose Minimum Load Charge Tables lt CO To establish the table that controls when minimum load charges are to be assessed for concrete tickets and the price for various tiers of load sizes Files gt Item Information gt Minimum Load Charges Seasonal Charges To
351. p scale types 1 In COMMANDaggregate open the Scale Types screen Files gt General Information gt Scale Types 8 9 05 81 LA Scale Types EDTSCTY m Scale Types id x Scale Type 2 Interface Type Truck Scale x Description Cardinal Scale Short Cardinal Request String Format gt Input String Format gt Sign Characters Positive l Negative Motion Characters Motion Still U 0 M Characters Received z d Special Characters Bit 1 x Enter a number to represent the type of scale in the Scale Type field Enter a long Description for the scale type Enter a Short description which will be substituted in numerous fields to conserve screen space In the Request String Format field enter the arming sequence code to be used for on demand output scales On demand scales require a host system to ask for the weight data A character or sequence of characters must be sent to the scale indicator before it will send back any weights If the scale is configured for continual output not recommended no Request String Format is required In the Input String Format field enter the mask used to define a packet of weight data being sent by the scale indicator to the host Special codes must be used to define the weight string Following is a list b space s sign c CRC or checksum ignored u unit of measure m motion detection w weight Note Lowercase must be used for the six speci
352. p screen requires that the settings match the configuration of the unit 4 Accept the information Auto Ticketing Units Communication SmartPass To set up communication 1 Select the Communication tab from the Auto Ticketing Units screen Files gt General Information gt Auto Ticketing Units gt Communications 2 Enter a Manager Number This specifies the COMMANDcomm manager number to be used when auto ticketing 3 Enter the TCP IP Address of the Moxa Server controlling your badge readers 4 Accept the information Auto Ticketing Units Lane Configuration Regardless of your auto ticketing interface the individual lane configuration will be similar The screen shot below shows an XCI LC20K A Caution Plants using SmartPass must have a separate comm manager for each lane To configure a lane 1 Select the interface tab from the Auto Ticketing Units screen Files gt General Information gt Auto Ticketing Units gt interface type Auto Ticketing Units EDTAUTK2 Communication CI LC20K Serial Number J Target Plant Scale Lane Manager Code Code Action J x x Tare Truc JI Stop Light D GE Iv See Setup F 2 XCI LC20K only Enter the unit s Serial Number 3 Enter a Lane number Target Manager Plant Code and Scale Code 4 Inthe Action field define the type of lane 8 9 05 79 5 Check the Stop Light checkbox if you want a stop light 6 If you marked the Stop Light checkbo
353. p screens Enter the customer s full name in the Name field Enter a Sort Name by which to identify the customer The Main tab allows you to enter information such as address contact person and phone number 8 9 05 To set up main information 1 6 From the Customers screen select the Main tab Customers Addresses Tab EDTCUSTA Main Addresses Sales Taxing Pricing Charges Accounting Invoicing Distribution Products Address City State Country Postal Code Contact Phone Number 1 Phone Number 2 Phone Number 3 Phone Number 4 Setup Date Code 3838 North Lyndale Ee Birmingham AL JUSA 25202 im Smith 555 6666 m m m By fo1Jan 1998 Enter the customer s Address City State Country and Postal ZIP Enter the name of a Contact person for this customer Use the Phone Number 1 4 fields to enter the customer s phone number and any other related numbers such as fax cellular or e mail Enter t in the Setup Date field to specify today as the creation date for this customer Accept the screen to save the information entered on the Main tab Customer Address Setup The Addresses tab allows you to enter address information related to the customer s invoices and statements When COMMANDseries generates an invoice or a statement it checks the customer record to see if there is an specified address for statements invoices If there is no addre
354. phalt or concrete Similarly there are a number of tabs such as Batch Codes and Constituents that only appear on the Items screen if the item belongs to an Item Category with an Item Type of asphalt or concrete Item Categories Setup To enter a new item category 1 2 Go to the Item Categories screen Files gt Item Information gt Item Categories Enter an Item Category code Item Categories aggregate UOM Tab EDTICAT Wi Item Categories Bisi E ltem Category Description Short ltem Type 10 Coarse Aggregates Lb Jaa Lb Aggregate Coarse j Taxable Taxable x UOM Tax Override Ordered Quantity Ordered Quantity Extension Code 60003 Tons Per Unit D Delivered Quantity Ticket Quantity Extension Code gt 60003 Tons Delivered Quantity v j Batch gt 60002 pounds 1S Inventory Cost gt J60003 Tons Price Quantity Price Quantity Extension Code Purchase gt 60003 Tons gt e0003 Tons Delivered Quantity Reporting gt J60003 Tons 3 Enter a Description and Short description for the item category as 4 desired From the list select an Item Type to assign to this item category Generic UOM settings will default for certain Item Types Select a Taxable status taxable or non taxable for the category Proceed to the UOM tab Item Categories UOM Setup Items are assigned units of measure UOM and quantity extension codes to determine the method for co
355. ponent ingredient or constituent of any ready mix product on an order for this customer to be printed on each delivery ticket Proceed to the next tab or accept the screen to save the customer information Customer User Fields Setup The user fields feature allows you to store and communicate different types of information on different aspects of your day to day business Note The User Fields tab will not display on the Customers form unless you have configured user fields on the system Configuration screen Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt User Fields Any user fields entered into the User Fields tab of the Configuration screen will display on the User Fields tab on the Customer screen On this screen you can enter information into the user fields To enter information in customer user fields 1 From the Customers screen select the User Fields tab Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers gt User Fields Customers User Fields Tab EDTCUSTJ 2 Enter the field information based on your own company policies 3 Proceed to the next tab or accept the screen to save the customer information Customer Products Setup The Products tab allows you to set up mix and aggregate products for the customer To define customer products 1 From the Customer screen select the Products tab Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers gt Products
356. port to each print model to verify that each is functioning correctly To define a print model 1 Goto the Print Models screen Files gt System Information gt Print Models 2 Enter a Print Model code number Print Models EDTUPRT m Print Models Bi Es Print Model 300004 Description Okidata Microline 320 Short Output Type Printer x j Printer Options Print Device Prompt z Device Type z Device Mode Portrait at 12 cpi z Columns EI 3 Lines Ku a Printer Initialization String gt Printer Close String sl Queue Options Route Reports to Queue 3 Enter a description of the Print Model 4 If you want enter a short description in the Short field 5 From the Output Type field s list choose a method of printing Screen sends the information to the screen for display Printer prints the information to a printing device File sends the information to a file Plant sends information through COMMANDcomm and to a plant WordPad sends information to Windows WordPad Note If you encounter difficulties with Wordpad print models you may need to specify the path to Wordpad in the assignment file Additional information can be found in the SETUP RME file COMMANDprint This option is a conversion utility to enable proper printing of foreign language characters Contact your Command Alkon Service Representative for more information Print the details of the printer s current setting
357. prevents the running totals from growing to the point that the average is effectively static if you are averaging 10 000 loads it will take a lot of tickets to effect a change At the other end of the spectrum if you are averaging only 10 loads the travel time will bounce all over the place 100 loads is the suggested value Acceptable Travel Time Load Percentage This field might be better described as Travel Time Load Reduction Rate At some point the number of stored loads will exceed the amount specified by the Total Travel Time Loads field When that happens the total load time and the number of loads in the affected map page travel time record will be reduced by the specfied percentage For example If you have Total Travel Time Loads set to 100 and an Acceptable Travel Time Load Percentage value of 40 then if you have 100 loads totaling 1460 minutes then when another load is processed the system will 1 Reduce to 60 loads with a total time of 876 2 Process the new load Travel Time Post Tolerance The goal of the update process is to maintain accurate travel times One thing that can disrupt that goal are travel times that are extrended due to external factors truck breakdown traffic jam etc This field is used to identify and discard travel times that are so anomalous that using them would disrupt the accuracy of the average 190 The value entered is a percentage When evaluating a travel time the system
358. problem From 6 00 8 59 you have to deal with rush hour traffic The 115 tells the system to multiply the travel time value in the first field by 115 to get an adjusted value for rush hour The subsequent fields allow for adjustments during the other map page time periods allowing for the ebb and flow of traffic Specify a From Date or a beginning date for the travel times from the plant to the map page to apply Multiple dates may be entered to account for changing travel times throughout the year Specify a Thru Date or an ending date coordinating with the From Date for the travel times from the plant to the map page to apply Multiple dates may be entered to account for changing travel times throughout the year however the entire year must be accounted for with assigned travel times Enter estimated To Job travel times for travel from the specified plant to the map page during the time period set up on the Map Page Time Periods screen Files gt General Information gt Map Page Time Periods If Change Percentages have been entered then when a value is entered in the first field the rest of the fields on that line will be automatically calculated Note These times do not have to be exact because the dynamic travel time system incorporated in COMMANDseries statistically finds the average travel time to this map page from the specified plant during specific time periods The average times calculated by the system are displayed
359. provided the user has the prerequistie priviledges These fields allow customization of COMMANDreceivables without requiring changes to the program To enter receivables statements configuration information 1 From the Configuration screen select the Statements tab Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Statements Configuration Statements Tab EDTCNFXk m Configuration FI E System Defaults Distribution Dispatch Aggregate Invoicing Inventory Receivables Aging Statements Financials Projects Quotes Lien UserFields Statement Option Customer Statements No Totals or Breaks x Discount Day fio 3 Print Project Totals Print Lot Block Totals Print Zero Balance Statements Print Zero Items on Statement Statement Aging Message Codes Aging Category 1 ecn Aging Category 5 gt acis Aging Category 2 ler Aging Category 6 gt Aging Category 3 gt acs Aging Category 7 gt Aging Category 4 gt facia Statement Format Group Code gt STMTPL1 7 Standard Statement Plain 17 pitch 2 Inthe Statement Option field select the manner in which A R statements are to be formatted with respect to customers and companies 3 Enter a Discount Day the default day of the month that discounts are due 4 Mark all desired checkboxes to define how the system groups and totals transactions for printed forms 5 Select Statement Aging Message Codes for all of the ne
360. ptions and how they impact the system This information will be used in entering both Item Categories and Items WARNING It is critical that you understand how Units of Measure The UOM selection screen is invoked in different ways depending upon the work before proceeding to Item Category and Item setup Incorrectly configured UOMs can cause serious errors in product and price calculations screen from which you are calling the UOM selector Regardless of how the UOM screen is accessed it will always look the same UOM Selection screen FNDUOMS Possible Standard Units of Measure x Key Description Short Abbr Type 40001 Cubic Inches cu inch ci Dry Volume al 40002 Cubic Feet cu feet cf Dry Yolume 40003 Cubic Yards cu yds cy Dry Volume 40011 Cubic Millimeters cu mm s ms Dry Volume 40012 Cubic Centimeters cu cm s c3 DIy Volume 40013 Cubic Meters cumeter m3 Dry Volume Si C All Types C Area C Weight ore ei i Ger To C Distance Wet Volume Other 8 9 05 201 To use the UOM Selection screen 1 Select the UOM type with the radio buttons on the bottom of the screen The groups are self evident with two exceptions Strength lets you select from pounds per square inch psi Newtons per square millimeter N mm or Megapascals MPa Other contains a number of UOMs that do not fit into a clear category such as Each Per Load and Dosage 2 Scroll through the list until you find the correct UOM
361. r Files gt Cartage Information gt Quoted Deductions To set up accounting years used by COMMANDexecutive to sort sales information Reporting gt Sales Data Periods System C C I I AE CIQIL Information C A Y G IR IX T U N Purpose Sales Data JY To define the layout of the Configuration database table used for COMMANDexecutive reports Reporting gt Sales Data Configuration Contact Type S To set up tables that support the Codes multiple contacts assigned to Quote records Files gt Contacts gt Contact Information Contact JY To specify address and phone Information number information about contacts in the Quote records Files gt Contacts gt Contacts Job Source JY To specify the source of job Codes information in Quote records Files gt General Information gt Job Sources Job Types V To specify the type of job in Quote records Files gt General Information gt Job Types Some Starting Tips Gather all of the information necessary before you begin entering data Having all of the information at hand allows you to quickly move through the setup process without skipping over steps and potentially failing to enter important information Caution Follow the order presented in this manual In many cases information entered in later sections builds on information entered earlier Familiarize yourself with the online help Read th
362. r amp Project Information gt Projects gt Forecast Projects Forecast Tab EDTPROJP Main Addresses Pricing Accounting Invoicing Distribution User Fields Distances Products Forecast All Products P Project Begin Date Project Completion Date Product Short Descr Plant Estimated Forecasted Jan 2000 jJ LI __ 2 Select a Product Line from the drop down list Your selection will determine what products will be available for display 3 Enter a primary product or detail on the Product field to select from project products The product s Short Description and assigned Plant will default in automatically 4 The Estimated amount will display for reference purposes Enter a Forecasted amount This amount can be the entire estimated amount or you could do forecasting for just the first month or so then adjust the forecast once you have a better idea of actual material demand 8 9 05 5 If the Auto Spread checkbox is selected the system will automatically distribute the forecast amount evenly across the forecasting periods These amounts can be adjusted as needed 6 Press the Add Occurrence button to add another product to the display or accept the screen to save the project Payment Forms Payment forms allows you to define the forms of payment accepted by your company These forms are then assigned to individual orders allowing you to accurately determine how customers are paying If you es
363. r a Description and a Short description to identify the type and brand of modem Use the Prefixes area to enter modem control code sequences that perform startup or connection activities such as clearing the line auto dialing a number or setting the baud rate In the Timeout field enter the maximum allowed amount of time in seconds between the modem s transmission of any prefix control code sequence and the modem s reception of the correct answering control sequence from the device to which the modem is attempting to connect The default is 0 indicating that no timeout is set so the modem waits indefinitely for a response In the Code field enter a specific modem control code sequence of alphanumeric characters that performs a particular startup action such as clearing the line autodialing a number or setting the baud rate Up to nine prefix control codes may be specified for a modem 8 9 05 Note The prefix information controls modem connection activity while the suffix information controls modem disconnection activity 7 Inthe Response field enter the sequence of alphanumeric characters that COMMANDcomm expects to receive to indicate that the corresponding prefix code was successfully received and acknowledged by the device to which the modem is attempting to connect Up to nine prefix responses may be specified Note Some internal modem commands such as the Hays modem ATH command return messages directly from t
364. r a new form is started This prevents the message frame from building up a very large amount of data and consuming the available memory on the system Select a Default Order Lookup from the list The options are Use Order File Use Standing Order File Use Order Schedule File 10 Accept this screen to confirm the general preferences 8 9 05 User Preferences Setup The User preferences tab allows you to define COMMANDseries preferences specific to a username To define user preferences 1 Click Misc gt Preferences gt User Preferences User Tab SYSPREF2 General User i Sounds Colors Tracking Fonts Keys Toolbar Forms User SYSTEM Password Language English Date Format fmm dd yyyy or dd mm yyyy Date Order Month before day xl Century Date Cutoff Ion Coordinate Format Degrees Minutes amp Seconds X Print Model xoka Only Allow This Print Model Dispatching Assigns Truck to Loading Status Limit Aggregate Ticketing to Dispatch Only 2 The User name established the default user name for this workstation If COMMANDSseries Security is enabled then when the login screen appears this username will already be entered 3 If you are using COMMANDseries security the Password field displays This field allows you to change the password for the current user Note There is no direct link between the User and Password fields 4 Enter the Language to be used in the COMMANDser
365. r press lt Enter gt to select a code from the Choices Price Category File screen If you enter a pound sign for the Price Category the system will use that as a wild card If there is one price line and the system wildcard is entered in the Price Category Fields then the entered price will be applied to all Price Categories If there are entries for some price categories as well as a wildcard price then the wildcard price will be used for any price categories without an individual entry 3 Under the Price field enter the current price of the item 4 Under the first Price Extension field enter the current extension 5 Under the Effective field enter the date on which this price becomes effective 6 The last price of the item is displayed under the Previous field 7 The last price extension of the item is displayed under the second Price Extension field 8 If the Use Product Level Terms Code Discount Overrides flag is set on the Configuration Invoicing tab three fields display that allow you to override customer or project discounts Select the Override Terms Code Discount to override standard terms discounts established in customer or project files When the box is selected the Discount Rate Type and the Discount fields appear Note To make an item immune from any terms discounts set the override amount to zero 9 Mark the Copy to All checkbox to make this change effective at all locations or enter prici
366. re Number of Days After Pre Lien Compare Date default Specific Day of 1st Month Following Pre Lien Compare Date Specific Day of 2nd Month Following Pre Lien Compare Date Specific Day of 3rd Month Following Pre Lien Compare Date The first option is by for the most commonly used The other options allow for prox dates which are required in certain states This setting is used in conjunction with the Days Day of Month for Preliminary Notice Required field found on the Configuration screen Lien gt Pre Lien Rules In the Lien Required field select one of the following Not Required denotes that the creation of a lien location is note required for orders on this project Required Man denotes that the creation of lien locations is required at all times but must be created manually Note that this selection is rarely used because dispatch is slowed greatly by having to create the lien locations Required Auto denotes that the creation of lien locations is required at all times but takes place automatically Required Auto Exempt denotes that the creation of lien locations is automatic but the lien locations are automatically marked exempt This option is useful for storing lien location information for customers that do not necessarily warrant lien locations in the preliminary stages If the need arises to issue lien notices the correct data will have been maintained for implementing preliminary and lie
367. re only accessed when looking up older information Note The ITRN_1 table is not an archive table but a temporary work table 8 9 05 T29 10 11 12 13 14 The currency used by the system is displayed in the Currency Code field Currencies are set up on the Currency screen Files gt System Information gt Currency Note Once the currency code has been set up during the initial Configuration it cannot be changed From the Measurement System field s list select U S Customary or Metric as the default measurement style for the system This is only the system default the measurement system can be changed in Order Entry Select an option for Tracking Plant Quantities This value controls how metric and customary quantities are totaled on the Tracking screen Do Not Convert If a plant has orders totalling 50 cubic yards and 50 cubic meters the plant line total will read 100 Convert to System UOM If a plant has orders totalling 50 cubic yards and 50 cubic meters the system will convert the non standard UOM to the system UOM before totalling Mark the Use Multiple Customer Codes to configure the Project file Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Projects to use a multiple customer mode In multiple customer mode the Customer Code field in the Projects file is replaced with the Billing Customer field In addition the Shipping Customer and Reference Customer fields are included at t
368. red in Orders The PSC is printed on all invoicing reports Printer Setup COMMANDseries supports most Windows compatible dot matrix and laser printers Some older line printers are also supported Before your printers can be configured within COMMANDseries they must first be properly configured within Windows Note COMMANDseries does not support ink jet printers To create a local shared printer on an NT workstation server 1 Click the Windows Start button then click Settings gt Printers gt Add Printer 2 When prompted on how the printer is attached to your computers Select Local Printer and click Next 3 Select the manufacturer and printer The recommended choices are Generic and Generic Text Only If a screen appears informing you that these drivers have previously been installed on your computer select the option that allows you to keep those drivers 4 Select the printer port and click Next 5 Enter the name of the printer This name must be eight characters or less must not contain any spaces and must be unique among all printers being set up If the name would be a valid DOS filename without extension then it will work 6 If so desired set the printer as your default printer 7 Click Next and then click Finish An icon representing the new printer will appear 8 Right click on the icon you just set up and select Properties 9 From the General tab click the Print Processor button 8 9 05 53
369. ree different fields The value extended to each of these fields may differ depending upon your needs The three fields are Delivered Quantity Ticket Quantity Pricing Quantity The Ordered Quantity has an assigned Order Quantity Extension Code that determines how the Delivered Quantity will be calculated These extensions are preset within the application and calculate the Delivered Quantity as follows Per Unit Delivered Quantity Ordered Quantity Per Mix Cubic Quantity Delivered Quantity Ordered Quantity Mix Ordered Quantity Note that this extension should only be used for associated products Per Load Delivered Quantity Ordered Quantity Note that this extension differs from the Per Unit extension in that the delivered quantity will be calculated for each load The Per Unit extension will not continue to calculate a delivered quantity once the ordered quantity has been met or exceeded Per Weight of Cement Delivered Quantity Quantity of Cement in the mix product divided by the divisor indicated in the adjacent field Note that the adjacent divisor field is only displayed if a per weight type extension code is selected If the Ordered Quantity unit of measure is set to dosage a separate field will be displayed which allows the user to define the dosage quantity per weight This extension should only be used for associated products Per Weight of Cementitious Material Delivered Quantity Quantity of Ceme
370. reen 1 Click on the List button from the Document Format screen to display the Document Fields screen Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Formats gt List The Document Fields screen displays Document Fields EDTDOCS2 Line Field Type Name Jec Begin At End At 1 Literal XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX gt 1 95 Detail d aj 3 Literal COMMAND CONCRETE ORDER 31 57 Detail d SS 5 Literal CUSTOMER NAME 1 14 _ Detail d 5 Field Customer Name 19 43 Detail d 5 Literal DRDER DATE 54 64 Detail aj 5 Field Order Date 68 75 _ Detail vi 6 Literal DELIVERY ADDRESS 1 50 _ Detail a 6 Field Delivery Address 3 j 50 Hosan d gt 2 Inthe Line field enter the physical row number on which the field is to be printed for the form or section If document format is for data out the line number represents a record Note To determine the actual row or column numbers click the Display button on the Document Formats screen The title bar at the top of the Display screen shows the coordinates in parentheses These coordinates will automatically change as you click and drag fields around the screen to reveal the location 3 Enter the field s coordinates in the Begin At and End At fields 4 Click on the Detail button to go to the Document Format Field screen Document Format Field EDTDOCS1 m Document Format Field EN Line 1
371. references gt Keys Preferences Keys Tab SYSPREF7 m Preferences Oix General User Sounds Colors Tracking Fonts Keys Toolbar Forms Function Key JEDTORDR Orders JA D lt Press right mouse button over Function field to display a menu of choices 2 Enter a system Function for which you want to assign a shortcut key This field is used to enter the form name to be assigned to a keystroke For example the form name for the Orders screen is EDTORDR The easiest way to accomplish the task is to right click on the field to reveal the actual application menu options and select the desired function 3 From the Key field s drop down list select the function key that displays the function 8 9 05 313 Toolbar Preferences Setup The Toolbar Preferences tab allows you to assign toolbar buttons to appear on the COMMANDseries toolbar Each screen that is run automatically provides screen specific action buttons i e accept Clear Exit etc This screen allows you to determine other buttons that are always present on the toolbar regardless of the form currently in use The buttons that can be displayed fall into three groups e Screen and Field Edit Options i e Add Occurrence detail Cut etc e Menu Options i e Orders Tickets Customers COMMANDinvoicing etc Program Manager Options i e MS Word File Manager MS DOS etc To define toolbar preferences 1 Goto the Toolbar preferences
372. rence button to add another product or accept the screen 8 9 05 Adjusting Cartage Rates For many people the settings on the initial Projects Products tab is sufficient Some people need additional flexibility in configuring cartage charges at the product level To adjust cartage charges for a single product on a project 1 Press the dollar sign button gj on the product line The Project Product Cartage Charges screen will display The Cartage Table and Plant are displayed in the upper left of the screen These values cannot be edited Project Product Cartage Charges EDTPROJ7 W Project Product Cartage Charges 202 3 4 Gravel Cartage T able 2 Aggregate Ton mile Plant ALL Material Effective Previous Truck Cartage Effective Previous Delivered Price Date Rate Type Rate Date Rate Price 4 25 mm 0 50 475 d 2 If necessary enter a new Truck Type or detail on the field to select from a list 3 If necessary enter a new Cartage Rate 4 Enter an Effective Date The current date will default 5 If you have changed the Cartage Rate the existing rate will be automatically transferred to the Previous Rate field 6 The Delivered Price will be calculated based on existing pricing settings 7 Press the Add Occurrence button to add another entry or accept the screen Note If the product is being priced using Fixed Material pricing you cannot access this screen Changing Price Types The Default Price
373. responsible for this project This field is required Enter a Sales Analysis Code COMMANDexecutive uses this field for sales reporting purposes This field is required even if you are not licensed for COMMANDexecutive Select a Pricing Plant Code If a plant code is entered here all project orders will be priced as though they were shipped from this plant regardless of what plant they actually shipped from If the field is blank the pricing plant will be determined by system settings Select a Price Category Price categories allow users to establish different pricing tiers for example residential sales versus commercial sales product pricing can be assigned based on shipping plant price category Select a Trade Discount Percent or a Trade Discount Amount A trade discount is one that is given to the customer automatically Detail on the Trade Discount Amount field to select a UOM for the discount Select a Discount Terms Code or detail on the field to select from a list The terms discount code dictates the discount date due date and discount amount assigned to invoices Select a Zone Code or detail on the field to select from a list This field identifies the zone which contains the project delivery address and can identify applicable tax authorities as well as zone specific charges If necessary select a Minimum Load Charge table This field will only be visible when the Product Line is Concrete If necessary select a
374. rge On field s list select the ticket to include the unloading charges in a multiple ticket Note This field will not display if Calculation Method is set to Ticket 15 Specify a price per unit in the Price field 16 Accept the screen to save the new unloading charge information Sundry Charges Sundry charges are additional charges associated with the sale or delivery of a product such as extra hours environmental and Saturday Sunday charges These charges are based on charge types per unit flat amount percent of ticket or minimum ticket with time and day constraints established for each sundry charge Sundry charges can be flagged to appear on the first load only or they can be flagged to automatically appear on all loads Any automatic sundry charges default into the order without the 8 9 05 231 needtor setting up the charge on the customer or project This prevents the billing departments from having to set up these charges manually and reduces the chance of billing errors Prices for sundry charges can be entered on a number of different levels so it is important to understand the hierarchy used when pricing sundry charges 1 The system checks for an order level sundry charge override on the Order Pricing screen This value if present takes precedence over any other setting or override Next the system looks for a project level override on the charge table Project Pricing Customer level override
375. rly useful if all the company s trucks are the same type Pump 2 min We re going for volume here not neatness Curb 15 min Curbs take time to do properly Wheel barrow 10 min In some cases mix must be poured into a wheelbarrow and transported to its destination Front loader 4 min If the you have different truck types you might need separate pouring methods for each There are two basic ways of setting up pouring methods e Based on method of delivery front loader pump etc e Based on the type of construction being made slab sidewalk etc It s not an either or proposition however you can set them up any way you want Once a Pouring Method has been established it can be used by entering its assigned code in the Pouring Method field on the main Scheduling screen In addition to considering what pouring methods are needed customers might also want to consider if their unloading charge practices should mirror their pouring rates If a company can let you know ahead of time that more pouring time is necessary do you want to charge him the same as another customer that cannot supply advance notice You might end up with one or two unloading charge tables for each pouring method Pouring methods cannot be set at the project level To enter pouring methods 1 Open the Pouring Methods screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Pouring Methods 182 Pouring Methods EDTPMET
376. rmation gt Projects gt Main The Delivery Address will default from the quote edit it if necessary If your system is configured to Use Shipping Address detailing on the Delivery Address field will display the Shipping Address Information screen The Shipping Address can also be entered on the Addresses tab Shipping Address EDTSADR W Shipping Address Information EN Street Address fi 800 International Park Drive Suite 400 ao City Birmingham State AL T Postal Code 35243 Latitude jo DON Longitude jo 00E Radius If the shipping address option is not active detailing on the field will display a simple text entry box If necessary enter specific delivery Instructions to be included on all orders assigned to this project These instructions are frequently directions If the customer uses purchase order numbers enter the Purchase Order code If the customer uses a job number enter one in the Customer Job field Select the Measurement System to Use for this project The system default will default here Note The use of the measurement system must be consistent If a project is created as a metric order the system will not allow any non metric items to be ordered against the project Enter the name of the Contact for this project Because the project contact is usually different from the initial bidding contact quote or job information will not default into this field 9 Use the Phone Number 1 4 f
377. rmation gt Configuration gt Aggregate Configuration Aggregate Tab EDTCNFXF System Defaults Distribution Dispatch Aggregate Signaling Invoicing Inventory Allow Manual Weights Allow Ticketing Overloaded Trucks Weigh Trailers Separately Tare Each Load Exceed Ordered Quantities Overhead Load Out Prompt for Load Deviation Overhead Load Out Drop Information JEdit Tons Per Drop Show Truck Underloaded Prompt J z V Display PO Number on Front Screen of Simplified Ticketing Display Zone on Front Screen of Simplified Ticketing Display Cartage Rate on Front Screen of Simplified Ticketing Enhanced Order Suggestion In Aggregate Ticketing Enable X Auto Ticketing Order Copy Option Do not copy any orders l Aggregate Ticketing Order Copy Option Do not copy any orders sti Truck Minimum Weight over Tare for Gross gt 2 Mark the Allow Manual Weights checkbox if necessary This checkbox enables the user to enter weights in aggregate ticketing instead of allowing the scale interface to default weights 3 Mark the Allow Ticketing Overloaded Trucks checkbox if necessary This checkbox allows ticketing of trucks whose max load quantity is less than the load quantity on the ticket 4 Mark the Weigh Trailers Separately checkbox if necessary When marked this checkbox allows trailers to be weighed separately from the truck 5 Mark the Tare Each Load checkbox if necessary 6 Mar
378. rmation gt Configuration gt Inventory Configuration Inventory Tab EDTCNFXH ee System Defaults Distribution Dispatch Aggregate Signaling Invoicing Inventory G L Source Code gt JIN Inventory Costing Method Standard Cost j Update Receipt Transactions To GL Update Usage Transactions To GL Update Sales Transactions To GL Update Transfer Transactions To GL Update Conversion Transactions To GL Update Adjustment Transactions To GL Automatically Create GL Entries 2 Select a G L Source Code 3 From the Costing Method field s list select Standard Average or Replacement Cost This field designates the costing method used for items maintained in COMMANDinventory Once established a change in the costing method is a change in accounting principle m ka lt lt lt lt lt The checkboxes configure inventory GL updates The Inventory routine creates inventory information but does not create inventory transactions usages A separate routine creates the usages which are then posted 4 Select the Automatically Create GL Entries box the last checkbox if you want GL entries to be created when usages are posted 5 If the Create GI Entries flag is enabled the system will create entries for all of the inventory transaction type checked in the remaining fields 6 Proceed to the Receivables tab Receivables Configuration The Receivables Configuration screen allows the privileged user access to fi
379. rough the section titled Using Online Help in The COMMANDseries Workplace manual and take some time to move through the Online Help Also get used to pressing lt Shift F1 gt when you are in a field that you do not understand This opens the help specific to the screen you are on and this will provide you with field descriptions The COMMANDseries Workplace manual includes shortcuts and functionality secrets Once you become familiar with the system your only limiation is your typing speed 8 9 05 21 Entering Codes General During your system setup you will be repeatedly asked to assign codes to various entries Codes are composed of letters numbers or alphanumeric a combination of letters and numbers They are assigned to values or entries as a means of uniquely identifying the value or entry Codes are also used to sort and organize files and reports in groups such as customers projects products etc The system you use to apply codes to all of the files that will need them must be uniform and organized for you to efficiently use the system So for each different file that requires a group of codes adhere to the following rules 1 Make ALL related codes company item location etc either all number all letters or all numbers and letters don t make some codes all numbers and other codes all letters etc 2 If your codes contain any letters make ALL codes the same length that is put the same number of c
380. ruck and updated in the ticket record TICK 6 Default Update Project Map Coordinates lIf this box is checked then the Update Project Map Coordinates field on all new projects will be set to True 7 Default Update Order Map Coordinates If this box is checked then the Update Order Map Coordinates field on all new Updates coordinate records in the order file All subsequent tickets on the order will receive the updated coordinates Invoicing Configuration The Invoicing Configuration screen allows the privileged user access to fields in the configuration file that deal with the COMMANDinvoicing application These fields provide a means of customizing COMMANDinvoicing without requiring changes to the program To enter invoicing configuration information 1 Select Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Invoicing tab Configuration Invoicing Tab EDTCNFXG Aging Statements Financials Projects Quotes Lien User Fields System Defaults Distribution Dispatch Aggregate Invoicing Inventory Receivables Invoice Format Group Code gt JFCINYC FCinve Invoice by Order or Ticket Date Ticket Date x j Terms Discount Calculation Method Compute pre tax discountable amount plus total tax D Compute Tax on Discount Amount V Separate Suspend Credit and Debit Memos Z Use Plant Level Terms Code Z Use Product Level Terms Code Discount Overrides IT Store and Report Sales Tax by Shipping Plant T Bo
381. ry to add another contact type Accept the screen to save the new contact type information Setting Up Contacts Contacts can be entered at any time Data entered in the Contact Information screen is available to you on the Contacts tab of the Jobs screen To enter a new contact 1 Go to the Contact Information screen Files gt Contact Information gt Contacts Contact Information EDTCTCT m Contact Information pnapalm lindhurst com C E 8 9 05 2 Enter a Customer Code to associate this contact with an existing customer 3 Enter a Contact Code to identify the new contact You can also use this screen to edit an existing contact code To view a list of existing codes click the detail button 4 Enter information for the contact including Name Address City State Postal Code Phone Number s and E mail Address Tip You may want to make a note in each phone number field as to what type of number it is 205 555 1212 F for a fax number for example 5 Enter a Contact Type or detail on the field to display a list of available contact types 6 Accept the screen to save the new contact information Setting Up Quote Printing Quote Print allows you to print quote information into a Microsoft Word 2000 2003 document allowing users the greater formatting flexibility of the word processor Depending on your quoting practices you can have one template document
382. s You can print this from the printer itself Compare these details to the Printer Options information from the print model file making changes as necessary Mark the Route Reports To Queue checkbox if you want to send the information through COMMANDcomm When this checkbox is marked you will be asked for a Manager Number Accept the Print Models screen Repeat steps 1 8 for all the printers on your system Note If a printer on a Windows NT or Windows 2000 system is printing an additional blank page at the end of everything go to the print models that access that printer and enter lt FFr gt in the Close Printer String field That setting will intercept the form feed character before it is sent to the printer Testing Ticket Printers in COMMANDseries To test ticket printers 1 Simultaneously press the Shift and Power buttons on your Okidata 320 printer Note The Okidata printer mentioned here is only an example If you are using another printer please refer to its documentation for instructions on how to define printer specifications Press the Print button and make necessary changes At any time you may press the Shift and Select buttons to put the printer back online Select the emulation mode The recommended mode of emulation for COMMANDseries printing is ML micro line because it guards against wrapping and character pitch shifting Select your page specifications including page length rear feed bottom feed
383. s Taxing Details N A EDTQUTK Batch Interface Queued Tickets N A EDTRCPC Receipts Cost Updates EDTRCPT Raw Material Receipts EDTRELN Release Notes N A EDTREPL Replication Servers EDTREPR Reprint Tickets N A EDTROST Truck Rostering N A EDTRSNC Reason Codes EDTSANL Sales Analysis Codes EDTSCHD Schedule Standing Orders EDTSCHG Seasonal Charges EDTSCTY Scale Types EDTSIGU Signaling Units EDTSIGU1 Options Tab EDTSIGU2 Incoming Tab EDTSIGU3 Outgoing Tab EDTSIGU4 Statuses Tab EDTSLSC Sales Data Configuration EDTSLSH Sales Batch Information N A EDTSLSH1 Sales Transactions Detail N A EDTSLSH2 Sales Transactions Misc Information N A EDTSLSH3 Sales Transactions Terms Information N A EDTSLSP Sales Data Periods EDTSORD Simplified Orders EDTSRCD Source Codes EDTTAXA Tax Authorities EDTTAXC Tax Codes EDTTAXL Tax Authorities Locations EDTTCND Condition Codes N A EDTTEXT Language Text N A EDTTMGR Time amp Task Manager N A 8 9 05 349 Form Name Screen Name Configuration EDTTMGRA Ticket Times Tab N A EDTTMGRB _ Truck Times Tab N A EDTTMGRC Driver Times Tab N A EDTTRFS Transfers EDTTRKV Truck Unavailability EDTTRLR Trailers EDTTRLR1 Trailer Hauler Information EDTTRLR2 Trailer Scheduling Information EDTTRLR3 Trailer Tare Information EDTTRMS Terms Cod
384. s completed with this hauler or truck Accept the Hauler Truck Information screen Deduction Codes Once the system has calculated the revenue a hauler has earned it can adjust that amount through the use of Deduction Codes Deduction Codes allow users to identify and implement organized deductions from the earned revenue of a hauler truck and or driver It allows systematic deductions for loans penalties fuel or other items purchased from your company It can also be used to levy administration fees against a hauler To enter deduction codes 1 2 Go to the Deduction Codes screen Files gt Cartage Information gt Deduction Codes Enter a new type of Deduction code or select an already existing Deduction code to edit or display its information 8 9 05 6 7 Deduction Codes EDTCTDE m Deduction Codes Fuel amp Oil Outside UEL Enter a Description of the deduction code Enter an abbreviated version of that description in the Short field Select a Reason Code for the deduction In the Default Maximum field enter the maximum allowable amount for this deduction Enter the Default Amount for all deductions with this deduction type Accept the Deduction Codes screen Quoted Deductions The standard deductions are applied as needed But just as you can quote prices to a customer you can also quote deductions to haulers The Quoted Deductions screen allows users to establish quoted d
385. s field determines how Z aging is performed on all report options on the Aged Trial Balance Report screen and the Inquiry Report Reports gt Aged Trial Balance and Credit gt Inquiry Report Select an Aging by Date Code from the field s list This field determines the date to be used when aging each transaction balance on all report options on the Aged Trial Balance Report screen and the Inquiry Report Reports gt Aged Trial Balance and Credit gt Inquiry Report Enter an Aging Prox Day This field is used to specify the day of the month used when By Prox Date is chosen for the Aging Method field on this screen From the Aging Buckets fields lists identify the group of aged balances to appear in each of the aging buckets on all report options on the Aged Trial Balance Report screen and the Inquiry Report Reports gt Aged Trial Balance and Credit gt Inquiry Report The available options in these fields are determined by the selected Aging Method Enter the Description or label is to be printed in conjunction with the corresponding aging bucket on all report options on the Aged Trial Balance Report screen and the Inquiry Report Reports gt Aged Trial Balance and Credit gt Inquiry Report Proceed to the Statements tab Receivables Statements Configuration The Receivables Statements Configuration screen grants access to fields in the configuration file that deal with the COMMANDreceivables application
386. s to every order and or ticket Surcharges can be applied to COD orders only or to a range of products product categories or truck types A pull down menu allows you to assign those charges more specifically General applies the surcharge to all tickets Product applies the surcharge to any tickets that include the product specified Product Category applies the surcharge to any tickets that include any product belonging to the product category specified Truck Type applies the surcharge to any tickets delivered by the truck type specified After an assignment has been made click the Apply button and specify the necessary codes for the surcharge Accept this screen to save the cartage surcharge and related information Repeat these steps for all possible surcharges Quoted Cartage Pay The Quoted Cartage Pay screen allows users to assign cartage pay along with associated information such as waiting charges and premium charges to customers projects haulers trucks or drivers for the purpose of paying haulers Quoted cartage pay is used to override default cartage pay rates set up on the hauler truck information screen below Either the hauler truck information or the quoted cartage is required To enter quoted cartage pay 1 2 Click Files gt Cartage Information gt Quoted Cartage Pay Enter a Customer Code Project Code Hauler Code Truck Code and or Driver Code that you want to associate with the cartage ra
387. s type is Double Prox Percent or NEOM Percent enter the percentage of the discount in the Discount Percent Is field If terms type is Double Prox Per Unit or NEOM Per Unit enter the amount of the discount in the Discount Amount Per Unit Is field 6 Accept the Terms Code screen to save the new terms code and its settings Accounting Categories Accounting categories give you an additional means of organizing and recording business activity The Accounting Categories screen allows access to accounting category records which are assigned to customers and projects and provide for flexibility in the following areas Invoice creation select customer project for invoices by accounting category Invoice document format assign customer project unique document formats for invoice printing based on accounting category Invoice numbers assign customer project to independent invoice number ranges based on accounting category General ledger booking codes generate customer project activity by invoicing and accounts receivable can be accounted for based on accounting category Reporting sort and select reports i e sales analysis aged trial balance based on accounting category Some customers create a single accounting category for all business activity others create one category and one for internal business material transfers on site constructions etc Before entering accounting categories information gather information about
388. screen defines modem code records used throughout the COMMANDseries applications Modem codes are assigned to plants that are marked as auto dial plants These records are used by COMMANDcomm to control and access modems when sending a ticket or a report to be printed at an auto dial plant Before entering Modem Codes information gather information about the type of modems used to communicate with remote plants Modem Setup Before you attempt to enter modem information needed by COMMANDseries refer to the documentation included with your modem and investigate the possibility of importing the information provided for Hayes compatible modems and MultiTech modems These two popular brands include settings that are guaranteed to work for most modems If you do not have a modem that is compatible with the two brands listed refer to the Modems file located in the Control Panel of your Windows system This file provides much of the information needed to set up the modem To enter modem settings 1 Goto the Modem Codes screen Files gt General Information gt Modem Codes Modem Codes EDTMODM m Modem Codes Bisi ES Modem Code AYES Description JHayes compatible modem Short Hayes Prefixes Timeout ER Code Response AT Zc sl Jr o D sl JATDT er sl CONNECT 3600 lt cr gt Y Suffixes Timeout ER Code Response gt 4AT lt cr gt JOK lt cr gt zm sl v Enter a Modem Code to identify the modem Ente
389. sents the unit of measure for a delivered quantity of the item You can detail on the field to call the UOM Selection screen 5 Selecta Ticket Quantity Extension Code from the list This code determines how the ticket quantity value is printed and then stored in the database Possible choices which are preset within the application are as follows S2705 207 10 11 Delivered Quantity Delivered Quantity Per Mix Cubic Quantity Ordered Quantity Mix Delivered Quantity Print Nothing for the Ticket Quantity Per Pricing Content In the Price Quantity field enter the code that represents the unit of measure for the price quantity of the item Select a Price Quantity Extension Code from the list Possible choices which are preset within the application are as follows Delivered Quantity Mix Delivered Quantity One Ordered Quantity Per Pricing Content In the Batch field enter the code that represents the unit of measure for batching In the Inventory Cost field enter the code that represents the unit of measure for inventory and cost In the Reporting field enter the code that represents the unit of measure for reporting Accept this screen to save UOM information Item Categories Mix Defaults Setup Note This tab only appears if the Item Type is Concrete or Asphalt To define mix defaults information 1 Select the Mix Defaults tab to access and adjust fields specifi
390. sifying orders for reporting purposes Once the codes have been entered they can be assigned to customers and projects When an order is entered it will automatically be assigned the appropriate sales analysis code If a sales analysis code has not been assigned to the customer or project it must be assigned at the order level Sales analysis codes can be constructed to identify any type of grouping of customers and projects based on the business practices of your company Before entering sales analysis code information gather information about how you want to group customers and projects for analysis purposes To enter a sales analysis code 1 Go to the Sales Analysis Codes screen Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Sales Analysis Codes Sales Analysis Codes EDTSANL W Sales Analysis Codes Biel x Code Description Short ft Commercial comm ds 2 Residential JRES d D cop coD d 4 Strategic Accounts STRAT d JAgaregate Deg d je Asphalt Producer JASP d IL Concrete Producer CON d JB Block Producer JBLK al x 2 Enter a Code to identify the sales category or group 3 Enter a Description and a Short description for the sales analysis code 4 Use the Add Occurrence button or press lt F6 gt to add another sales analysis code or accept the screen to save the sales analysis codes 8 9 05 Customers Customers represent the people or businesses to which items are sold To facilit
391. sk Codes to provide even more real time information to dispatchers The primary use of conditions is to allow real time monitoring of driver overtime When a driver s on road hours reach a specified limit the system will attach a warning condition to the driver that condition can result in the 194 truck token to which the driver is assigned turning a warning color such as orange to alert the dispatcher that the driver s hours are getting close to the limit for overtime and should not be used again unless absolutely necessary A default set of conditions is provided when the system is installed These conditions can be edited to a degree but they cannot be deleted To edit a condition code 1 Open the Condition Codes screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Condition Codes Condition Codes EDTTCND 4 Condition Codes Biel EX Estimated Code Description Short Minutes Color Flag Priority LUNCH Lunch JLUNCH r H lt aj PRETK Pre ticketed truck JPRETK sie ay d JRMAX Rolling Max RAMAK EH rf d JRNDTP Round Trip Truck JRNDTP EH I d RAWAN Rolling Waming RAWAN CR rf d wMax Weekly Max wMax CR WW d WWAN Weekly Warning WWAN ER rf E 2 The Code is used internally to track the condition These codes cannot be changed 3 Edit the Description of the condition if necessary The description can be up to forty characters in length practically however a maximum of tw
392. so display in the title bar if you mark the Show System Name in Title Bar checkbox on the Preferences screen Misc gt Preferences gt General 3 Select which actions if any to audit in the applications from the possible choices in the Auditing Method Options are No audits Audit adds only only track the creation of new records Audit changes only only track changes to existing records Audit adds and changes Audit deletes only Audit adds and deletes Audit changes and deletes Audit all types 4 If you use auditing marking the Perform During Posting checkbox signifies that auditing occurs on data transferred posted from one data file to another The previous two fields deal with system level auditing which is a licensed option The Order Audit Log discussed next is separate from system auditing and is available to anyone licensed for concrete or aggregate 5 6 Mark the Order Audit Log checkbox to have the system track order related activity If you want to prompt the user to answer customized questions set up through the Fields button only visible when the Order Audit Log checkbox is marked Order Audit Log Questions EDTCNFX1 m Order Audit Log Fields Configuration Field Prompt 01 Employee Initials V Required al 02 Customer Name V Required tle The user will be prompted with these questions are asked upon acceptance of an order Note the option to make t
393. specific entities for any given tax authority i e State of Alabama County of Jefferson City of Birmingham etc Specific tax rates and other information controlling taxation are maintained at this level Tax authorities are maintained on the Tax Authorities screen Files gt Sales Tax Information gt Tax Authorities They represent the main groups of taxing 114 8 9 05 entities i e states provinces federal etc Up to five tax authorities can be maintained in the COMMANDseries applications Tax authorities determine the base upon which tax is calculated on taxable sales alone or including some other tax authority s tax whether the taxation point is origination or destination based and whether there is reciprocity between the two Tax codes are maintained in the Tax Codes screen Files gt Sales Tax Information gt Tax Codes They provide a single code associated with every possible taxation point That is to say that one tax authority location code for each tax authority is assigned to each tax code Tax codes are assigned to plants the origination taxation point and to zones projects customers the destination taxation point The plant tax code is then assigned to a ticket record while the zone project customer tax code is assigned to order records Before entering tax authority locations information gather information about locations within each tax authority to enter specific tax rates For example some stat
394. specific screen For example To navigate to the Tickets screen go to the Dispatch menu and select Tickets from the pull down menu Dispatch gt Tickets Before You Begin COMMANDseries runs under Windows 2000 or Windows XP Professional Edition If you are not comfortable using Windows you will not feel comfortable using COMMANDseries It would be helpful to spend some time acquainting yourself with the environment There are several functions that are unique to COMMANDseries To help you with these functions we have provided a COMMANDseries Getting Started in the Workplace manual This manual will show you how to work effectively in COMMANDseries applications We encourage you to look through the manual before you begin working in the system and we also hope that you will refer to the manual when questions about the functionality of COMMANDseries arise Setting Up the System COMMANDseries manipulates a large database of information and most of this data is unique to your construction materials business For COMMANDseries to efficiently and properly operate a basic set of information must be entered before trying to perform your daily tasks with the system Files such as products plants trucks and customers must be entered along with files pertaining to taxes minimum load charges and accounting periods There is a large amount of information that must exist before you can begin using COMMANDseries 24 With this in min
395. splay N A EDTCRINO Transaction Balances N A EDTCRIN1 Customer Balances N A EDTCRIN2 Transaction Balances N A EDTCRIN3 Transaction Details N A EDTCRIN4 Payment Details N A EDTCRIN5 Ticket Details N A EDTCRIN6 Ticket Summary N A EDTCRIN7 Product Details N A EDTCRIN8 Customer Credit History Display N A EDTCRIN9 Customer Credit Aging N A 8 9 05 341 Form Name Screen Name Configuration EDTCTCT Contact Information EDTCTDE Cartage Deduction Codes EDTCTDT Cartage Hauler Quoted Deductions EDTCTHT Cartage Hauler Truck Information EDTCTJB Quoted Cartage Pay EDTCTJB1 Products Cartage Information EDTCTIB2 Categories Cartage Information EDTCTJB3 Truck Type Cartage Informatio EDTCTKF Concrete Tickets EDTCTKF1 Other Ticket Information EDTCTKF2 Ticket Time Information EDTCTKF3 Ticket Line Associated Products EDTCTKF9 Dumped Reused Concrete N A EDTCTKFA Remove Reason Code N A EDTCTKFB Test Ticket Print N A EDTCTKFC Next Ticket Code N A EDTCTKFD Loads N A EDTCTKFE Retrieve Ticket N A EDTCTKFF External File Lookups N A EDTCTKFG Lot Numbers N A EDTCTPD Cartage Period Deduction N A EDTCTPQ Cartage Accounting Period EDTCTRT Cartage Rate Table Codes N A EDTCTRT1 Main Tab EDTCTRT2 Range Tab EDTCTRT3 Plant Zone Tab EDTCTRT4 User Defined Fields T
396. ss the system will use the address from the Main tab To define customer address information 1 2 From the Customers screen select the Addresses tab Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers gt Addresses Enter the Name and mailing Address information specific to the customer s invoices Enter the Name and mailing Address information specific to the customer s statements 260 Customers Addresses Tab EDTCUSTB 4 Proceed to the next tab or accept the screen to save the customer information Customer Sales Setup Select the Sales tab to enter customer specific sales information Specify the types of items that the customer primarily buys along with a sales analysis code and a regular salesperson if applicable To define customer sales information 1 From the Customers screen select the Sales tab Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers gt Sales _ Customers Sales Tab EDTCUSTC Concrete E E r f 2 Select a Product Line from the field s list 3 Mark the Copy To All checkbox if necessary to copy information entered for one product type to all other product types 4 Select a Sales Analysis Code This code is used to group sales for one customer with sales for other customers with the same sales analysis code Sales reports can then be produced by sales analysis code 5 Select a Salesman This field identif
397. t Location not taxable Loc N T aa a a A Price not available JNo price d EI EI EI 2 Select the most accurate reason from the Reason Usage field s list 8 9 05 3 Enter a Reason Code to identify why an item was removed suspended lost etc 4 Enter along Description and Short description for the reason code The long description should briefly justify the removal suspension etc 5 If the Reason Usage is Removed Item four boxes and a Detail button appear next to the short description The detail button calls the Reason Code Detail screen Reason Code Detail EDTRSNC1 Reason Code Detail x Dont update removed ticket to cartage Y Update removed ticket to invoicing X Update removed ticket to inventory Don t update removed ticket to executive L This screen allows you to specify how items removed with a given code will be treated with respect to four areas Cartage Invoicing Inventory and Executive For each module there are two options Don t update removed ticket to module Update removed ticket to module Make your selections and accept the screen When you return to the main Reason Codes screen modules specified for update will be flagged Note You cannot set a flag by selecting the indicator box 6 Press the Add Occurrence button to enter another reason code or accept this screen to save the new Reason Codes Modem Codes The Modem Codes
398. t General Information gt Job Types Job Types EDTIBTY m Job Types X JobType Description Short n Strategic Account SA d E Large U S Provider Pus d ER Dodge Report Reference DODGE d 4 Residential Jobs RESIDEN d IS Commercial Job COMM d fe General Contractor GENERAL d 7 Customer Referral JREFERRA d ei 2 Enter a Job Type code The code can be one or two alphanumeric characters 3 Enter a Description of the job type 4 Enter a Short description This abbreviation will be used on reports when there is not sufficient room to include the complete description 5 Press the Add Occurrence button to enter another job type or accept the screen Job Source Codes Job Source Codes are used to indicate the initial resource for this job A company can learn of a job from an internal employee such as a salesman or 8 9 05 from an external source such as Dodge Reports Job source codes can De created or edited at any time but ideally they are set up at the time of installation To enter a new job source code 1 Goto the Job Sources screen Files gt General Information gt Job Sources Job Sources EDTJBSC D Job Sources Of x Source Description Short Joo Dodge Reports DODGE d aj MK Marketing MARKET 4 RF Referral REFER d JSL Salesperson Lead SALESLD d Enter a Source code to identify the job source Enter a Description of the job source Enter a Short d
399. t Plant amp Delivery Information gt Trucks gt Tracking 9 Trucks Tracking Tab EDTTRUC3 Main Scheduling Tracking Flag E Color T 11 Permanent Color lf Badge Card Number UI Signaling Unit xl Radio Code all Automatic Signaling GPS Signaling Enter a character in the Flag field The flag identifies the character to be displayed for this truck on the Tracking and Scheduling screen Dispatch gt Tracking amp Scheduling For example a could be printed with a truck that needs to collect money This character prints to the left of the truck code on the tracking display Select a truck Color to be used for this truck on the Tracking and Scheduling screen Note As a general rule you will leave the two previous fields blank and use system defaults changing colors and flags on a case by case basis Select a Permanent Color for the truck The Color may change during the course of a day s business at the end of the day the truck Color will be reset to the Permanent Color Enter the Badge Card Number of the truck This number may be retrieved through auto ticketing from a barcode on the truck Select a Signaling Unit if necessary to assign one to the current truck Select a Radio Code This field identifies the radio truck code for this truck which may be different than the entry in the Truck Code field sent to the COMMANDconcrete application the mobile signaling system in use Note Deta
400. t Format CDIAGGOR Description Command Aggregate Order Form Display Short CDIAGGOR Document Type Order Print amp Data In Out J List Print Method Standard O EZ tandard Bottom of Form fo on lt FF gt 2 Inthe Document Format field enter a code for the name of the document format you wish to create 3 Enter a Description and a Short description for the document format 4 Select the Document Type from the field s list 5 From the Print Method field s list select Standard or Overstrike Standard is the typical configuration Overstrike is used to print forms with multiple passes such as Thai characters 6 The Bottom of Form field allows you to use printers that may or may not support form feeds Enter the number of blank lines that should be inserted in between each form Entering zero 0 will indicate that the form will be ejected from the printer using a form feed lt FF gt Entering 1 or more specifies that the form will be ejected by sending it the number of ASCII line feed lt LF gt characters you have specified in this field 7 Select the Display button or the List button to adjust the form s appearance and or content Adjusting Formats Using the Display Screen There are two ways to adjust the appearance and content of document formats through the Display screen or through the Document Fields screen The Display screen allows you to adjust the form s appearance in a what you see is what you
401. t Format screen Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Format Groups gt Formats When setting up an invoice out document consider the type of printer the size of the type style font and the length of the form on which the statement will be printed to ensure that all desired information will fit in the space allowed on the statement The information shown in the various elements of the ticket overrun document is dependent upon the user defined setup of these documents in the Document Formats screen The Document Format Group Type field on the Document Format Group Codes screen should display Ticket Overrun To set up ticket overflow format codes 1 Select the Formats button on the Document Format Group Codes screen Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Format Groups gt Formats The Ticket Overflow Format Codes screen displays Ticket Overflow Format Codes EDTDOCG6 W Ticket Overflow Format Codes STMTFO12 Standard Statement Form 12 pitch EA Header sl STFO1201 Std Statement Header Display Detail Line STF01202 Std Statement Detail Number of lines in body of form 32 2 Enter the document format codes for each desired field Header The Header typically contains information such as descriptive title text like Ticket Overflow and page number It is the first element printed on the statement Detail Line The Detail Lines typically show the deta
402. t Groups gt Formats The Project Quote Format Codes screen displays Project Quote Format Codes EDTDOCG3 m Project Quote Format Codes 3 QUOTE EN Header Ei JQUOTHDF Std Quote Header Format Display Detail Line gt JQUOTDET Std Quote Detail Format Footer gt JQUOTFTR Std Quote Footer Format Number of lines in body of form EN 2 Enter the document format codes for each desired field The table below shows the available codes and suggestions for their content Header The Header of a quote is generally printed at the beginning of each page and typically consists of information such as the customer name and address Detail Line The Detail Line of a quote is generally printed in between the Header and Footer for each page and typically consists of product information Footer The Footer of a quote is generally printed at the end of each page and typically consists of information such as the totals or terms of the quote 3 Enter the Number of lines in body of form View and adjust the form by clicking the Display button 5 Accept the Project Quote Format Codes and the Document Format Group Codes screens T 100 Receipt Format Codes Setup This screen is used to specify the various elements document formats that make up a receipt document Each of the elements must already be defined using the Document Format screen Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Format Groups gt Formats
403. t accounting year to control the general ledger transactions Files gt General Information gt G L Accounting Periods To set up banks to be used when entering payment transactions Files gt General Information gt Bank Codes Adjustment Codes To set up adjustment codes to be used when making A R adjustments identifying the type of adjustment and controlling the G L codes that are used to record the adjustment Files gt General Information gt Adjustment Codes Tax Authorities To establish the major groups of taxing entities Files gt Sales Tax Information gt Tax Authorities Tax Authority Locations To set up the specific taxing entities within each tax authority Files gt Sales Tax Information gt Tax Authority Locations Tax Codes To set up the combinations of tax authority locations that represent any given point of taxation Files gt Sales Tax Information gt Tax Codes 14 System Information Inventory Accounting Periods DO PO lt Qm AD gt m 0 CO ar Purpose To set up the beginning and ending dates for each accounting period in the current accounting year to control the inventory transactions Files gt General Information gt Inventory Accounting Periods Item Locations To establish the locations inventory is stored and to which plants it can be assigned Files
404. t from which this product can be sold If the product is available at all plants choose the All plants option Click on the Pricing button to go to the Customer Product Pricing Information screen Customer Product Pricing Information concrete EDTCUST1 Estimated Quantity Cubic Ya Default Load Quantity J Cubic Ya Price ell 140 00 Cubic Ya Price Extension JPer unit x Effective B JO Jon 2000 Previous Price 3 00 Cubic Ya Price Extension Per unit D Allow Automatic Price Adjustments f Override Terms Code Discount Discount Rate Type JAmount x j Discount Rate gt J Cubic Ya UDM Extensions JAgoregate Jl JW Copy to All Surcharge Code ENV ENVIRON Rate z d 2 af Sundry Charge x 2 AFTHR J Create Separate Invoice Pricing _ d S 7 Enter the Estimated Quantity of the product This field contains the estimated quantity the customer intends to buy for this product You may click on the detail button associated with this field to select a unit of measure to assign to the estimated quantity 8 Enter the product Default Load Quantity as well as the Price Price Extension Effective Date Previous Price and Price Extension 9 Mark the Allow Automatic Price Adjustments field if you plan to adjust this item s price using the Calculate Price Change function 10 Select the Override Terms Discount Code field to adjust customer trade discounts for this item When this field is selected the
405. t of 4 5 the price will be 65 5 4 63 Appendix E Content Pricing 371 Admixtures amp Content Pricing To insure correct pricing for admixtures create the admixtures with batching UOMs as dosages based on the amount of cement and price based on the batched quantity A second option for admixtures is to give each mix a price that reflects the standard cost of the admixtures in that design If you have a mix for which you want to charge an additional 8 unit due to the admixture content enter 8 as the unit price for the mix If the mix has a cement content of 6 its price will be calculated as 65 1 6 8 79 Projects You can establish project level content pricing simply by adding the base item to the Project Product screen When you do you can set project pricing for all mixes To create project level content pricing 1 Add your system s base item to the project 2 Press the Pricing button to display the Project Product Pricing Information screen for the base item Project Pricing Content Pricing Project Product Pricing Information BASE Base for content Estimated Quantity Price Up Price Down Default Load Quantity Je 000 4 000 Price 65 00 cy Price Extension Per unit zl m 14 Feb 2005 By 14 Feb 2005 Effective Bi 14 Feb 2005 Previous Price o 00 cy Price Extension Per unit EH _UOM Extensions _ JV Allow Automatic Price Adjustments 3 Enter a Price
406. t the per yard weight of cementitious materials cement and flyash in the mix design 2 Multiply that amount by the load amount to get the total amount of cementitious materials in the load 3 Divide that amount by 100 the dosage is per 100 weight 4 Multiply the result by ten ounces to get the target Ticket Quantity 879 05 357 Water gallons 50004 So Slam 50004 Water UOM Tab w a DEE EE E EE EE EEN Foie SSS KC Z 50004 gt 50004 50004 If you also need to handle water by weight you may need to set up a separate item Water Ibs Fiber See Slam g 80001 gl fs000 Fiber UOM Fiber Mesh Bag Fiber Mesh Bag 320 Conversions Sales Tax Ovenide User Fields Locations Costs Prices Inventory Batchin zlfen rg zlfen Fiber can be set up in different ways In this case it has a UOM setting similar to an admixture It can also be set up like an extra product so that you could order it by the bag 8 9 05 s nnueno yonpoid ulew 00 001I 3 amp 3 pold 1U El sajes Bieuo ur1 3aonpoid u1 JO s nnuenb y p4oda4 OL a GeAlIaday a qGeAlade4 00 00SS Auedwos Auedwoy s uno22y s unozoe 0 AIDUS e13o1 y p109 1 OL 00 00S Wv xeL Auedwos lqe ed xeL sajes ajqeAed XEL s esS y P4oda4 0 qexe1 JI quejd yoes woud 00 000S IECH pold 1U El sajes Bieuo peddiys ynpoid upe
407. t the screen to save the sales analysis codes 126 8 9 05 Configuration The Configuration screen allows access to the configuration records that define the COMMANDseries items in the following three general categories Run time environment flags indicate the features turned on and off Run time environment parameters customize your system Defaults for fields on other COMMANDseries application screens WARNING Once changed and accepted the flags parameters and defaults in the configuration file take effect immediately or when the COMMANDSseries application is restarted Some changes may change the manner in which information is stored If in doubt consult a Command Alkon Customer Service Representative Gather information about how you want the system configured Most configuration flags are meant to be set once and not to be changed after you begin using the COMMANDseries applications For this reason it is important to understand each field and its affect on the applications Note Some fields and tabs described in this section are controlled by the user license Not all fields and tabs may display on your system Topics in this section Initial System Configuration Defaults Configuration Distribution Configuration Dispatch Configuration Aggregate Configuration Signaling Configuration Invoicing Configuration Inventory Configuration Receivables Configuration Receivables Aging Configuration Receivables Statements C
408. tab Entering Project Accounting Information The Accounting tab allows you to enter accounting information for the project To enter project accounting information 1 From the Projects screen select the Accounting tab Quotes gt Quotes gt Projects gt New Detail gt Accounting or Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Projects gt Accounting Projects Accounting Tab EDTPROJH Main Addresses Pricing 4 Number of days After Pre Lien Compare Date Not Required E 2 Enter an Accounting Category This field is used to specify a code that groups customers projects together It is commonly used to distinguish internal jobs from trade customers 8 9 05 281 Enter necessary credit card information including Credit Card Name Credit Card Number Responsible Name and Expiration Date This information is used for reference only the system will not automatically call in credit card charges Enter a Credit Code This field assigns a credit code to the customer for the current company The credit code establishes how reliable you consider the customer or project You can limit the project to Cash Only sales for example Enter the date the credit code takes effect in the Credit Effective Date field The current date will default Note The following five steps are only needed if you are licensed for 6 COMMANDIlien Select a Pre Lien Calculation method from the drop down list The options a
409. tab Misc gt Preferences gt Toolbar Preferences Toolbar Tab SYSPREF8 m Preferences BE x General User Sounds Colors Tracking Fonts Keys Toolbar Forms Standard Options Edit Options w M Accept a Add Occurrence j 4 OD M Clear ajs First Occurrence Al Menu ptions JEDTROST Truck Rostering AA a KS DBATRAC Tracking amp Scheduling t d 4 Press right mouse button over Form field to display a menu of choices Program Manager Options Description Command Line Working Directory REN IEN Il d Display Language List on Toolbar IV Display Help on Toolbar 2 Inthe Standard Options section mark the checkboxes of all standard options you want placed on the toolbar The arrow buttons to the right of the checkboxes allow the order of the button options to be changed 3 In the Edit Options section mark the checkboxes of the editing options you want placed on the toolbar 4 Enter a system Menu Option for which you want to assign a toolbar button You can do this in two ways Right click on the blank field The COMMANDseries menu will appear in the context menu Navigate to the screen you want to include on the menu Enter a specific form name 314 Caution Do not enter a sub form in this field EDTORDR is the main Orders form EDTORDR4 is the Scheduling screen and as the form name suggests is a subform of the Orders screen For a subform to work properl
410. tablish multiple COD payment forms you can run a COD Recap report at the end of the day to reconcile cash checks and credit slips collected COMMANDseries is installed with four default payment forms see screen shot below If you are installing COMMANDseries for the first time and are installing V5 53 17 or greater then you may edit or delete these defaults as needed If you are upgrading from any version prior to V5 53 17 Command Alkon recommends that you retain the defaults and add whatever forms are required Each Payment form is assigned a Payment Method The available payment methods are Charge Cash Check Credit Card To enter a payment form 1 Open the Payment Forms screen Files gt Customer gt Payment Forms The payment forms editor appears Payment Forms EDTPMTF Ey Payment Forms x Code Description Short Payment Method fi Charge CHARGE Charge D d Al 2 Cash CASH Jeah zl j Check CHECK Check Z Jj Credit Card CREDIT CredtCad d 2 Use the Add Occurrence command to create a new line 3 Enter a Code for the new payment form 4 Enter a Description for the new form 5 Enter a Short description of the new form 6 Assign the new form to a Payment Method The Payment method determines what payment forms will display during order entry based on the customer s or project s credit and what payment forms can be reported on the COD Recap Report 7 Use the Add Occurre
411. te You can enter any one field or combination of fields you choose If a field is left blank the system will assume a wildcard for that field 8 9 05 Quoted Cartage Pay EDTCTJB Customer Code 10000 ABC Construction Inc Project Code 1 Convalescent Center Hauler Code 1 CDI Redi Mix Trucks Truck Code 1 Valvoline Cummins Ford Driver Code 1 Steve Park Cartage Rate T able el j Per load charge rate Previous Rate 4509 Effect Date hinn Rate Z Apply Minimum Haul Pay Products Categories Truck Types ltem Code Code Rate sl 20659 3000 psi3 4 6 w FSG Perload 100 00 dd 3 Inthe Cartage Rate Table field assign a cartage code to the hauler or truck to define the rate for all cartage transactions completed with this hauler truck customer project driver combination 4 Enter a cartage Rate to be associated with the cartage code or leave blank to let the rate table calculate the rate If necessary enter an Effective Date If you do not enter a date manually the current date will default The three tabs allow you to assign Cartage Surcharges at three different levels Products Item Categories and Truck Types 5 Select the Products tab to enter surcharges or increased rates for certain products 6 Select the Categories tab to apply a cartage surcharge to entire product categories 7 Select the Truck Types tab to apply a cartage surcharge to entire truck types 8 Accept the Quoted Cartage Rates s
412. tem information gather information about the items you will be shipping and the constituents that make up some of those items Topics in this section Initial Item Entry Item Entry Item Main Tab Setup Item UOM Setup 210 Item Conversions Setup Item Sales Setup Item Tax Override Setup Item Mix Setup Item User Fields Setup Item Locations Setup Item Costs Setup Item Prices Setup Item Inventory Setup Item Batching Setup Item Constituent Setup Item Batch Codes Setup Hints for Entering Items Initial Item Entry When entering items for the first time it is important to realize that these files must be built like a tower from the bottom up So to effectively enter your company s mixes as items you must first enter all the constituents sand water cementitious material admixes etc in each mix as an item Once the constituents have been entered you can go back and enter the mixes Note On each Item tab not all options will display at all times The fields that display are dependent on the Item Type assigned via the Item Category Item Entry To enter an item 1 Goto the Items screen Files gt Item Information gt Items Items Main Tab EDTIMST Item Code TEST Description Short Descr ltem Category gt 2 Enter an Item Code This entry is user defined but it may be helpful to group the item codes by type such as water aggregate cement admixes etc 3 Enter a Description and
413. ter Footer The footer will likely contain totals information It may show such information as current balance due balances in the various aging categories and total balance due The Footer is positioned directly below the Message Lines Enter the Number of lines in body of form View and adjust the form by clicking the Display button 5 Accept the Statement Format Codes and the Document Format Group Codes screens 8 9 05 Project Quote Format Codes Setup This screen is used to specify the various elements document formats that make up a project quotation document being defined to the system Each of the elements must already be defined using the Document Format screen Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Format Groups gt Formats When setting up a project quote consider the type of printer the size of the type style font and the length of the form on which the statement will be printed to ensure that all desired information will fit in the space allowed on the statement The information shown in the various elements of the quote is dependent upon the user defined setup of these documents in the Document Formats screen The Document Format Group Type field on the Document Format Group Codes screen should display Quote To set up quote format codes 1 Select the Formats button on the Document Format Group Codes screen Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Forma
414. th TransID to support their SmartPass and Ego RF badge readers The partnership was developed to help provide a comprehensive reliable badge reading solution We have also created an interface for XCI readers XCI is a third party vendor who supplies badge reader hardware and badges Finally the system provides support for standard bar code readers including the ability to print barcodes Scale Configuration In addition to configuring COMMANDseries you will also need to properly configure your scales to optimize autoticketing performance Command Alkon recommends that scales be configured to send weights on demand including a motion character Once COMMANDseries is configured to recognize the motion character the auto ticketing interface will automatically retry the scale reading until a stable weight is received Note Scale configuration is handled by your scale vendor service representative Auto Ticketing Units An Auto Ticketing Unit corresponds to a specific lane in the aggregate plant Once an auto ticketing lane has been defined based on the type of badge reader being used the lane is configured Topics in this section Auto Ticketing Units Setup Auto Ticketing Units Communication Auto Ticketing Units Lane Configuration Auto Ticketing Units Libra Asphalt Interface Setup Stop Light Setup Auto Ticketing Units Setup To set up auto ticketing units 1 In COMMANDaggregate open the Auto Ticketing Units screen
415. th appropriate system priviledges to add change or delete vendor records To enter a vendor 1 In COMMANDInventory go to the Vendors screen COMMANDinventory gt Files gt Item Information gt Vendors 8 9 05 8 Vendors EDTVNDR m Vendors X Vendor Code 2 Sort Name Ja AA Name J amp amp A Trucking Inc Address 1220 North Main Street e City Pelham State Alabama Country USA Postal Code 24889 Phone Number 664 3498 Contact Bill Horrell Vendor Type gt 2 Independent Hauler Vendor Class Haul Vendor Location Code xh Shelby Enter an alphanumeric Vendor Code This code uniquely identifies the vendor in COMMANDinventory Enter a Sort Name for the vendor This name is used to select or sort vendors on COMMANDseries reports Enter the vendor s Name as it should appear on purchase orders checks reports etc Enter Address Phone Number and Contact information for the vendor Indicate the type of vendor by selecting from the Vendor Type field s list Enter the Location Code for the vendor Note that this field is not required If you select a location code this vendor is not able to deliver to any of your other locations If the field is left blank the vendor is able to deliver to any of your locations Accept the Vendors screen Freight Methods This screen allows you to edit freight methods already in existence and create new freight methods To set up freight me
416. that contain cost center information Note the following The cost center is alphanumeric The required length of cost centers is defined with the Cost Center Length field in the Financials Configuration screen Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Financials The required length of the company code is defined with the Company Code Length field in the Financials Configuration screen Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Financials ja Caution Cost centers should be assigned to a single company to avoid problems in balancing your data Command Alkon recommends that you use an established company code Files gt General Information gt Companies as the first characters of the cost center code This will serve as an aid in ensuring you don t assign a cost center to the wrong company 8 9 05 301 Cost Centers EDTCOST m Cost Centers Xx Cost Center Abbreviation Description 91 EDIAL Command Data Birmingham d a DE CDIAL1 CDI Birmingham Plant 1 d 01 2 CDIAL2 CDI Birmingham Plant 2 d Io 3 JCDIAL3 CDI Birmingham Plant 3 d jo 4 CDIAL4 CDI Birmingham Plant 4 d 015 JCDIALS CDI Alabama Plant 5 d 016 CDIAL6 CDI Alabama Plant 6 d 020 IO Command Data Dallas ds 3 4 5 6 Enter an Abbreviation for the cost center This field is used to specify a free form short name of the cost center being defined If desired this abbreviation can be used in pla
417. that you modify for each quote or you can have a set of quote templates from which you can select There are a number of steps involved in configuring Quote Print to run on your system e Install the Microsoft Data Access libraries e Modify the COMMANDseries assignment file e Create Modify a Microsoft Word document template e Configure COMMANDquote Installing Microsoft Data Access libraries The Microsoft Data Access libraries enable Microsoft Word to access the Oracle database to extract the quote information These files need to be installed on any workstation that will print quotes to Microsoft Word The library installation file MDAC _TYP EXE is typically located in the directory X CMDSERIES UTILS where x is the mapped drive to the COMMANDseries server Simply double click on the installation file to install the libraries Editing the Assignment File The COMMANDseries assignment file CMDSERIE ASN installs with the COMMANDseries application It is usually located in the CMDSERIE CLIENTS directory This file controls the database locations and the paths for associated applications It is necessary to edit the cmdserie asn file for the quote print function to include the paths to Microsoft Word documents and templates and also the path to the COMMANDseries application that allows the interface between Word and COMMANDqduote 8 9 05 To edit the CMDSERIE ASN file 1
418. the Customers screen when adding a new customer Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers 5 If You are configuring aggregate pricing select a Type Price The options are FOB Price Fix Cartage Delivered Price Fix Mat Delivered Price 134 8 9 05 For an explanation of these different pricing options see the Fixed Delivered Price section in the Items section of this manual 6 Enter a Trade Discount Percent and Trade Discount Amount These fields provide the default values for the Trade Discount Percent and Amount fields respectively on the Customers screen when adding a new customer Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers 7 Select a Terms Code and a Zone Code These fields provide the default values for the Terms Code and Zones Code fields respectively on the Customers screen when adding a new customer Files gt Customer amp Project Information gt Customers 8 If the product line is Aggregate Asphalt or Block the Cartage Rate Table field displays Enter a code for the cartage rate table to use in pricing 9 Several customer pricing options are set up using the checkboxes at the bottom of the screen Mark all checkboxes necessary to configure defaults according to your preference They are as follows Apply Zone Charges concrete only Print Prices on Ticket Allow Price Change in O E Restrict Orders to Customer Products Apply Minimum Haul
419. the Export Data screen Manage gt Data Manage gt Export Data 2 Scroll down the list of database tables until you see the license table LICN Double click the LICN table 3 Enter a file name for the export file in the File field If no name is specified the file name will be LICN TXT 4 The Output File Location will default from settings in the USYS72 INI file Enter a different path if necessary 8 9 05 Export Data DBAEXPR m Export Data wass JOLDLICN TXT waww ssswwW E esev5_52qa import 5 Accept the screen The export will only take a few seconds Entering a New License If you purchase additional COMMANDseries modules you will receive a new license to activate the new features You must enter the license manually Caution License information must be entered exactly as it appears on your COMMANDseries license A single mispelled word will invalidate the license To enter a new license 1 Ensure that all other users have logged off the system and open the Licenses screen Files gt System Information gt Licenses 8 9 05 gt Licenses EDTLICN Wi Licenses Op x Client Name Command Data All Products Start Date 03 Dec 1999 End Date 31 Dec 2099 Applications 1 gt cc ja 2 AP 3 sl AR Accounts Receivable x Batch Consoles Signaling Units Flat Scales Overhead Loadout Options Concrete Aggregate Asphalt Tracking Scheduling Pricing
420. the Start Time and End Time for the specific time period you wish to define The times you enter here determine what is displayed on the Map Pages screen to distinguish the time periods 3 Accept the screen to save the map page time periods Map Pages Setup To enter map pages 1 Goto the Map Pages screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Map Pages Map Pages EDTMAPS1 m Map Pages North 280 N20 o h JN Je RN s far GE ec oe Fo Fu KE 2 Enter a Map Page code The actual page number is generally used for this code 3 Enter a Description and a Short description of the page 8 9 05 187 Travel Times Setup 1 10 On the Travel Times tab select a Plant Code to assign a distance and travel times to the current map page from the selected plant Plants are set up on the Plants screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants Note The Add Occurrence button at the bottom of the screen allows assigning multiple plants to a map page Enter the estimated Distance between the selected plant and a central area in the current map page When scheduling an order to this map page from this plant the distance will default into the Order Schedule screen The Change Percentage fields give you a means to simplify initial entry of map page times In the screen shot above the 100 represents the base time during the early morning hours when traffic isn t a
421. these fields is printed using the document format tag PRCQTY These extensions are preset within the application and calculate the price quantity as follows Delivered Quantity Price Quantity Delivered Quantity Mix Delivered Quantity Price Quantity Mix Ticketed Quantity Ordered Quantity Ticket Quantity Ordered Quantity One Per Load Price Quantity One Doses Per Load Price Quantity Ordered Quantity Mix Ticketed Quantity Batch Quantity This setting specifies how the item is measured by the batch computer Aggregate may be ordered by the ton but it is batched by the pound Inventory Cost Quantity This setting specifies how the material is to be measured for purposes of inventory and cost calculation An aggregate may be batched by the pound but inventoried and costed by the ton Purchase Quantity This setting specifies how the material is to be measured when purchased from vendors Reporting Quantity This setting specifies how the material is to be measured on COMMANDseries reports When you set up a dispatching report you will see a checkbox labeled Use Reporting Units of Measure If that checkbox is selected all items will be reported using each item s Reporting Quantity UOM If the checkbox is not selected the report will print the Delivered Quantity Item Categories Item Categories are used to classify items according to general use and function for reporting and analysis Examples incl
422. thods 1 Go to the Freight Methods screen COMMANDinventory gt Files gt Item Information gt Freight Methods Freight Methods EDTFRMT m Freight Methods X Description Short Freight Class Contract Hauler Contract Hauler zg Company Truck or Muk ol Jj Material Vendor Truck MatVnd Haer ld Rail Car fRalCar luck ld Barge Barge Truck z d Independent Hauler independ Hauer E d JUS Postal Service JUS Post Other E sJ d gt o ACTE Enter the Type a numeric code that corresponds to the freight method Enter a Description for this freight type Enter an abbreviated version of this description in the Short field Choose the Freight Class This field specifies the numeric code that corresponds to the freight method There are three freight methods supported by COMMANDseries Truck The truck is owned by your company Haul The truck is owned by another company that has been hired to do one of your jobs Other The truck is neither owned by your company nor hired from another company Accept the Freight Methods screen 8 9 05 Cartage amp Delivery Information The following topics address the entry of cartage and additional delivery information Topics in this section Cartage Accounting Periods Cartage Rate Codes Cartage Surcharge Codes Quoted Cartage Pay Hauler Truck Information Deduction Codes Quoted Deductions Cartage Accounting Periods Cartage account
423. tly with the number of hours of operation of the vehicle This includes depreciation insurance licenses etc Enter the Variable Truck Cost Per Hour specifying the variable truck cost such as expenses for labor fuel oil maintenance and tires per quantity to use in the calculation of projected costs for profit reporting The total round trip time is calculated on each ticket and multiplied by this rate to determine variable trucking for profit reporting 8 9 05 167 8 Enter the Yearly Interest Rate specifying the estimated yearly interest rate in order to calculate the cost of carrying receivables based on the customer s normal payment time 9 Enter the Truck Productive Factor specifying the estimated truck productivity factor which is multiplied by the fixed trucking cost to add the cost of non productive time 10 Enter the Desired Profit Per Quantity specifying the desired profit per quantity which is added to the cost to show the projected selling price Plant Plants Setup The Plants Plant tab allows to specify what product lines are available at this plant To establish a plant s product lines 1 From the Plants screen select the Plants tab Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants gt Plants Plants Plants Tab EDTPLNTF 2 Select the appropriate checkboxes Plant Scale Setup To set up plant scale information 1 From the Plants screen select the Scales tab Files gt Pl
424. to All checkbox to copy this information to all locations Item Batching Setup The Batching tab is used to enter information about the batching systems used at your plants to ensure that the mix is batched properly at all locations Options on this tab depend on the type of item you are entering To define batching information for a mix 1 Select the Batching tab 2 Enter the Maximum Batch Size for the location 3 Enter the minimum amount of Mixer Time required for this mix 4 If you want to download the information to the batch system mark the Download to Batch System checkbox 5 Inthe Batch System UOM field enter the code for the system s UOM or press lt Enter gt to select from a list of codes 6 Mark the Copy to All checkbox if you want to copy this information to all locations To define batching information for aggregate 1 Select the Batching tab Items Batching Tab agg EDTIMSTD 2 900 60002 2 Enter the Specific Gravity of the aggregate This value is used by the Materials Manager to convert between weight and volume 3 Enter the standard Moisture Percent for the item 4 Inthe Batch System UOM field enter the code for the system s UOM or press lt Enter gt to select from a list of codes 8 9 05 5 Select Download to Batch Systems is you want COMMANDseries to transmit this information to the batch computer during a mix download Mark the Copy to All checkbox if you
425. to an item To enter tax override information 1 Select the Tax Override tab on the Item Categories screen Files gt Items gt Item Categories gt Tax Override Item Categories Tax Override Tab EDTICAT3 UOM Mix Defaults Tax Override Tax Authority lf Oe Tax Location m Georgia Override Taxable Status Taxable f Override Tax Rate Location gt fos Unincorporated 2 Select the Tax Authority and Tax Location When the item is in this tax authority location the override takes effect 3 Select the Override Taxable Status This status taxable or non taxable takes effect when the item is taxed under the selected tax authority location 4 Select the Override Tax Rate Location This location s rate is used as an override when the item is taxed under the selected tax authority location 5 Accept the Item Categories screen to save the new information Items Items can be added changed deleted or listed depending on user privilege and system license settings Items represent the goods and or services that are sold to customers To facilitate the proper setup of each item record the 8 9 05 209 Items screen is organized using tabs Refer to the table below to learn each tab s function Tab Main UOM Conversions Sales Tax Override Mix User Fields Locations Costs Prices Inventory Batching Constituents Batch Codes Automatic Products Function Is the item salable
426. to be copied to the corresponding field for all other selected locations 4 The Copy button allows a one time copy of information between locations When the button is pressed the Item Location Copy screen appears 218 8 9 05 Item Location Copy EDTIMSTG Copy From Loc IR Copy To Location Code RW Birmingham Plant aj E Hoover Plant E Bessemer Plant J 4 Alabaster Plant E Trussville Quarry 5 Select the location from which you want to copy information in the Copy From Loc drop down field 6 Select the checkboxes to indicate the locations to which the information is to be copied Select the All button to select deselect all the locations Note This screen will only display those locations that are already flagged on the Item Locations screen 7 Accept the screen Item Costs Setup The Costs tab is used to enter standard cost and cost extension information about the item This information is used in generating gross margin information To define costs information 1 Select the Costs tab Items Costs Tab aggregate EDTIMSTA agg Inventory Batching Batch Codes Main UOM Conversions Sales Tax Override User Fields Locations Costs Prices Location 1 SHELBY rs Standard Cost S560 to Previous Standard Cost 2950 to Cost Extension Per unit D Previous Cost Extension Per unit M Standard Cost Effective 20 Sep 2000 Location 2 N SUBURB Standard Cost 9560 to Previ
427. to its proper setting If not adjust using the buttons on your printer 15 Go to the Print Models screen Files gt System Information gt Print Models 16 Enter the Print Model you will use to run reports 17 From the Output Type field s pull down menu select Printer 18 From the Print Device field s pull down menu select the name of the new printer 19 Select the Device Type from the field s pull down menu The device type is directly related to the emulation mode you selected on your printer For example if you selected ML emulation mode you would select Okidata 320 in this field If your printer is in Epson FX emulation mode you would select Epson in this field 20 Print a report and confirm that your settings are correct Currency The Currency screen specifies the display characteristics for various currencies used Before entering currency information gather information about the currencies to be used in your system To add or edit a currency code 1 Goto the Currency screen Files gt System Information gt Currency 2 Using a standardized naming convention enter a new Currency Code Currency EDTCURR m Currency Pi Es Currency Code USA Description United States Dollars Short Deser us Currency Symbol i Symbol Placement Leading number x j Thousand Separator A Decimal Separator r Z Decimal Places Used Negative Sign Parentheses TU x j Negative Sign Placement ymbol
428. to the Cartage Rate Code screen 2 Enter a Cartage Rate Table to identify the new cartage rate 3 Enter a Description and a Short description for the cartage rate 4 Select Quantity as the Rate Type 248 Cartage Rate Tables EDTCTRT1 quantity Main Default Rate 7 00 Effective Bl fisan 2005 PreviousRate Rate UOM gt 60003 tons Cartage Type JBoth D Item Code gt 02 Cartage Minimum Charge Option Minimum Charge Amount D Minimum Pay Option Minimum Quantity D Minimum Charge Pay IR Minimum Quantity ee Additional Per Load Amount Maximum Quantity Ll O 5 Enterthe Default Rate for the table The date of the change will default If you change an existing rate the old rate will move to the Previous Rate field 6 Enter Rate UOM for the rate table 7 Set the Cartage Type as Payment if the cartage fee is directly paid to the hauler Charge if the cartage fee is to be charged to the customer Both if the cartage fee is sometimes paid and sometimes charged 8 Select a haul charge Item Code This code will appear on the customer invoice it is used to define the taxability of the cartage rate table and for determining where to book GL entries The Item Code must be set up prior to setting up the Cartage Rate Table 9 Select a Minimum Charge Option This field gives you a number of options to establish a minimum haul charge regardless of load size or clock time The options are No Minimum Charge Minimum Ch
429. to the center position Mark the Start Printing after Last Page is Spooled checkbox and click OK To configure a printer connected to a HP JetDirect network port 1 2 3 4 Install the printer normally Right click on the new printer icon and select Properties Select the Ports tab Select the port being used and select Configure Select the Optional tab The following settings should be selected Parallel Mode Centronics Parallel Handshaking Busy only Error Behavior Dump then Reboot Status Page Language Text 5 Select OK until the Printer Properties dialog has closed Generic Printer Setup If there is a printer on your system that is not found in the Possible Print Models that printer and the computer can be configured to communicate through a generic print format that emulates Epson printers To configure Windows to accept a generic print model 1 From the Start menu open the Settings sub menu and select Printers 2 Select Add a printer from the subsequent menu 3 Follow the instructions of the Add Printer Wizard routine and choose Local printer to configure the new printer 4 Select Epson from the Manufacturers list and Epson FX 286 as the type Add Printer Wizard Add Printer Wizard Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer
430. tory Accounting Periods EDTIVPD A Inventory Accounting Periods Biel Es Accounting Year 2005 Number of Periods fi 2 gl Period Dates Bl foivan 2005 m 34Jan2005 M Open Sinn m 31 Jul 2005 Open By 01 Feb 2005 m 28 Feb 2005 Iv Open m 0TAug 2005 m 31 Aug 2005 M Open JO1 Mar 2005 31 Mar 2005 M Open m 01 Sep 2005 m 30 Sep 2005 MM Open 01 Apr 2005 30 Apr 2005 M Open J01 Oct 2005 31 Oct 2005 M Open 01 May 2005 31 May 2005 M Open By 01 Nov 2005 30 Nov 2005 IV Open In Jun 2006 m f30Jun 2005 M Open BY 01 Dec 2005 31 Dec 2005 Iv Open Defaults Start Date End Date Start Date End Date 2 Enter the Accounting Year for which you are establishing accounting periods 3 Enter the Number of Periods A number of fields corresponding to that number of periods will open in the Period Dates section of the screen 4 Enter a Start Date and End Date for each accounting period To designate a period as open currently able to accept transactions mark the Open checkbox beside that period Note To create accounting periods that correspond to the months of the year select the Defaults button This also marks every period in the new year as open 5 Accept the Inventory Accounting Periods screen A R Accounting Periods The A R Accounting Periods function allows users to establish the beginning and ending dates for accounting periods within an accounting year Accounting Periods are used to d
431. ts EDTPROJ4 Product Description Information EDTPROJ5 Sundry Charge Information EDTPROJ6 UOM Quantity Extensions EDTPR OJ7 Product Cartage Information EDTPR OJ8 Item Unit of Measure Information N A EDTPR OJ9 Taxing Details N A EDTPROJA Main Tab EDTPROJB Addresses Tab EDTPROJC Sales Information Tab EDTPROJD Sales Schedule Information Tab EDTPROJE Taxing Information Tab EDTPROJF Pricing Tab EDTPROJG Charge Information Tab EDTPROJH Accounting Tab EDTPROJI Invoicing Tab EDTPROJJ Distribution Tab EDTPROJK User Field Tab EDTPROJL Plant Distances Tab EDTPROJM Ready Mix Information Tab EDTPROJO Aggregate Products Information Tab EDTQUOT Quotes N A EDTQUOT1 Address Contact Information N A EDTQUOT2 Sales Information N A EDTQUOT3 Taxing Information N A EDTQUOT4 Pricing Information N A EDTQUOTS5 Distribution Information N A EDTQUOT6 Products Information N A EDTQUOT7 Action Items Information N A 348 Form Name Screen Name Configuration EDTQUOT8 Status N A EDTQUOTB Sales Schedule Information N A EDTQUOTC Charges Information N A EDTQUOTD Product Pricing N A EDTQUOTE Product Description N A EDTQUOTF UOM Quantities Extensions N A EDTQUOTG Accepted Quote Update N A EDTQUOTH Quote Copy N A EDTQUOTI Print Option N A EDTQUOTK Quote
432. ts in the product entry format field Projects Products tab Summary Ready Mix EDTPROJN Main Addresses Pricing Accounting Invoicing Distribution User Fields Distances Products Forecast Plant WI zl Summary Ready Ma Products zl Mix Products Assoc Ready Product Plant Description Category Price Pricing Prods Mix 2500 fall rj 2500 20 378 CONCUS 62 00 EE E alal sl 4000 E 4000 pe CONCUS Stol EE E d gt 2000 WI gt 2000 3 4 3 8 CONCUS 115 00 E E E d Extra Products f A else Leather EXTPROD 000 _ EE gt 28 fall gt 7172 Stone cacaus ro d sl f70 all gt Color Red Oth 7200 WEN Elll d sl all rj DelSand Lbs SNDUS 80 az Indicates ltem Category 2 Enter the Product code or detail on the field to select from a list 3 Selecta Plant from the drop down list 4 The product Description and Category will default from the Product file 5 The Price will default from the product file Edit the price for the project as needed 6 Press the Pricing button to display the Project Product Pricing screen Edit the information as necessary 7 Press the Assoc Prods button to add an associated product to the mix 8 Press the Ready Mix button to display the Project Product Ready Mix Information screen Edit the information as necessary 8 9 05 9 Press Add Occurrence to add another mix or proceed to the Extra Products sectio
433. u ddy 329 8 9 05 s jqeL 330 s jqeL WIHAO WIHAQ IAUAq Jan I 96T spou3 NW SpOUjoW Bulinod Buiinod Z8T S poO ASeL S poO ASEL 6T s poo s po uonij puoo UuolIDUuOO PET Spoujow MaAljaq spoyujyew AdAljaq IST si l ej1 sJi l ej1 sJl l ej1 si le1l SZT SOLL Sond sons Sond SHONAL PZT sadAj 4onIL sadAj 4onIL sadAj yon s d J NIL s d J NILI EZT si neH si neH si neH si neH si neH ZZT sobeg dew sobeg dew pot S UR d S UP d S UP d S UP d S UP d s ueld 6ST suolqe907 suolje907 suol e907 suol e907 SUO E907 8ST uonmeinBiJuoo uolnmeinBiJuoo uolnmeinBiJuoo uolnmegeinBiJuoo uolnmeinBijuoo uonesinBiyuoy uoneuinBijuo2 ZT s poo xe Sapod xe Sapod XeL s po xel S po2o5 XeL TT su01 290 SUO e90 suo01 2e90 suoneoo JA1uoupng JA1uoupng JA1uoupng Suolyeoo Ayuoune xe XeL xp SEU Asiiouine xeL PTT s nuoun ne xe s niuounne xe SOIDLUOUIDE xe salwsouyne xe s nioun1ne xeL ETT s po yu uuysn pv CIT s poo ueg ITT spolsed Buinunoooe 4 5 OTT spolsed spolsed Buljunosoe Y Y Bulyunosoe Y Y 60T spolsed Bununosse AJOJUDAUT 80T eyez e 1bby SAIZNIIDXA A10 USAUT SIIGeAIDIOY BuIDIOAUT 9 9819U0 d 8 9 05 331 uoz uoz uoz uoz uoz uoz 3 neJj p yNeJap 2ejd 0 YNejop asoejd oi yNejap Vejd yNej
434. uantity CARTAGE RATE x QUANTITY For example truck type A from plant 5 shipping to zone 1000 carries 15 tons of pea gravel The haul charge is calculated as follows S 5 00 ton x 15 tons 75 00 Hauler pay is calculated as follows S4 15 ton x 15 tons 62 25 To enter a new plant zone cartage rate 1 Go to the Cartage Rate Codes screen 2 Enter a Cartage Rate Table to identify the new cartage rate 3 Enter a Description and Short description for the cartage rate 4 Select Plant Zone as the Rate Type Plant Zone Cartage EDTCTRT1 Main Zones Rate UOM gt 60003 tons Cartage Type Both x j Item Code xino Cartage Minimum Charge Option Minimum Charge Amount x j Minimum Pay Option Minimum Quantity z Minimum Charge Pay 0 Minimum Quantity Y Additional Per Load Amount C Maximum Quantity KCl Calculate Unloading Charge peho Use Pricing Plant 5 Enter the Rate UOM for the rate table 6 Set the Cartage Type as Payment if the cartage fee is directly paid to the hauler Charge if the cartage fee is to be charged to the customer Both if the cartage fee is sometimes paid and sometimes charged 7 Select a haul charge Item Code This code will appear on the customer invoice it is used to define the taxability of the cartage rate table and for determining where to book GL entries The Item Code must be set up prior to setting up the Cartage Rate Table
435. ublication Command Alkon Incorporated assumes no obligation whatever to inform any user of the modification This publication may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Command Alkon Incorporated assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual This publication is intended only for the direct benefit of users of Command Alkon Incorporated products This manual may not be used for any purposes other than those for which it is provided Information disclosed herein was originated by and is the property of Command Alkon Incorporated and except for rights granted by written consent such information shall not be disclosed disseminated or duplicated in whole or in part Command Alkon Incorporated reserves all patent proprietary design manufacturing use and reproduction rights Command Alkon Incorporated 1800 International Park Drive Suite 400 Birmingham AL 35243 4232 205 879 3282 5168 Blazer Parkway Dublin OH 43017 1339 614 799 6650 www commandalkon com COMMANDseries and the names of its components such as COMMANDconcrete and COMMANDnetwork Spectrum Eagle and COMMANDbatch are registered trademarks of Command Alkon Incorporated All rights reserved Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation of Redmond Washington Contents Introducti n J Q Qsssssssssusuawanawawawawawamawsasawasaanunuaaasawssnanaawamnawswawana 11 Gathering Informati n EE 11 So
436. ude e Ready mix concrete e Aggregate e Admixture e Extra charges Unit of measure and other information associated with each category defaults into the corresponding fields on the Items screen when a new item is created and assigned a particular category Files gt Item Information gt Items Before entering Item Category information gather information about the items that you use and decide how you want them organized for lookup and reporting purposes Topics in this section Item Types Item Categories Setup Item Categories UOM Setup Item Categories Mix Defaults Setup Item Categories Tax Override Setup Item Types An important part of creating an Item Category is assigning the category an Item Type The Item types correspond to general product classifications Cement ready mix coarse aggregate etc and provide an underlying layer 8 9 05 205 of consistency to the item setup process which in turn allows for greater flexibility in setting up Item Categories Item Types can only be assigned at the Item Category level They cannot be assigned at the Item level Selecting an Item Type has a number of effects The Item Type defaults a base set of UOM entries These entries can be edited at either the Item Category or Item level The Item Type affects the appearance of the Item Category and Item screens For example the Mix Defaults tab only appears on the Item Category screen if the Item Type is either as
437. uency Daily j Copies to Print D Haul Charges Print haul charge as separate line tem x Minimum Haul Charges Print total minimum haul charge x j Separate Invoices by Product Line 2 From the Print One Invoice Per field s list define the contents of printed invoices This field selects and groups tickets and orders into a single invoice for the customer 3 Depending on your selection in the Print One Invoice Per field the following three fields appear or disappear Please select the settings based on these values Sort and Sub Total By the criteria by which the invoices are sorted and sub totaled Print Products Tickets tickets and products listed on an invoice print Detail or Summary Days on One Invoice invoices are created for single days or for multiple days 4 From the Invoice Frequency field s list select the cycle code for the printing of customer invoices Options are Daily Weekly Monthly When you print invoices you can specify when frequency s to run 5 If you need more than one copy of this customer s invoices to print enter the number of Copies to Print 6 From the Haul Charges field s list select the method for printing haul charges Print haul charges as a separate line item or Combine haul charges with material price 7 From the Minimum Haul Charges field s list select the method for printing minimum haul charges Print total minimum haul charge or Separate actual and in
438. unt if an additional charge applies This amount will be added to the charge pay amount Accept this screen to save the cartage rate table Per Load Cartage Rates To pay haulers a flat rate per load use a cartage rate table that charges on a per load basis Per load cartage rates are calculated using the following method CARTAGE RATE To enter a new per load cartage rate 1 2 3 Go to the Cartage Rate Codes screen Enter a Cartage Rate Code to identify the new cartage rate If the table is intended for a single customer or project enter the appropriate Customer and Project Codes If a cartage table is assigned to a specific customer project then when attempting to assign a cartage table to an order on another customer or project the dedicated rate table will not display in the table lookup screen Enter a Description and Short description for the cartage rate Select Load as the Rate Type Per Load options EDTCTRT1 Main Default Rate J 45 00 Effective Bl foiwan 2001 PreviousRate Rate UOM gt 80002 per load Cartage Type JBoth P j Item Code lb cage 6 Enter the Default Rate for the table The date of the change will default If you change an existing rate the old rate will move to the Previous Rate field 7 Set the Rate UOM to 80001 each or 80002 per load 8 Set the Cartage Type as Payment if the cartage fee is directly paid to the hauler Charge if the cartage fee
439. up delivery methods 1 In COMMANDaggregate open the Delivery Methods screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Delivery Methods Delivery Methods EDTDLMT m Delivery Methods Bisi x Code Description Short Delivery Type 2 Deliveredin Company Trucks Company Delivered m j3 Pckedup s FOB Ja 2 Under the Code field enter the code that represents the delivery method you are entering 3 Under the Description field enter a description for the delivery method 4 Under the Short field enter an abbreviated description for the delivery method 5 Under the Delivery Type field select the delivery type associated with the delivery method The options are Delivered F O B or Both 6 Select the Add Occurrence button to enter another delivery method 7 When you are finished accept the Delivery Methods screen 879 05 181 Pouring Methods Pouring methods allow for more standardization in the use of pouring methods by allowing you to establish a number of common pouring methods and linking them to an appropriate unloading time Having these values available prevents the order taker from having to estimate unloading rates while talking to the customer Pouring Methods are entered into the system in the Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information menu Some examples of possible Pouring Method options are Pouring Method Rate CY Comment Standard 5 min A baseline rate particula
440. ure version of COMMANDseries Enter the default Scheduled Load Size to use in the Truck Types screen s Load Size field when entering new truck types in the system Select a default Scheduled Plant Code to assign to any new projects non project orders or tickets To facilitate initial setup of the configuration file this field allows you to enter a plant code that does not exist in the plant code file If this is the case make sure that you subsequently enter the plant code on the Plants screen Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants Specify the default color for the Tracking Truck Color field on the Trucks screen for use in truck tracking This is the default color when entering new trucks Plant colors take precedence over truck colors If Plant 1 has green trucks a blue truck from Plant 2 turns green if clocked in at Plant 1 This occurs only if the plant has a specified color Set the default value for the Tracking Truck Flag field on the Trucks screen The flag set for the truck is used on the Truck Tracking screen when displaying the truck Masterfile settings control basic Data I O functions 9 10 11 12 Specify the Master File Data In Defaults to set the error message logging Use these defaults to validate certain fields representing foreign keys to COMMANDseries tables When an invalid field is encountered the Configuration Customer Default value is used If the Configuration Default value is
441. ures involve entering a customer code It is important that you feel comfortable finding customer related information in the system These directions are based on an order entry screen however this procedure will work anywhere you have to enter a customer code To look up a customer code 1 Select the detail button next to the Customer Code or press lt Enter gt to access the Select screen 8 9 05 Select screen 1 thru EW SE tange U This screen allows you to search for customers using one or more search parameters Each search parameter has its own line The first field allows you to select the field you wish to key on The Customer Sort Name is the default value but you can select other options by selecting the field and choosing another field from the drop down list 2 The next field determines how you wish to search through that field The options are Begins as Looks at the beginning of each field entry for the specified search string This is most useful for searching for names as opposed to numbers Range of Similar to Begins as but by providing a second field for a search string this option allows for broader searches Contains The system looks through the entire field for the search string as opposed to just the beginning 3 In the field to the right enter the search string If Range of is the search option there will be two fields in which to specify the range 4 Ifyou wis
442. us field indicate if the item is Non taxable Taxable or Always Taxable for this tax authority location The purpose of this field is to override the status entered on the Sales tab in the event that the status is not applicable to this tax authority location If the status is non taxable indicate the reason in the Non Taxable Reason field 5 Inthe Override Tax Rate Location field enter a code that represents the tax rate location or press lt Enter gt to select a code from the Choices Tax Authorities gt Locations File screen 6 Click the Add Occurrence button to repeat this procedure for other tax authorities or accept the screen Item Mix Setup The Mix tab is used to enter information about how the item is batched This tab will only be available if the Item Type is asphalt or concrete To define mix information for asphalt 1 Select the Mix tab Items Mix Tab Asphalt EDTIMST6 Inventory Batching Batch Codes C Main UOM Conversions Sales TasOveride Mis Strength gt m Asphaltic Cement Type Aggregate Size mg Minimum Temperature I Percent Recycle 2 Enter the Strength of the mix This field represents the average design strength of the mix product 3 Enter the Asphaltic Cement Type of the mix 4 Enter the mix s Aggregate Size This is the maximum size of the aggregate filler in the mix 5 Enter the Minimum Temperature required in batching the asphalt 6 The mix s Per
443. usting Formats Using the Document Fields Screen Mask Characters Tickets plant copy and dispatch copy Plant Communication Setup Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants gt Communication gt Setup Orders Dispatch gt Orders Plant Communication Setup Files gt Plant amp Delivery Information gt Plants gt Communication gt Setup User Order Printer Setup Files gt System Information gt Users gt Order Printers gt Setup Data Out and Data In Data Out Order Data Out Invoicing gt Order Data Out Ticket Data Out Invoicing gt Ticket Data Out Master File Data Out Files gt Master File Data Out G L Distribution Data Out COMMANDreceivables Manage gt Application Management gt G L Distribution Data Out 8 9 05 Data In Orders amp Tickets Data In Invoicing gt Order amp Ticket Data In Invoices Statements Quotes Document Format Groups Files gt General Information gt Document Format Groups Entering Document Formats Before entering document formats information gather information about the way you want tickets orders invoices statements and quotes to look Also determine if you will be importing or exporting any information to other systems for processing To enter document formats 1 Goto the Document Format screen Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Formats Document Formats EDTDOCS m Document Formats Bisi EZ Documen
444. ustments The Adjustment Recap Report determines which adjustments are for write off purposes based on this field 5 Accept the Adjustment Codes screen Tax Authorities Tax authorities represent the main groups of taxing entities i e county state province federal etc Up to five tax authorities can be maintained in the COMMANDseries applications Tax authorities determine the base upon which tax is calculated on taxable sales alone or including some other tax authority s tax whether the taxation point is origination or destination based and whether there is reciprocity between the two Before entering tax authorities information gather information about the taxing entities and laws applicable to your business Remember that the tax authority order entered during setup determines the order taxes will be entered throughout the system People operating in multiple state should take care to ensure that taxing authorities are entered to accomodate all areas in which business is done To set up tax authorities 1 Goto the Tax Authorities screen Files gt Sales Tax Information gt Tax Authorities 8 9 05 113 Tax Authorities EDTTAXA m Tax Authorities ill Ea Code Description Prompt Tax Based on fi State STATE Taxable sales plus previous authorities tax j l Point of Taxation Destination z M Allow Reciprocation d 2 City city Taxable sales B j Port of Taxation Destination z Allow Rec
445. ution to allow Materials Managers to substitute constituents Item UOM Setup The UOM tab is used to enter unit of measure information that is specific to the item This is different from the UOM tab on the Item Categories screen in that information on the Item Categories UOM tab is defined for a category and information on the Items UOM tab is defined for an item To define UOM information 1 Select the UOM tab Items UOM Tab EDTIMST2 R Conversions Sales Tax Override Locations Costs Prices Inventory Batching Batch Codes Ordered Quantity Ordered Quantity Extension Code 60003 Tons Per Unit z Delivered Quantity Ticket Quantity Extension Code gt e0003 Tons Delivered Quantity Accumulate Price Quantity Price Quantity Extension Code 60003 Tons Delivered Quantity D Batch Inventory Cost Purchase Reporting gt 60002 pounds 60003 Tons 60003 Tons 60003 Tons 2 The UOM information defaults from the Item Categories file Make any necessary changes Note If you need help making changes refer to the Item Categories section in this manual Item Conversions Setup The Conversions tab is used to enter information about converting from one unit of measure to another For example in order to use the Volume 8 9 05 213 Calculator effectively with aggregate products the system must be able to convert a given aggregate from weight to volume To define conversions information 1
446. validates the new time to see if it is within the specified percentage of the current travel time New Acceptable Travel Current Travel Time Allowable Accepted Time Travel Time Load Gin Range Y N 30 20 50 10 30 Y 30 20 25 15 25 N Some users will start with this value set relatively high 75 100 and slowly reduce the value down to 50 as more live ticket data becomes available To configure COMMANDseries with rules for time posting amp processing 1 Go to the Distribution Configuration screen Files gt General Information gt Configuration gt Distribution Configuration Distribution Tab EDTCNFXD Receivables Aging Statements Financials Projects Quotes Lien User Fields Optimizatior System Defaults Distribution Dispatch Aggregate Signaling Invoicing Inventory Days to Save Detail J 365 Number of Days Back to Allow Dispatch o Change Truck Signaling Unit with Inbound Messages E j Cartage Frequency Monthly D Default Schedule Adjustment Type M Require Order Qty on Non Primary Products for Orders z Apply Schedule Adjusment Type B j Dynamic Plant Fleet Size Allow Dispatch to Activate Quotes Z Use Shipping Address IT Tax FOB Shipments based on the Shipping Plant s Tax Code Require Postal Code Iv date Scheduled Qty Based On Ordered Oty Travel Time Post Tolerance _ Acceptable Travel Time Load Percentage IR 2 Enter the Travel Tim
447. very Information 158 ee e EE 158 Plants vk enue ESA EEN EENEG ERAO 159 Plant NEE 160 Plant Main Tab Setup EE 161 Plant Communication Setup eigene ge tee E E 162 Communications Port Setup Sege A Eege ER 163 Plant Batching Setup EEN 164 Plant Scheduling Zeus ge usu EE ENEE dE Ed 165 Plant Costs d EEN 166 Plant Plants Setup eg Egide 168 Plant Scal amp S t D EEN 168 Plant e EE DEE 170 Constituent Order EIER duet 171 Plant User TN 172 Eenegkeet EES 172 Tr ck Ku 173 TEUGES eege 174 Entering a New PUCK EE 174 Truck Scheduling eege eebe 175 Tr ck Tracking RE MEET 176 Overhead Loadout EE 177 Truck TE EE 178 RI 178 Trailer Setup deer EE 179 Trailers Scheduling TEE 179 Trailer Tar e S et D uuu usss aus d EEN a A EAE ERa 180 Trailer Overhead Loadout Setup EK AER SEA EK REKER 180 Delivery Rebeet Eege Eet 181 ett ue BE dn ee CC 182 JOB Cost Ereegnes ENNEN ed EA dd 183 ZOMCS ege EE ee ee EEN 185 Map Pages NEE 186 Map Page Time Periods Setup r 186 Map Pages Do EEN 187 Travel Times Setup EE 188 Map Pages Zones te EE 189 Map Pages C ordinates Aessen 189 Automatic Travel Time Posting r 189 Deadhead KE dE e WEE 192 Task TE 193 Condition en WEE 194 Driver Overtime TE 196 Items and PRICING ZepeeEawsete kee REENEN REN
448. ward calculation COD Amount Invoice Total etc An advanced reference tag In some cases you need to link to data that is greater than one table link from the primary table the data is in a table that is referenced by a table that is referenced by a table that is available in the selected Document Type A Calculation tag is needed for such links e Code List A different form of an advanced reference tag For example in the Order file the Order Type entry is 1 2 3 etc The number corresponds to a description of the specified Order Type The Code List tag allows you to pull the description of the Order Type Charge Order for example Document Tag Setup You can create Field and Lookup tags for any data in out function except Order Print amp Data In Out Calculation and Code List tags can only be created by Command Alkon To enter a field document tag 1 Goto the Document Tags screen Files gt General Information gt Documents gt Document Tags 86 Document Tags EDTDOCT field W Document Tags Eil Document Type Ticket Print amp Data In Out Tag CUSNAM Tag Description Tag Type File Field Name CUSNAM Customer Name Field j ORDR m CUST_NAME ewa 2 Select a Document Type from the field s list This setting determines how the tag will be used Statement Print Invoice Print etc 3 Inthe Tag field enter a six character alphanumeric code When you tab the system lists all ta
449. x click the Setup button See instructions below 7 Select the Add Occurrence button to add other lanes 8 Accept the screen Auto Ticketing Units Libra Asphalt Interface Setup Follow the instructions below if you selected Libra Asphalt Interface in the Unit Type field To set up the Libra 1 Select the Libra tab from the Auto Ticketing Units screen Files gt General Information gt Auto Ticketing Units gt Libra Auto Ticketing Units Libra Tab EDTAUTK3 Communication Libra Target Plant Scale Manager Code Code Action f Ah fF BF Stop Light d 3 gt n Batch Operation M Stop Light Setup d 2 Enter a Manager Number Plant Code and Scale Code 3 Inthe Action field select Batch Operation Silo Operation or Batch or Silo Operation 4 Mark the Stop Light checkbox if you want a stop light 5 If you marked the Stop Light checkbox click the Setup button See instructions below 6 Select the Add Occurrence to add other target managers 7 Accept the screen Stop Light Setup To set up the stop light 1 Click the Setup button 2 Select an Interface Type 3 If the Interface Type is ICS I O Controller or Kontron I O enter a Base Address and Base Address Bit If the Interface Type is Serial enter the Manager Number and Port Name Select the Port button to configure the specified port If the Interface Type is SmartPass no port configuration is needed 4 Enter a Duration in seconds
450. x Percent Double Prox Per Unit NEOM Percent or NEOM Per Unit as the terms type 1 This step is dependent upon the terms type If the terms type is Double Prox Percent or NEOM Percent Mark the Delivery Exempt checkbox if a portion of the sales amount will be exempt from the calculation of a discount The Exemption Type and Exemption Rate fields define this Select an Exemption Type from the field s list Enter an Exemption Rate for the exemption type If the terms type is Double Prox Per Unit or NEOM Per Unit select the Per Unit UOM that should be applied NEOM Per Unit Terms Type Terms Type JNEOM Per Unit x j Per Unit UOM gt Dom mms For Invoice Dated Between These Days j and Discount Date On This Day Of The Next Next Month Due Date On This Day DfThe Next Next Month Discount Amount Per Unit Is For Invoice Dated Between These Days and Discount Date On This Day Of The Next Month Due Date On This Day Of The Next Month Discount Amount Per Unit Is 2 Enter the starting and ending invoice day for a double prox or non end of month terms type in the For Invoice Dated Between These Days fields 8 9 05 123 3 Enter a value in the Discount Date On This Day field This value defines the specific day used to compute the discount date for the current terms code 4 Enter the Due Date On This Day of the next month 5 This step is dependent upon the terms type If term
451. y Enter the Current Accounting Year fiscal Enter a Tax ID for the company Accept the screen to save the company information 8 9 05 Company Cost Centers Setup Cost Centers are areas or divisions within a company to which revenues and costs are assigned Files gt G L Information gt Cost Centers To assign company cost centers 1 Select a Cost Center Account code and Sub Account code for which to assign Net Profit If cost centers have not yet been defined leave this field blank and return to it after cost centers are defined Files gt G L Information gt Cost Centers 2 Select a Cost Center Account code and Sub Account code to associate with Retained Earnings for this company If cost centers have not yet been defined leave this field blank and return to it after cost centers are defined Files gt G L Information gt Cost Centers 3 Accept the screen to save the cost centers information Company Finance Charges Setup The Company Finance Charges function allows the user with appropriate system security to access company based finance charges that can be assessed against customer balances in COMMANDreceivables The Create Finance Charges option passes through the customer balance file and creates finance charge transactions that can then be posted to the customer s record Manage gt Application Management gt Create Finance Charges The information on this screen controls how the balances belongi
452. y 00 0SI 3 amp 2 pold 1U El AJOUSAUT JasJjO JUBsWYSN py AsJOJUBAUT BY p4o2 1 OL Sjee w ISO psepueys je AzQueNnb 1u uussn pe 00 OST 1873 poid 1U El Mey AIOUUSAUT y 104 AJOJUSAU 0 BSESIOU BY pi1o2 1 OL JUNOWY JUNOWIY yuno5o5e A4 1u o Au d L uoipesuelIL Ip 19 1yiq d qns 1Soo 3815 3uno55v 0S 3509 DippupIs sliun 0Z AIOIUSAUT 0 1u uulsn pv z jdurex7 s u ur sn py 367 8 9 05 368 8 9 05 Appendix E Content Pricing Content pricing Sometimes called five sack pricing uses a base price per unit which can be increased or decreased depending on the mix s cement content In contrast standard pricing uses a standard unit price which stays the same regardless of whether more or less units are used Sales involving a project or a customer with a quoted content item price do not include zone charges discounts or admix charges Quoted items for a customer or project use standard pricing e Zone charges are calculated the same way they are when using standard pricing If zone charges are enabled in the system but are not to be charged they must be manually disabled in the customer s and project s file e Discounts will apply if the customer or project is set up and the product is eligible Discounts do not apply to quoted prices on customers or projects e Admix charges are the total price of the admixes in the mix The formula for non quoted orders is Base Price Up Down Fact
453. y it must be called from its parent form Program Manager Options The next three fields allow you to create a toolbar button that will launch an external windows programn such as Microsoft Word 5 Enter the Description of an external application or program to which you wish to assign a toolbar button This can be the description as it would be entered if run from the Windows Program Manager Enter the Command Line of an external application or program to which you wish to assign a toolbar button This can be the command line as it would be entered if run from the Windows Program Manager Enter the Working Directory of an external application or program to which you wish to assign a toolbar button This can be the working directory as it would be entered if run from the Windows Program Manager Additional Toolbar Options 8 9 10 Mark the Display Language List on Toolbar checkbox if desired to display the language list on the toolbar Mark Display Help on Toolbar checkbox if desired to display the help options on the toolbar Accept this screen to confirm the changes 8 9 05 COMMANDexecutive COMMANDexecutive is a sales reporting module that can help you analyze how your business is performing If you are licensed for COMMANDexecutive you will need to enter two key components Topics in this section Sales Data Periods Sales Data Configuration Sales Data Periods Sales Data Periods are user
454. y their map page and plants with a dynamic timing system that accounts for varying travel times throughout the day and the changes to the travel time throughout the day Through communications with COMMANDcomm the travel times dynamically account for the actual time spent traveling to a map page from a specific plant at a specific time of day Before setting up map pages you must enter map page time periods Files gt General Information gt Map Page Time Periods These time periods reflect the periods during the day when travel times to a map page from a plant are affected by traffic rush hour lunch hour etc Topics in this section Map Page Time Periods Setup Map Pages Setup Map Pages Zones Setup Map Pages Coordinates Automatic Travel Time Posting Map Page Time Periods Setup The Map Page Time Periods screen allows users to define periods of the day when travel times are consistently unique Users can setup a separate time classification for all possible travel times according to the time of day For example a separate time period should exist for morning rush hour average morning traffic lunch traffic normal afternoon traffic evening rush hour etc To enter map page time periods 1 Goto the Map Page Time Periods screen Files gt General Information gt Map Page Time Periods 186 Map Page Time Periods EDTMAPP W Map Page Time Peri Sif Ea lk 2 For each Code enter
455. y your username e Initialization preferences that control On line Help display order entry functions and the initial display of the application logo e Sounds colors fonts keys toolbar and network options Except where noted changes on this screen affect the current workstation When you accept this screen you are prompted to restart COMMANDseries Language date format and order and sound changes take effect immediately color changes only take effect when and you log out and back into the application Topics in this section General Preferences Setup User Preferences Setup Sound Preferences Setup Color Preferences Setup Tracking Preferences Setup Font Preferences Setup Keys Preferences Setup Toolbar Preferences Setup General Preferences Setup To define general preferences 1 Goto the General tab Misc gt Preferences gt General 9 Preferences General Tab SYSPREF1 Preferences Me E3 General User Sounds Colors Tracking Fonts Keys Toolbar Forms Logo Time fi COMMAND series Image D Activate Editor Forms VE Instances of Each Editor Allowed z MV Simplified Orders IV Use Order Prefix Screen Use Toolbar Show System Name in Title Bar Z Clear Message Frame Frequently Conserve Memory Default Order Lookup User Order File M In the Logo Time field enter the number of seconds the application logo is to be displayed when you log into any application To keep the
456. ying the charge to all products enter in the field 6 Select the Unit of Measure to use when applying the seasonal charge The UOM applies the seasonal charge per the specified unit 7 Specify the amount of the seasonal charge in the Price field When applied this amount is added to each measured unit of the order Using the above screen shot as an example a 12 50 cubic yard order ticketed between November 15 and April 30 would have Item Code 292 added to the order The charges on the tickets would total 75 00 8 Accept this screen to store the new seasonal charge information Unloading Charges The Unloading Charges screen is used to set up additional unloading charges or wait charges and to edit unloading charges already in existence Seasonal sundry and minimum load charges are all created when an applicable load is ticketed Unloading charges however cannot be calculated until the materials has been delivered They are generally calculated as part of the invoice prep process To enter a new unloading charge 1 Go to the Unloading Charge Table screen Files gt Item Information gt Unloading Charge Table 8 9 05 229 Unloading Charge Table EDTUCHG 4 Unloading Charge Table EN Unloading Charge T able 2 Description Unloading Charges ti i SCS S Short Unloadin Beginning Tracking Status jo n Job B j Ending Tracking Status Wash z Allowance Per Load Minutes Allowance Per Unit gt
457. yuno5o5e A4 1u o Au d L uonmo esue L Hai 1yiq dqd qns 1soo 3815 yuno55v OS Z 1so2 psepuejs SHUN OT PIOS sajdurex sasevsy 364 8 9 05 SIULLICA ld yue d 0 JajSues dU 18 ISO DISDUEIS y pue 13so5 0S 3eD pold que e1372 W AIO1USNUT 4ajJSUeI 230 BY u 9U JJIP BY pio52 1 OL u ny4suop que d o1 J JSULIJ OS Z6 IECH pold ueduuooS s Besn AsoJUSAUT y 104 JOSJJO JaJSUeI AJOJUSAUT y p109 1 OL Ued 0 Jajsues 42 JSOD piepuel1s sjelajep uejd 0 Jajsuesy 00 S8 IECH poid Uuejd Mey AIO1USaAUT y 104 AJOJUDAU 0 BSEdSIOU BY p109 4 OL Sau O L Jossuesy JajSuedy quejd UO sajsuesj 0S 76 IECH poid Auedwo7 AJOJUSAUT BY 104 JOSJJO JOJSUeI AJOJUSAUT BU P4ODI4 OL JO INCH Jaysuesy quejd UO Jaysuesy 00 OT IECH pold Uuejd AJOJUSAUT y 104 JSOO neu JaJsuet BY pio2 1 OL nuejd OS Z IECH poid yjue qd dny4sep AIOIUSAUT UO 1 4SUu2e1 DY 104 dnyJew y pio2 1 OL que d UO JaJsues Je ISO piepue1s sjelajep uejd wo Jaysuey 00 SZ IECH pold Uuejd Mey AJOUSAUT y 104 AJOJUDAU 0 sSe 1 p y p109 1 OL Sau WOJ 1 JSue I L JUNOWY unowy yunoo5o5e A4 1u o Au d L uonmo5esue L 1ip o 1yiq dqd qns 1Soo 3815 3uno55v 365 0S 8 JsOD Digpuge 907 OL WUN Jad QO T INEH OG Z 3 S00 piepue1s dng OT T 207 Wo SHUN OT 4 JSUe1L z jdurux7 SI JSUVIL 8 9 05

Setting Up the System Guide - Command Alkon User Gateway

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents